ADC Air Client

Operations Reference
ADC Air Client v4.21.18

30-July-2013
Revision: Release
Delivering the Moment
Publication Information
2014 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
Imagine Communications considers this document and its contents to be proprietary and confidential.
Except for making a reasonable number of copies for your own internal use, you may not reproduce this
publication, or any part thereof, in any form, by any method, for any purpose, or in any language other
than English without the written consent of Imagine Communications. All others uses are illegal.
This publication is designed to assist in the use of the product as it exists on the date of publication of this
manual, and may not reflect the product at the current time or an unknown time in the future. This publication does not in any way warrant description accuracy or guarantee the use for the product to which it
refers.
Imagine Communications reserves the right, without notice to make such changes in equipment, design,
specifications, components, or documentation as progress may warrant to improve the performance of
the product.
Trademarks
ADC is a trademark of Imagine Communications or its subsidiaries. Microsoft and Windows are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks and trade names are the property of
their respective companies.
Contact Information
Imagine Communications has oce locations around the world. For locations and contact information see:
http://www.imaginecommunications.com/contact us/
Support Contact Information

For support contact information see:
Support Contacts: http://www.imaginecommunications.com/services/technical support/
Customer Portal: http://support.imaginecommunications.com

Contents
Contents
Air Client Overview .............................................................................................. 15
About Air Client ...................................................................................................................................... 15
Minimum System Requirements........................................................................................................ 15
About Playlists .................................................................................................................................... 16
About Events ...................................................................................................................................... 17
About Time Zones .............................................................................................................................. 21
About using Dual Output Video Cards ............................................................................................... 22
Air Client Desktop ................................................................................................................................... 22
Ribbon Toolbars ...................................................................................................................................... 23
File Ribbon Tab ................................................................................................................................... 23
Edit Ribbon Tab .................................................................................................................................. 24
Events Ribbon Tab .............................................................................................................................. 25
Servers Ribbon Tab (for sites using Multi-server login) ..................................................................... 27
Resources Ribbon Tab ........................................................................................................................ 28
Properties Ribbon Tab ........................................................................................................................ 28
Tools Ribbon Tab ................................................................................................................................ 30
Window Ribbon Tab ........................................................................................................................... 31
Help Ribbon Tab ................................................................................................................................. 31
Quick Access Ribbon Tab.................................................................................................................... 31
Quick Access Toolbar .............................................................................................................................. 32
Right Click Menus ................................................................................................................................... 32
List Window Right Click Menu ............................................................................................................ 32
View List Right-Click Menu ................................................................................................................. 33
Control Panels......................................................................................................................................... 36
Hardware Control Panel ..................................................................................................................... 36
Software Control Panel ...................................................................................................................... 37
2013 Harris Broadcast
Proprietary and Confidential
30-July-2013 | Page 3 of 336

Contents
Transmission List Window ...................................................................................................................... 39

Event Types ........................................................................................................................................ 40
Event Data Fields ................................................................................................................................ 41
Playlist Window ...................................................................................................................................... 42
Event Data Fields ................................................................................................................................ 42
Getting Started .................................................................................................... 45

To Launch Air Client ................................................................................................................................ 45
To Stop Air Client................................................................................................................................ 46
Air Client User Authentication ................................................................................................................ 46
Assigning an Administrator Password ................................................................................................ 47
Managing Server / MultiServer Connections ......................................................................................... 47
Device Server Connections (No MultiServer Logon) .......................................................................... 48
To Connect to a Device Server (w/ MultiServer Logon) ..................................................................... 48
Disconnecting from a Device Server (w/ MultiServer Logon) ............................................................ 49
To Add/Edit/Remove/Scan Available Device Server Entries (w/ MultiServer Logon) ....................... 50
Viewing Resources .................................................................................................................................. 52
To View a Full Resource List ............................................................................................................... 52
To View Device Status of a Server ...................................................................................................... 53
To View Lists available on a Device Server ......................................................................................... 53
To View Storage Devices available on a Device Server ...................................................................... 54
To View Switchers available on a Device Server ................................................................................ 55
Traffic-Generated Lists ........................................................................................................................... 56
To Save the Desktop ............................................................................................................................... 57
Help and About Information................................................................................................................... 57
To Launch the Help System ................................................................................................................ 57
To View About Information................................................................................................................ 57
Managing Window Layouts and Colors .................................................................................................. 58
To Change Window Skin Color Schemes ............................................................................................ 58
To Change Window Layouts ............................................................................................................... 58
Aero WindowsTheme Issues .............................................................................................................. 59
To Change the Windows Aero Effect Theme ..................................................................................... 59
About Operator Control Panel (OCP) Functions .................................................................................... 59
30-July-2013 | Page 4 of 336

Contents
To force reinitialize the OCP............................................................................................................... 60

Locking the Operator Control Panel (OCP)......................................................................................... 60
Using the Shift Function ..................................................................................................................... 60
Keyboard Shortcuts ................................................................................................................................ 61
A list of shortcut commands .............................................................................................................. 61
Running Air Client Offline ....................................................................................................................... 62
On-Air Playback Operations ................................................................................. 63

About On-Air Playback............................................................................................................................ 63
Automated V11 to V12 list translation utility .................................................................................... 63
To View an ON AIR List / Transmission List ............................................................................................ 64
To Build a Play List File............................................................................................................................ 65
To Save a Playlist file as Text .................................................................................................................. 67
To Open an Existing Playlist .................................................................................................................... 67
To Insert a Play List file to the Transmission List .................................................................................... 68
To Append a Play List file to the Transmission List................................................................................. 70
To Load a List .......................................................................................................................................... 72
To Run the Transmission List .................................................................................................................. 73
To Air a Live Event .................................................................................................................................. 75
Join an Event in Progress ........................................................................................................................ 76
To Preview Play....................................................................................................................................... 76
Thread, Unthread, Recue an Event......................................................................................................... 76
Using the VTR Device Control Panel ....................................................................................................... 77
Using the VDCP Device Control Panel .................................................................................................... 78
To Set on Air Focus ................................................................................................................................. 80
Calculate Durations of Multiple Events .................................................................................................. 80
Find an ID ................................................................................................................................................ 81
Find Next Occurrence of an ID in a List................................................................................................... 82
Managing Bookmarks ............................................................................................................................. 82
To Add / Remove a Bookmark............................................................................................................ 82
To Jump to a Bookmark...................................................................................................................... 84
To Set a Hard Start Event........................................................................................................................ 84
To Toggle a Hard Start ........................................................................................................................ 84
30-July-2013 | Page 5 of 336

Contents
Toggle Look Ahead.................................................................................................................................. 85

To Toggle Look Ahead ........................................................................................................................ 85
Managing List Confirmations .................................................................................................................. 85
Managing Secondary Events on a Playlist .............................................................................................. 85
To Show / Hide Secondary Events...................................................................................................... 86
About Specifying which secondary events to show or hide............................................................... 87
Managing Trigger Events ........................................................................................................................ 90
Setting the Trigger Column parameter .............................................................................................. 90
Colors for Action events: .................................................................................................................... 91
Displaying list caption with the name of Master list: ......................................................................... 92
Manage the Operation Log..................................................................................................................... 92
To Open the Operation Log in Air Client ............................................................................................ 93
To Save the Operation Log as a Textfile in Air Client ......................................................................... 93
To Export the Textfile Operation Log ................................................................................................. 93
Using Air Protect ..................................................................................................................................... 94
To Use Air Protect .............................................................................................................................. 94
To Check Switcher Control ..................................................................................................................... 94
Reviewing Tally status information in the AsRun log text file ................................................................ 95
Tally: On Air / On Line status and color for the playing event(s) of the list ....................................... 96
Log format .......................................................................................................................................... 97
Extended Play Mix/Wipes Early .............................................................................................................. 98
Example: Automatic Duration Update on the Playlist ....................................................................... 99
Displaying AFD and BarData Values in a Playlist .................................................................................. 100
Create an AFD column in the PlayList .............................................................................................. 100
To Display BarData Values in a Playlist............................................................................................. 101
Implementing ID Video ARC Override .................................................................................................. 105
Create a Custom AFD Override column in the PlayList .................................................................... 105
Manage AFD Override in a Playlist ................................................................................................... 107
Using the Zoom Window ...................................................................................................................... 109
To launch the Zoom Window ........................................................................................................... 109
Zoom Window status bar ................................................................................................................. 109
Expandable Windows ....................................................................................................................... 110
Using SyncSkip ...................................................................................................................................... 112
30-July-2013 | Page 6 of 336

Contents
About the SyncSkip command ......................................................................................................... 112

Required Conditions ......................................................................................................................... 113
Example Operation........................................................................................................................... 113
Playlist Editing Operations ................................................................................. 118

To Open an Existing Playlist .................................................................................................................. 118
Saving a Play List File ............................................................................................................................ 118
Inserting Primary Events....................................................................................................................... 119
To Insert a Primary Event ................................................................................................................. 120
Inserting Multi-Segment Events ........................................................................................................... 120
To Insert a Segment ......................................................................................................................... 120
Managing Duplicate Single Spot and Multi Segment IDs ................................................................. 121
Insert Secondary Events ....................................................................................................................... 122
To Insert a Secondary Event ............................................................................................................. 122
Configuring an Editable Secondary Event ........................................................................................ 128
Manage Back-Timed Events ................................................................................................................. 136
Secondary Events that can be Back-Timed ...................................................................................... 137
To Specify PT Event Type syntax .................................................................................................... 138
Manage End-Timed Events ................................................................................................................... 138
Secondary Events that can be End-Timed ........................................................................................ 139
To Specify PT Event Type syntax .................................................................................................... 140
Enable a List Freeze .............................................................................................................................. 140
Enable a Data Event (sDAT) .................................................................................................................. 141
Data Event Commands ..................................................................................................................... 142
Add a Transition Effect ......................................................................................................................... 143
Cut, Copy, Paste Playlist Events ............................................................................................................ 144
To Cut an Event from a Playlist ........................................................................................................ 144
To Copy an Event from a Playlist ...................................................................................................... 144
To Paste Cut / Copied Event(s) ......................................................................................................... 145
Copy/Paste Cells ............................................................................................................................... 145
Clear / Delete Playlist Events ................................................................................................................ 146
Moving Events within a List and Between Lists .................................................................................... 146
Open the source List(s)..................................................................................................................... 147
30-July-2013 | Page 7 of 336

Contents
To Drag-and-Drop a Single Event ..................................................................................................... 147

To Drag-and-Drop Multiple events .................................................................................................. 147
Move Events using Copy / Paste ...................................................................................................... 148
Revise Playlist Event Field Text ............................................................................................................. 148
Clear Done Events................................................................................................................................. 148
Replace an Event ID .............................................................................................................................. 149
Ripple Time ........................................................................................................................................... 150
To Manually Ripple Times ................................................................................................................ 150
Checking if a List is Timed Out.......................................................................................................... 151
Managing Pull Lists ............................................................................................................................... 151
Review Missing Events using the Pull List Window .......................................................................... 151
GMT Pull Lists ................................................................................................................................... 153
Show/Hide Columns in a Pull List ..................................................................................................... 154
Add DBStatus Field as a Column ...................................................................................................... 155
Recycle Bin Window ............................................................................................................................. 155
Retrieve Deleted Events from the Recycle Bin Window .................................................................. 156
About Configuring the Recycle Bin ................................................................................................... 157
Managing Resource Windows ............................................................................ 159

Robust Database Search Window ........................................................................................................ 159
To Search for a Record ..................................................................................................................... 159
Managing Search Results ................................................................................................................. 162
To Copy a Record to a Transmission List .......................................................................................... 166
Drag and Drop a Record to a Playlist or Transmission List ............................................................... 167
Device Status Window .......................................................................................................................... 167
To Open the Device Status Window ................................................................................................ 167
Device Storage Window ....................................................................................................................... 169
To Open the Device Storage Window .............................................................................................. 169
To Refresh a Window ....................................................................................................................... 171
Protecting and Removing Spots ....................................................................................................... 171
To Check or Search for a record ....................................................................................................... 172
Moving Spots and Records to Playlists............................................................................................. 173
More Info Window ............................................................................................................................... 174
30-July-2013 | Page 8 of 336

Contents
To Display the More Info Window ................................................................................................... 174

Video Window ...................................................................................................................................... 175
To Display the Video Window .......................................................................................................... 175
Managing Compile Lists ..................................................................................... 176

About the Compiler Option .................................................................................................................. 176
Creating a Compile List ......................................................................................................................... 176
To view the individual spots of a compile tape ................................................................................ 176
To remove all spots from a compile list window ............................................................................. 176
To prepare a list for compiling ......................................................................................................... 177
Compiling a Compile List ...................................................................................................................... 177
Recompiling a Compile List .............................................................................................................. 179
Other Compile List Functions ............................................................................................................... 179
Jam New IDs ..................................................................................................................................... 179
Mark Exception ................................................................................................................................ 180
Thread Into VTR................................................................................................................................ 180
Error Management ............................................................................................ 181

About Displaying Errors ........................................................................................................................ 181
To Simultaneously View All Air Client Errors.................................................................................... 181
To View Error Logs............................................................................................................................ 181
To Display Errors .............................................................................................................................. 181
Clearing Error Messages from the Air Client Desktop .......................................................................... 182
To Clear Error Messages................................................................................................................... 182
List Validation ....................................................................................................................................... 182
List Validation window ..................................................................................................................... 182
Emergency Operations....................................................................................... 184

Main/Backup Changeover .................................................................................................................... 184
Recovery Steps ................................................................................................................................. 184
System Power Up and Down Sequences .............................................................................................. 187
Automated Recording ........................................................................................ 188

Record Lists ........................................................................................................................................... 188
30-July-2013 | Page 9 of 336

Contents
Key Elements .................................................................................................................................... 188

Running the Record List ................................................................................................................... 189
Record List Tips/Troubleshooting .................................................................................................... 190
Secondary Records ............................................................................................................................... 190
Key Elements .................................................................................................................................... 190
Inputting Secondary Record Events ................................................................................................. 190
Secondary Record Entry Guidelines ................................................................................................. 190
Basic Functions of the Secondary Record ........................................................................................ 191
Secondary Recording to Video Disk ................................................................................................. 191
Secondary Recording to Tape .......................................................................................................... 192
Database Logging.................................................................................................................................. 192
To activate this option...................................................................................................................... 192
Barcode Event .................................................................................................... 194

Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 194
VTR Playlist Assignment........................................................................................................................ 195
VTR as Assigned Device .................................................................................................................... 195
VTR as a Floater Machine ................................................................................................................. 195
Barcode Event Step by Step ............................................................................................................... 196
Barcode Event Scenarios ...................................................................................................................... 196
Scenario 1: Using Barcode Event for a tape that has an automation database record ................... 196
Scenario 2: Using Barcode Event for a tape that does not have an automation database record
(Manually entering SOM) ................................................................................................................. 197
Scenario 3: Using Barcode Event for a tape that has bad or no timecode ...................................... 198
Logging .............................................................................................................. 200

Error Logs .............................................................................................................................................. 200
To Display an Error Log..................................................................................................................... 200
AsRun Logs ............................................................................................................................................ 202
To Display AsRun Logs ...................................................................................................................... 202
WinCmms .......................................................................................................... 205

About Traffic Translator........................................................................................................................ 205
Using the Translator Program............................................................................................................... 205
30-July-2013 | Page 10 of 336

Contents
WinCmms Setup ................................................................................................................................... 206

To Install WinCmms.......................................................................................................................... 206
To Put a Shortcut on the Desktop .................................................................................................... 206
To Change the Default Directories and Options .............................................................................. 206
Global Media Transfer (GMT) ............................................................................ 208

About GMT ........................................................................................................................................... 208
GMT Transfer Modes ....................................................................................................................... 208
GMT Components ............................................................................................................................ 209
A Simple GMT System ...................................................................................................................... 210
ADC AirFlex ........................................................................................................ 212

About ADC AirFlex ................................................................................................................................ 212
An Overview of Components ........................................................................................................... 213
ADC FlexSyncTM .................................................................................................. 215

About the Air Client ADC FlexSyncTM Option ........................................................................................ 215
Implementation................................................................................................................................ 215
Deployment and Workflows ............................................................................................................ 216
LinkList ............................................................................................................... 217

About LinkList ....................................................................................................................................... 217
Air Client Installation ......................................................................................... 218

Client Notes .......................................................................................................................................... 218
About v11 Client Validation ............................................................................................................. 218
Rev-Lock Condition with version 12.21/4.21 release....................................................................... 218
Start up Switches .............................................................................................................................. 218
Network IP ........................................................................................................................................ 219
Upgrade Note ................................................................................................................................... 219
To Install Air Client on a Workstation ................................................................................................... 219
Managing the Desktop Shortcut for Air Client ..................................................................................... 220
To Manage the shortcut on the Desktop ......................................................................................... 221
ODBC Connections and Networking................................................................................................. 223
30-July-2013 | Page 11 of 336

Contents
Configuring System Components ....................................................................... 224

Configuring Multiple Device Server Connections ................................................................................. 224
Configuring List Options ....................................................................................................................... 224
Configuring Window Column Settings.................................................................................................. 232
Managing Column Templates ............................................................................................................... 235
To Save a Column Template ............................................................................................................. 235
To Apply a Column Template or Reset to Default Settings .............................................................. 236
Configuring Window Font Settings ....................................................................................................... 236
Configuring Event and Window Parameter Colors ............................................................................... 237
To specify Event Colors .................................................................................................................... 238
Managing Color Templates................................................................................................................... 241
To Save a Color Template ................................................................................................................. 241
To Manage Colors and Apply Across all Transmission Lists ............................................................. 243
Configuring System Properties ........................................................................... 244

Environment Properties ....................................................................................................................... 244
AsRun log Properties ............................................................................................................................ 254
Setting Hardware Control Panel Properties ......................................................................................... 259
To Configure the Operator Control Panel (OCP) .............................................................................. 259
Setting Software Control Panel Properties........................................................................................... 265
Valid IDs ................................................................................................................................................ 267
List Names ............................................................................................................................................ 269
Auto List Save ....................................................................................................................................... 270
Auto Bin Save ........................................................................................................................................ 273
Error Reporting Properties ................................................................................................................... 274
About Errors in Multi-Login Mode ................................................................................................... 276
Desktop Display Properties .................................................................................................................. 276
Saving the Desktop ........................................................................................................................... 277
LinkList .................................................................................................................................................. 277
More Info .............................................................................................................................................. 277
Hide Secondary Event Keys .................................................................................................................. 278
Configuration of the Hide Secondary Event keys ............................................................................. 278
Toolbar Builder ..................................................................................................................................... 281
30-July-2013 | Page 12 of 336

Contents
To configure the Quick Access Ribbon Toolbar on the desktop ...................................................... 281
Configuring Time Zone Offsets ............................................................................................................. 284
To setup TimeZone Offsets .............................................................................................................. 284
Operation Log ....................................................................................................................................... 288
Set Tally................................................................................................................................................. 289
SeaLevel Drivers to Support ADC Tally Function........................................................................... 289
To Set a Tally .................................................................................................................................... 289
MI Additional Fields .............................................................................................................................. 293
To add new MI Fields ....................................................................................................................... 293
Appendix A ........................................................................................................ 295

Event Type Field Values ........................................................................................................................ 295
Appendix B......................................................................................................... 298

Secondary Events.................................................................................................................................. 298
To access an editable secondary event already in a play................................................................. 298
Secondary Switching Parameter (sSP).............................................................................................. 298
Secondary Audio/Video (sAV) .............................................................................................................. 299
Back Timed Secondary Audio/Video (bAV) .......................................................................................... 299
GPI Contact (sGPI)................................................................................................................................. 300
Back Timed GPI (bGPI) .......................................................................................................................... 300
Keyer On/Off (sKEY) .............................................................................................................................. 301
A/V Keyer On/Off.................................................................................................................................. 303
Transition Keyer (sTKY) ......................................................................................................................... 303
Audio Over On/Off (sAOV).................................................................................................................... 304
Transition Audio Over (sTAO) ............................................................................................................... 305
Break ..................................................................................................................................................... 306
Comment (****) ................................................................................................................................... 306
Compile ID (cmID) ................................................................................................................................. 306
Data Event (sDAT) ................................................................................................................................. 307
Barter Spot (sBAR) ................................................................................................................................ 307
Record Switcher (sRSW) ....................................................................................................................... 308
Switcher Crosspoint (sXP) ..................................................................................................................... 308
30-July-2013 | Page 13 of 336

Contents
Switcher Audio Crosspoint (AUD-XPT) ................................................................................................. 308

Secondary Record (sREC) ...................................................................................................................... 309
Break Sync (sSYN) ................................................................................................................................. 310
Secondary System (sSYS) ...................................................................................................................... 311
Backtimed System (bSYS) ..................................................................................................................... 311
System Event ........................................................................................................................................ 312
External (vDT) ....................................................................................................................................... 312
Data Event with Data (sDAT) ................................................................................................................ 313
Appendix C ......................................................................................................... 314

Device Error Messages ......................................................................................................................... 314
Appendix D ........................................................................................................ 329

System Timing....................................................................................................................................... 329
Verify the source VTR and router's accuracy ................................................................................... 329
Verify the Video Servers' accuracy ................................................................................................... 331
Appendix E ......................................................................................................... 333

Tips and Good Habits............................................................................................................................ 333
The TWO Golden Rules .................................................................................................................... 333
Appendix F ......................................................................................................... 335

About AFD Codes .................................................................................................................................. 335
30-July-2013 | Page 14 of 336

Air Client Overview
Air Client Overview

About Air Client
The Air Client workstation is a client on the ADC playout automation network. Air Client
provides:
Integrated control of broadcast devices, such as cart machines, VTRs, still stores, character
generators, master control switchers and video disk servers.
Automated playout. Each event in a playlist plays at its start time without operator
intervention. In problematic situations, operators may intervene at anytime to change
playlists and control devices using the mouse, keyboard and hardware control panel.
Allows Play List files to be edited and created with secondary events and transition effects
for broadcast. While these Play List files are typically generated by a traffic department
placed into the transmission list, they may also be created manually with the Air Client.
Transmission list to control the actual playout of events. Events may be cut, copied, pasted,
dragged and dropped within the transmission list. New play list files may be appended to
the current on-air transmission list to form a single, continuous playout list. Each event in a
Transmission List will play at its start time without operator intervention. As needed,
operators may intervene using the mouse, keyboard and/or hardware control panel.
About Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPV6)

ADC v12 supports IPV6 for networking. IPv6 (IPng) is an upgrade to the Internet Protocol, that is
designed to rectify the addressing problems in IPv4, and to provide a way to interpret, assign,
and use addresses in a way more in line with modern internetworking. It will coexist with the
older IPv4.
Minimum System Requirements

The following are minimum system requirements for ADC v12 Automation system components
as of the release of this document.
Supported Database
The following databases are supported:
SQL 2008, SQL 2008 Express, SQL 2012, SQL 2012 Express
Supported OS Level
ADC Device Server v12.18 and higher and Client v4.18 and higher support operation on 32-bit
and 64-bit operating systems.
30-July-2013 | Page 15 of 336

Air Client Overview
Server Requirements
Type
Requirements
Hardware
Device Controller (CHP/iCHP chassis)
Software
Current Device Server v12.x release
Operating System
(Standard) Microsoft Windows Server 2008

- Device Sever v12 uses IPV6 Network Protocol.
IMPORTANT: Ensure the Windows default Firewall is DISABLED on the
Device Server, Air Client, Media Client and Config Tool.
Network Interface
Card
GigE Gigabit NIC and Ethernet switch is required
Client Requirements
Type
Requirements
Hardware
Processor Pentium 4 3.0 GHz or greater

RAM For 32-bit OS: 1 GB RAM or higher, For 64-bit OS: 2 GB RAM or
higher
HD 80 GB Hard Drive or greater (Required: 25MB of free Hard Drive
Space) (For Windows 7: 16 GB available hard disk space (32-bit) or 20 GB
(64-bit))
2 TCP 1000BT NICs
Additional Intel Network Interface Cards (Pro 100S) may be required for
systems connecting to external networks, or a database using TCP/IP.
Software
Current Air Client v4.x release

Current Media Client v4.x release
Operating System
Windows 7
- When connecting to Device Sever v12, IPV6 Network Protocol is
enabled on the Client v4 computer.
IMPORTANT: Ensure the Windows default Firewall is DISABLED on the
Device Server, Air Client, Media Client and Config Tool.
Network Interface
Card
GigE GB Ethernet and switch is required
About Playlists
Familiarity with playlists is essential to use Air Client effectively.
Playlists are files that contain events to play, record, or compile. Playlists can be created and
stored locally at the Air Client workstation or translated from traffic schedules. They can also be
30-July-2013 | Page 16 of 336

Air Client Overview
stored on the ADC file server and are available to all operators on the system for viewing and
editing.
When a playlist is loaded into a transmission list window, it is called a transmission list.
About Events
Familiarity with events is essential to use Air Client effectively. An event contains information,
such as start time, event type, material identification (ID), title, segment number, duration, start
of message and channel output.
Primary Events
Primary events, such as programs and commercials, constitute the majority of a playlists
events. They may be accompanied by secondary events, and transition effects.
Event Type Field Values

There are several event types you can use to indicate how an event is played. For example, if
you just want an event to play without switching or threading, you would choose Play (P) as the
primary event type. The primary event types are described below:
Play (P): An event will play without switching or threading.

Switch (S): An event will switch without threading or playing.
Thread (T): An event will thread without switching or playing.
Auto (A): An event will switch, play and thread. Auto is the default setting for most primary
events. Alternatively, a PT (play and thread) can be used to play and thread, but not switch.
Record (R): A record event initiates recording on a device at the time specified in the events
time field.
Timed (O): Denotes that the event is a hard start event which automatically threads and
plays at the time specified in the events Time field.
Upcounting (U): Use an upcount event for an event of unknown duration, such as a sporting
event or any other live broadcast. During playout, the events duration will count down to
00:00:00.00 and then will count back up.
This repeats until terminated by either pressing Play or Skip on the control panel or a
contact start is reached. The next event will play normally. Up counters only work on events
played from Switch Only devices.
Manual Start (M): Use a manual start event to provide the equivalent of a break event
during the transmission of a playlist. When playing, a list will stop when it reaches a manual
start event. Click Play on the control panel.
Exception (X): This is a customized primary event in configurations that have a primary
program channel and regional feeds to play different commercials to different regions.
Exception events are different on a regional feed from those played on the primary program
channel. X is only used on a compile tape.
30-July-2013 | Page 17 of 336

Air Client Overview
Time to Next (N): Enter a letter N in the type field (next to A or AU) to provide a countdown
to the events start time. This is used primarily on live events so an operator can give an
accurate countback from a break back into a live event, such as a newscast.
Audible Time to Next (Q): Enter a letter Q in the type field (next to A or AU) to provide an
audible countdown starting 30 seconds from a commercial break into the next live event. To
minimize affect on existing functionality N (Time to Next) is automatically set and hidden
from an operator when letter Q is entered.
Note: This type option requires the Audible Time To Next option be enabled (checked) on
the Environment->List Options tab.
Note: After the Audible Time To Next checkbox option is enabled in the List Options, it is
necessary to close and re-open the list windows in the client for the feature to work. (Reloading the lists is not necessary.)
For example, if the duration of the break is 3 minutes, then...
At 30 seconds Air Client announces: 30 seconds to go.
At 20 seconds, Air Client announces: 20 seconds, standby.
At 10 seconds, Air Client starts counting down each second: 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2,

1.
Other example conditions:
If the commercial break is 30 seconds long, then the countdown starts immediately
with "30 seconds to go".
If the commercial break is less than 30 seconds long, but greater than 20 seconds,
then the coundown starts at 20 seconds with "20 seconds, standby".
If the commercial break is less than 20 seconds long, but greater than 10 seconds,
then the countdown starts at 10 seconds, with the 10,9,8 .......
Deadroll (D): A deadroll event hard starts at a specific time while the list plays. The deadroll
event plays, but does not switch, for its duration and then stops. Deadroll events are only
intended for use on linear media (tapes) so that a JIP (Join In Progress) can be performed.
Audio/Video Breakaway (AV, AI, AVJ, AIJ): A primary event or a secondary audio/video
event can be run and cause the switcher to perform an audio/ video breakaway. AV is an
event type that performs a video breakaway. AI performs audio breakaways. To rejoin the
secondary audio/video breakaway to the primary audio/video input when it finishes playing,
edit the event type to AVJ or AIJ.
A breakaway event can occur at the beginning, within and the end of its associated primary
event. When used at the beginning or end, the primary event type is set to A; the secondary
event type is set to AV or AI. If the duration of the secondary event is less than the primary
event, add a J to supply the audio and video from the primary event. When used within a
primary event, the secondary event type is set to AVJ or AIJ.
NOTE: Only one breakaway can be assigned to a primary event to avoid an overlap in time. You
cannot breakaway audio and then breakaway video until the video is rejoined. Also, you cannot
breakaway video and then breakaway audio until the audio is rejoined.
30-July-2013 | Page 18 of 336

Air Client Overview
Secondary events
Secondary events are associated with the primary event above it in the playlist. Multiple
secondary events can be assigned to a primary event and are played concurrently. A secondary
events time is used as an offset in relation to the primary events time.
Valid secondary events include:
Audio/Video: A secondary Audio/Video event plays material, in addition to the primary

event on air, for use in effects such as keys, audio overs and mixes.
Backtimed A/V: The backtimed secondary audio/video event is the same as a Secondary
Audio/ Video except the secondarys on-air time is the amount of time before the
primary event will begin.
GPI Contact: This event is a GPI Contact Closure to a device that initiates a switch. The
GPI Contact will play with the corresponding Primary Event at the same time, regardless
of value of Time. The event will display as played at the primary event time, although
the actual GPI contact will close at the exact time.
Backtimed GPI: Similar to a standard GPI event, except that the offset is measured
backwards in time from the start of the associated primary event. For example, a
backtimed GPI event with an offset of 5 seconds fires the GPI contact 5 seconds before
the start of the associated primary event. A backtimed GPI event cannot be attached to
an event following a primary upcount event. In this case, the system would not be able
to calculate when to begin the GPI event.
Keyer On/Off: This event describes when a hole is cut in the associated primary events
video output and is then filled with the output of the Keyer source.
Transition Key: Similar to a Keyer On/Off event except, the key is brought up at the start
of the associated primary event with the same transition type (i.e. brought up with a
fade up, cut, wipe etc.).
Audio Over On/Off: This is used to add another audio source over the primary
audio/video source. It can be set with a percentage over ratiofor example, if set to
100%, it will completely replace the primary events audio.
Transition Audio Over: Similar to a standard Audio Over event except that it is brought
up with the primary event and corresponding transition type.
Break: An event line inserted in the list where you would like the list to stop running.
The first event after the break line will cue up, but will not play out, and the program
switches to black. To restart the list [after the break line], press Roll or Play on the
control panel.
Comment: Used to enter Notes into the playlist. Comment event lines are ignored
during transmission. However, they do add events to the list size. You can enter text in
the title field up to sixteen characters.
Compile ID: Used to attach a title to the head of a compilation list. It has no effect on
the playlist and is ignored during transmission.
Data Event: Used as a command to a device to perform a certain function. Occurs at the
time entered in the on-air [or Time] column. Mostly used with videodisk servers.
30-July-2013 | Page 19 of 336

Air Client Overview
Barter Spot: Intended for reconciliation with the traffic system. Attached to a program
segment that has barter spots in it [network, natl]. Will appear in the AsRun log that
the spots attached to that segment ran.
Record Switcher: This is a secondary event that performs extra switching for inputs.
During a recording, automation will switch to the source denoted in the secondary
events Title field.
Switcher Crosspoint: This is a secondary event that performs extra switching for
outputs. Allows you to route program from one list to a different destination.
Secondary Record: Allows for the automated recording and segmenting of live program
material, for immediate or future playback to air. Unlike most record events, this event
type is used in lists that combine record and playback activities. It will function only in
lists that combine record and playback material.
Break Sync: Break sync contains an estimated time of day a pod will run, a deviation
time and a time for a window of opportunity for the operator to react to the event.
Secondary System: Used to allow the sharing of resources between lists. This event
allows the traffic system to schedule device (resource) assignment during the execution
of a transmission list. Like all secondary events, this type of event is attached to a
primary event. When this event type is run, it is able to move un-owned device heads to
the list that is running this event or release device heads in order to make them
available to another list. It is up to the traffic department to schedule the assignment
and release of heads so that two lists will not conflict in their usage of these heads.
Backtimed System: This works in the same manner as secondary system except that this
event type runs prior to the primary event by the time specified in the Time field.
External: An External secondary event is used to send commands or other information

to a device through a device server. This event acts as a secondary A/V event with the
capability of sending commands or other information to a specific device on the device
server.
Data Event With Data: This event is used to send commands and other information to a
specific device on the device server. When inserting this secondary event, use the text
editor to enter the commands. The commands are sent to the device whose device ID
matches the event ID.
Transition Effects
A transition effect is configurable according to type, speed, key hold status, and mixed
audio/video and wipe effect qualifiers. Transition effects are added between events in a playlist.
A master control switcher is required to use transition effects. The system transitions INTO
events only. Therefore, specifying a transition type or speed on an event affects how that event
is transitioned TO.
Switch-Only IDs
You can create a list of frequently used, switch-only IDs that are not in the database, yet are
valid. Air Client can be configured to validate IDs against this list by clicking the Check IDs
Against Valid ID List button on the List Options tab in the Environment... dialog box (accessible
30-July-2013 | Page 20 of 336

Air Client Overview
on the Properties ribbon tab). By putting IDs in the Valid ID list, Air Client will not generate a
warning when editing IDs not in the database.
Hard Start Events

A hard start event is an event that plays at its start time instead of when the previous event
finishes playing. To change an event to a hard start event, click it, then click Toggle Hard Start on
the Events ribbon tab or press ALT+O. Hard start events display the letter O in the Type field.
Extended event types (back-timed and end-timed event type qualifiers)

Normal
Manual
Back-Timed
End-Timed
Last
Primary
Begin
Next
Primary
Primary Event
Second Button
End
Back-Timed Events
A back-timed, secondary event is run at the offset value before the first frame of the primary it
is attached to. For more information see Manage Back-Timed Events.
End-Timed Events
An end-timed, secondary event is run offset from the end of the primary event. For more
information see Manage End-Timed Events.
For Example: Attached to the last commercial of commercial break a tone closure needs to be
turned on eight seconds before the end of the last break using a GPI event.
With a forward offset event, the eight seconds would have to be subtracted from the
duration of the primary event and offset from that duration.
If the primary event were 30 seconds, then a forward offset would have to be set at 22
seconds.
If the commercial break was re-ordered and the last commercial was now a 15 second
commercial, the GPI event would have to be edited and the offset changed to 7
seconds.
With an end-time offset of 8 seconds, the GPI event would not have to be edited when the
commercial break content was changed.
About Time Zones

Familiarity with Time Zone management is beneficial to using Air Client effectively.
30-July-2013 | Page 21 of 336

Air Client Overview
In a facility where there is the need to manage local time offsets, all device servers are fed
identical time of day time code. This time code is displayed on the device server screen. Client
software manages the translation of master time to local time inside the client application.
When configured and set to a list, the Time Zone is displayed in the title bar of it List window,
and of its Zoom window. The time zone offset is added to the time value of each event in the
List.
In a Pull List window the Time Zone name is displayed in the title bar, and the offset value in
the status bar.
For more information see Configuring Time Zone Offsets.
Time Zone Definitions
Master Time: The output of the central facility time standard. It is defined as Zulu format
(24 hour) time or military time. It is the time reference that is output from the central
facility time code generator and supplied to all Device Servers in a given automation system.
This is the only time value displayed on the Device Servers screen and is distributed via the
API to the system clients.
Local Time: The time standard that is displayed to an operator by a list that is under system
management. This time standard is modified from the Master Time delivered to the client
by the server over the network by code within the client. Its offset from master time is
programmable via software selections in the client.
Time Offset: The amount of time (in HH:MM) that the Master Time must be delayed (Or
advanced) to account for time zone differences.
Local Time Display: The time standard that the list is running under, which is shown to the
user at the Client display. This time is derived from the master time by software routines in
the client applications.
Master Time Display: The time standard display that directly reflects the actual time value
that is being input to the Device Servers in the central facility. It is normally displayed on the
Device Server application window.
Time of Day (TOD): A reference to a particular clock time that can be derived from either
Master OR Local time. Time of day is not related to event duration.
About using Dual Output Video Cards

When using Air Client on a dual output video card, if a new window is opened, it appears in the
center and can be seen on both monitors.
Air Client Desktop

Using Air Client requires familiarity with the major components of the Air Client desktop. The
major components are the playlist, transmission list, database, device status, device storage
30-July-2013 | Page 22 of 336

Air Client Overview
windows and the switcher. These components provide access to the core functionality of Air
Client.
As shown in the following example, the [ Login name - Client name - Server(s) name Date ]
information is dynamically displayed in the title bar of the Air client application.
Ribbon Toolbars
All options for the Air Client application are located in a specific ribbon tab. This section
describes the basic functionality of the options. Be advised that while navigating the ribbon tabs
options on the On Air transmission lists will continue to play. Care should be taken to ensure
proper monitoring of the transmission lists while navigating in other areas.
File Ribbon Tab
Option
Description
New PlayList (Ctrl+N)
Opens up an empty play list file to insert programming to be

saved for future transmission
Open Playlist (Ctrl+O)
Allows you to access inactive play list files for editing purposes
Close
Closes the active window
Save Playlist (Ctrl+S)
Permanently saves the work done on an open play list
Save Playlist As
Allows you to create a different filename for an existing play list or

create an original filename for a new play list
Print (Ctrl+P)
Will print the active screen to an assigned printer
Save As Text
Will save the active window as a text file
30-July-2013 | Page 23 of 336

Air Client Overview
Option
Description
Display Errors
Displays a list of the most recent on-air errors
Clear Errors
Erases errors displayed on the Air Client from the clipboard only
Robust Database
Search
Opens the Robust Database Search window. Allows an operator to

search for and review records of existing spots.
Open Text
Allows you to view text files such as AsRun Logs, and Error Logs
Open Operation Log
The operation log, logs the user activity. Like edition, deletion, and
changes to the playlist.
Save Operation Log as

Text
Allows you to save the operation log as a text file.
Change User
Allows you to change the name of the user working at the client
station
Exit (Alt+X)
Closes the program and all open windows
Edit Ribbon Tab
Option
Description
Cut (Ctrl+X)
Removes selected event(s) and places them onto a clipboard
Copy (Ctrl+C)
Copies selected event(s) onto a clipboard without removing them

from the list
Paste (Ctrl+V)
Will paste events from the clipboard into the list above the cursor
position
Clear (Del)
Will delete selected event(s) from the list, without saving them on
the clipboard
Find
Allows you to search the active list for media by ID in one direction
from the current cursor position
Replace
Enables you to search for specific IDs and replace them with other
IDs
Select All
Allows you to highlight all events in an open list.
30-July-2013 | Page 24 of 336

Air Client Overview
Events Ribbon Tab

This ribbon tab is available once a Playlist has been loaded.
Option
Description
Revise (Alt+R)
Allows you to edit or revise the event that the cursor is on.
Pressing the Tab key moves you forward one field/cell. Pressing
Shift+Tab moves you back. To finish editing press the Alt+R keys
Cancel (Alt+Q)
Cancels the editing of an event without saving the changes youve

made to it
Insert Primary (Ins)
Inserts a Primary event line into the playlist above the cursor
position. Automatically puts you into Revise Mode. Press Alt+R
keys when done
Insert Secondary
Inserts a Secondary event above the cursor position. Refer to

attachment for detailed definitions. *Note*: Some items listed
may not be available on your particular system
Edit Transition Effects
Allows you to modify the transition into the event the cursor is
placed on for editing
Edit Secondary
Allows you to edit aspects of certain types of secondary events

that are not represented in entry fields on the playlist.
Calculate Durations
Will calculate the total duration for all highlighted items. Cannot
be used with Upcount events
Toggle Hard Start

(Alt+O)
Places a hard start on the event line the cursor is positioned on.
This dictates that the event begins airing at the specified time.
NOTE: It places a hardstart and also removes a hardstart as
needed.
Ripple Time (Alt+M)
Ripples air times from cursor placement to the next hard start in a
list. If no hard start is present, start times will ripple through the
entire playlist
List Validation
List Validation will check through the list for potential problems,
such as; same id = same ID back-to-back, separates = segments not
separated by a break, sequence = missing segments within a
series, or segments out of order, same segment = same segment
number back-to-back.
Pull List
Will create a list of events that are scheduled on your playlist but
have not been found in assigned air devices. Also known as
30-July-2013 | Page 25 of 336

Option
Air Client Overview
Description
Missing Media
Verify Event Against

DB
Cross-references the event the cursor is placed upon or the

selected events against the database for accuracy of data entry
(i.e. Durations, SOMs)
Verify List Against DB
Cross-references the entire list against the database for accuracy

of data entry (i.e. Durations, SOMs)
Linked Lists Enabled

(Ctrl+F5)
Select this option to enable the playlists to be linked together.

When ticked, the Master list will control the Linked Lists. List
linking can be disabled by unchecking this option, or pressing CTL +
F5 to toggle it on/off.
NOTE: Do NOT enable LinkList if there are no Linked Lists
configured. This can impact Air Client operations, and will be
resolved in a future release.
This option is available when LinkList.bin is in the air client
install directory. For details see section: LinkList.
Validate Liked List

Durations (F5)
When multiple events are selected on the Master list, this function
will check the duration of the corresponding linked events on the
Linked list. Only available for Offline lists.
Some or all of the following options are grayed out if:
- The Master Online or Offline list is not the active window.
- No events are selected on the Master Online or Offline lists.
This option is available when Linked Lists are configured and
enabled. For details see section: LinkList.
Copy Linked List In

(F9)
If the Master Online transmission list is the active window, this

function will copy the selected Master and Linked event(s) on the
Offline linked lists to the Online lists.
If the Master Offline playlist is the active window, this function will
copy the selected Master and Linked events on the Online lists to
the Offline lists.
Copy Linked List Out

(F10)
If the Master Online transmission list is the active window, this

function will copy the selected Master and Linked event(s) to the
Offline linked lists.
If the Master Offline playlist is the active window, this function will
copy the selected Master and Linked events to the Online lists.
30-July-2013 | Page 26 of 336

Air Client Overview
Option
Description
Move Linked List In

(F11)
This is identical to Copy Linked List In, however the Master and
Linked event(s) will be cut from the source list when they are
copied. Same as Cut and Paste.
Move Linked List Out

(F12)
This is identical to Copy Linked List Out, however the Master and
Linked event(s) will be cut from the source list when they are
copied. Same as Cut and Paste.
Generate Link List

Keys
Only available in Offline mode. This is used to manually generate

the LinkKeys for the Offline lists. If your stations traffic system
does not generate the Linking keys when the schedules are
created, use this option to manually generate the LinkKeys for the
Master and Linked Lists.
NOTE: The Offline lists must be resaved after generating the
LinkKeys.
Servers Ribbon Tab (for sites using Multi-server login)
This ribbon tab allows operators to connect to / disconnect from specific Device Server, and add
/remove servers from the available list.
Option
Description
Connect
Launches the Connect to Servers dialog. This dialog allows an

operator to connect to currently available servers.
Disconnect
Launches the Disconnect from Servers dialog. This dialog allows

an operator to disconnect from currently connected servers.
Available Server
Launches the Edit Available Servers dialog. This dialog allows an

operator to perform both manual editing (Edit) and automatic
discovery (Scan) of servers for multi-server login environments.
30-July-2013 | Page 27 of 336

Air Client Overview
Resources Ribbon Tab
Option
Description
View List
Allows you to choose and open active transmission list configured

in the system
Switcher
A diagnostic utility typically used to determine if switcher(s) are

responding correctly to remote commands given by automation.
Device Status
Opens a window by which all automated devices can be checked

for correct status and assignments.
Device Storage
Allows you to view media in mass storage devices such as Cart

Machines, Video Disks, and Audio Disks. You can drag and drop
media into an active transmission list if desired
Resources list
Displays available Device Servers and the lists, devices and device
status for each server.
Properties Ribbon Tab
NOTE: New Air Client software modified properties are shown with orange border. Brand new
Properties are shown with Red Border.
Option
Description
Environment
Allows configuration of: List Options, System Directory Paths, List

Directory Paths, Device Status Colors, Device Storage Colors, and
Cell Colors.
AsRun logs
Allows custom configuration of the AsRun log
Hardware Control
Panel
Allows custom configuration of the Operator Control Panel (OCP).
Software Control
Panel
Allows custom configuration of the software control panel within

the application.
30-July-2013 | Page 28 of 336

Air Client Overview
Option
Description
Valid IDs
Allows creation of a list of IDs that are not in the database that are
commonly used for air. This, in general, would include switch only
events (i.e. Network, Newsroom, Studio, Black etc.)
List Names
Can add, remove, or customize names of transmission lists that

will appear in View List [under Resources]. The default is to
display only a number for the separate transmission lists at your
facility (i.e. play list 1, play list 2) and secondary lists such as
Record Lists, Media Lists, and Compile Lists
Auto List Save
Allows parameters to be set for the Auto List Save feature; such as
the frequency of automatic list savings based on the number of list
changes that occur on an active on-air transmission list.
Specify the Number of changes to indicate how often the list
saves to an RCV file automatically.
Changes refers mainly to movements of items in the list, 5
changes, means 5 events have passed. So in this example, every
time 5 events have passed the list will auto-save to its RCV file.
Auto Bin Save
Will save the bin storage map of a cart machine based on user
specified intervals Errors Allows configuration of how/where
error messages are displayed and whether they will sound out
when they occur
Errors
Use this option to configure the way errors are reported in the
error window, and to which folder they are to be saved, if they are
to be saved to disk.
Desktop
Allows the adjustment of the desktop wallpaper within the Air

Client program
Linked Lists
Launches the Links Lists configuration dialog. LinkList allows

playlists to be linked together and controlled from a single master
playlist.
(This option is only available if the Linked Lists option has been
purchased and linklist.bin is present in the Air Client
installation location.) For details see section: LinkList.
More Info
When the functionality has been purchased, this option allows the
custom configuration of a More Info column using an ODBC
database.
Hide Secondary Event

Keys
Allows hiding and showing of secondary events on the Playlist
Toolbar Builder
Allows the custom configuration of the Air Client Toolbar on the

desktop.
30-July-2013 | Page 29 of 336

Air Client Overview
Option
Description
Time Zone
A unique time zone offset can be configured for each play list that
is offset from the house clock.
Operation Log
A log can be created to track operation activity within the Air

Client application.
Set Tally
The Air client can use the Tally information of a given List to
display an On Air / On Line status and color for the playing
event(s) of the corresponding transmission list(s) and zoom
window(s) status column. If a Tally is configured for a given List,
then the On Air color and ON AIR status are used in the List and
its Zoom window, if it is seen as On Air according to the Tally
configuration. And the On Line color and ON LINE status are
used in the List and its Zoom window, if it is seen as On Line
according to the Tally configuration. (See section on Tally for more
info.)
MI Additional Fields
Launches a dialog that allows addition of fields to the More Info

Builder. This includes, but is not limited to, AFD, PSIP data, format,
bitrates, etc.
Save Desktop
Will save all desktop settings, including which windows are open
and how they are tiled in proportion to one another. This will
determine which windows will be opened automatically each time
the program is launched.
Set Password
Allows changing the current password
Tools Ribbon Tab
Option
Description
Recycle Bin
A play list view of prior events that have been cut or deleted.
Video Window
Air Client can include an optional feature that displays the on-air
event in a video window. It can be used for monitoring the Output
Stream, but has no control functionality. A video board installed in
the Air Client workstation must be connected to the output from
the on-air video stream.
Play List Translator
This option is not implemented. It is listed here for consistency and

to address future inclusion.
30-July-2013 | Page 30 of 336

Air Client Overview
Window Ribbon Tab
Option
Description
Color Scheme
Allows you to change the GUI skin color by selecting a different

color for the list of available colors.
Default Desktop
Changes desktop appearance back to the saved desktop settings
Cascade
Cascades all open windows [screens] so that title-bar lines will be

visible
Tile
Allow viewing all open windows [screens] simultaneously in a tile

view
Arrange Icons
Allows you to arrange icons on your desktop
Close All
Closes all open windows [or screens]. Does not close the program
Help Ribbon Tab
Option
Description
About
Launches a dialog that presents information about the current

version of Air Client software.
The Installed Packages list includes the AsRun name and version,
and the ODBC Calls name and version.
Help
Launches the Air Client Help System.
Quick Access Ribbon Tab
Provides a User-defined grouping of commonly used tools and functions.
30-July-2013 | Page 31 of 336

Air Client Overview
Quick Access Toolbar

The Quick Access toolbar allows operators to quickly access commonly used functions. The
following are examples of Quick Access Toolbars.
Icon
Description
Connect: Launches the Connect to Servers dialog. This dialog allows an
operator to connect to currently available servers.
NOTE: This toolbar icon is only active when multiserver.bin is present in
the installation directory. For details contact Harris Broadcast Automation
Technical Support.
Disconnect: Launches the Disconnect from Servers dialog. This dialog allows
an operator to disconnect from currently connected servers.
NOTE: This toolbar icon is only active when multiserver.bin is present in
the installation directory. For details contact Harris Broadcast Automation
Technical Support.
Right Click Menus

The following menus are accessed from List and Playlist windows on the Air Client application.
The availability of menus and options is context related.
List Window Right Click Menu

This menu is available by right clicking on an open list window.
30-July-2013 | Page 32 of 336

Air Client Overview
(Click on an open Playlist and get the following, which is a subset the right click playlist menu.)
View List Right-Click Menu

This menu is available by right clicking on an View List window.
30-July-2013 | Page 33 of 336

Air Client Overview
Option
Description
Zoom Window
The Zoom Window option will show a view of the currently running
event, the next event to run, and the next missing event on the
transmission list.
Hide All
Secondaries/Show All
Secondaries
To show all secondary events in a play list, click Show All

Secondaries. When secondary events are not currently hidden, the
options available will be Hide All Secondaries.
Hide Some
Secondary Type
To hide the selected secondaries use the Select Secondaries To

Hide option, and then use this option.
Select Secondaries
To specify which secondary events to show or hide, open the Event

Types to Show or Hide dialog box by clicking Select Secondaries to
hide.
Expand / Contract an
Event
Allows show or hide of a Secondary event on a one-at-a-time basis,

by selecting the primary event and clicking Exp/Contract.
Find Next Occurrence
Selelct to find the next occurrence of an entry.
Toggle Bookmark
Toggle on/off bookmarking an event. Up to 3 bookmarks can be set

at one time.
IMPORTANT: The Bookmark feature is supported in ADC v12 only.
Find Prev Bookmark
Jump/return to a previous bookmark
Find Next Bookmark
Jump to the next bookmark.
Append List
The Append List option allows a play list file to be appended to the
end of the currently selected transmission list.
Load List
This will Load a play list file over the currently playing a selected
transmission list. Caution: This will take the transmission list off the
air if this is used while the transmission list is running.
Insert List
This will insert a play list file above the placement of the cursor on
the transmission list. This can be used for schedule or program
changes.
Control Panel
Select the Control Panel to bring up the On Air Software Control

Panel. This control panel gives the operator direct control of
devices that are currently playing on air. This control panel also
allows the transmission list to be threaded/loaded for On Air
playback in the event the transmission list is not currently playing.
This can also be accessed by double-clicking the active transmission
list.
Breakaway Panel
Launch the breakaway panel.
30-July-2013 | Page 34 of 336

Air Client Overview
Option
Description
Device Control Panel
When an event on the transmission list is threaded in a VTR, a

Device Control Panel for threaded VTR can be accessed to allow
remote control of the VTR.
This can also be accessed by double-clicking on a device-specific
line item in the transmission list or Device Status window.
Show More Info
This option if configured will allow more info (database metadata)

to be shown about a selected event. This info is input at the Media
Client.
Thread
This is used to force thread on an individual selected event on the

list if the device is available and/or the event was unthreaded
previously.
Unthread
A threaded event can be unthreaded. This is done to eject a tape,

or to allow editing of a threaded event. Be advised that when
Unthread is used the Transmission List will go to an unthreaded
state and will need to be re-threaded by hitting Program Run on the
Operation Control Panel (OCP) option.
Caution: The Unthread button on the hardware control panel
unthreads the entire playlist, and is NOT the same as this right-click
menu Unthread.
ReCue
Can be used to recue a selected cued event on the transmission list

if the Start of Message has changed, or is currently in Play mode.
Caution: Do not confuse this menu option with RECUE on the
hardware panel which recues the on-air playing event.
Preview Play
If an event is cued but not needed for immediate playback On Air

the Preview Play option can be used to preview the material. The
event will play it's duration and then recue when finished.
Clear Done Events
An event that is marked done can be dragged and dropped down

the transmission list and then re-activated so it can play on the list
again.
Toggle Look Ahead
The Look Ahead is the area of the transmission list that will query
the devices assigned to the transmission list for availability of media
in the lookahead area. The toggle lookahead option will adjust the
lookahead area from the current setting to a full list look ahead. If
the look ahead is set to the full list, then it will adjust to the preconfigured lookahead value.
On Air Focus
When viewing events further down a transmission list this option

will enable the focus of the list to jump back to the On Air event
when a new event plays.
Air Protect
If there is a problem with the On Air event device a backup
30-July-2013 | Page 35 of 336

Option
Air Client Overview
Description
"protect" device (if configured) can be selected for individual
selected events further down the transmission list within the
lookahead.
Caution: Do not confuse this menu option with the AIR PROTECT
button on the hardware panel which will Air Protect the current onair event.
Barcode Event
An external VTR (if configured) can be used for On Air playback

using the Barcode Event option. Once the tape is loaded this option
will activate the event on the play list. Select this option by placing
your cursor on the line for the missing event, then right-clicking and
choosing Barcode Event prior to putting the VTR in remote or prior
to loading the needed tape into the VTR that is already in remote.
Compiler
This option allows the creation of a compiled spot reel. This spot
reel can be used as an On Air spot backup tape.
Options
Certain Play List options can be configured locally at the Air Client.
Defaults
This option allows changing the default duration value for not
found (not in DB) inserted items on the list from the factory
default of 00:00:30.00 to any value you wish
Columns
Configuration of the columns for the currently selected list.
Fonts
Configuration of the fonts. for the currently selected list.
Colors
Configuration of the colors for the currently selected list.
Control Panels
There are two panel types that can be used to play a Transmission list: a hardware control panel
and a software control panel.
Hardware Control Panel

Hardware Control Panel can be used to play a Transmission list. ADC supports the Operator
Control Panel (OCP).
Operator Control Panel (OCP)

The Operator Control Pane is a mid-sized desktop controller that provides instant audio or video
playback and control for broadcast automation, post production and other applications. This
panel gives operators a choice in controlling automation environments by providing
unambiguous button control in addition to conventional keyboard and mouse operations.
30-July-2013 | Page 36 of 336

Air Client Overview
Note: Actions taken on the OCP are logged in the Operations log.
Panel Functions
The OCP comes with 24, hi-res, remotely-relegendable 64 x 32 LCD buttons, 10 bank buttons,
and 17 additional function and navigation switches.
The hi-res LCD buttons can display text (up to 40 characters) and graphics using built in
command driven serial interfaces. They integrate a graphical LCD with RGB backlighting, and are
capable of displaying up to 64 colors. Software controls the interface, display and backlighting.
Data only needs to be transmitted when a change is made to the display or background colors.
These LCD buttons can be programmed to provide a range of functions. Most commonly used
when breakdowns or other failures occur, each button on the OCP can call up actions needed in
a hurry.
For example, a button can be configured to:
Cut back to Network, or even backup device with a ready content.

Display a full-screen apology slide or trigger a caption for missing audio.
Software Control Panel

The Software Control Panel is used to play a Transmission list. Double clicking on the play list
brings up the software version of the On Air Play list control panel.
Example with all functions enabled.
30-July-2013 | Page 37 of 336

Air Client Overview
Software Panel buttons
Run: Thread and cues the first event in a playlist and any events within the time range
specified in the lookahead. The number of events cued is limited by the number of
available media heads and devices. You cannot play events until you run the playlist.
Play: Plays the first event in a playlist; however, before you can play events, you must
first click the Run button. The Play button can also be used to restart a frozen or held
playlist or a playlist stopped by a break event. Clicking the Play button initiates preroll
for the playlist so the following event will play after the preroll time.
The Play button will not play a hard start event unless it is configured to do so, as
described in Miscellaneous on page 4-14. Use the Play Hard Hits option to start a hard
start event with the Play button on the control panel. If this is not set, the operator
cannot play an event that has a hard start if the playlist has stopped running.
Ready: Turn on tension to the next VTR event in tension release to prepare upcoming
VTR events. Click this button to prepare a VTR event for transmission that is out of the
standby on-time range. Usually used after an upcount events to get the next event
ready.
Hold: Holds the countdown of an event that is playing, causing the event to continue
playing longer than its duration. You can extend the events duration until the Play
button is clicked. The playlist will then advance to the next event which can only be
played with the Play or Skip button.
SyncSkip: Provides synchronous payout of commercials across multiple lists. The

SyncSkip command concept is that the next event with a designated sequential Seg #
becomes equal to the remaining part of the current event. Since each of these events
represent the entire program, the SOM of the next event is shifted to the EOM point of
the current event and the DUR of the next event is made equal to the remaining DUR of
the current event.
Skip: Skips the event currently playing and plays the next event. Also, click this button to
skip a frozen or held event.
Ten Rel: (Tension Release) Places a cued events VTR into tension release. At the
Standby On time (before an event is about to air), Air Client issues a command to the
VTR to enter Ready status and tension up the tape. The Status field of the event in a
transmission list window displays Ready.
Freeze: Stops play and countdown. Click this button to pause the current event. Then,
you may skip, roll, reinitiate play or recue the event using the Play button. The Status
field of the event in a transmission list window displays Still.
30-July-2013 | Page 38 of 336

Air Client Overview
Roll: Roll bypasses normal preroll values and plays the next event as fast as the
equipment will allow. If the current event is playing normally, the Roll button skips it
and plays the next event using normal preroll values unless configured to use instant
preroll values. If the current event is frozen, this button will play the next event. If the
current event is being held, clicking this button plays the event.
UnThd: (UnThread). Stops a running transmission list, including the on-air event and any
events that follow. All events are uncued and the list goes off the air.
Protect: Toggles the signal switching paths between the on-air and protect devices. Click
this button to play an event from the air device, or vice versa. This is an optional
function and may not be available on your workstation.
Secondary: The ADC hardware control panel is configurable to add the action Play
Secondary. This allows a secondary event to be manually triggered.
+1 Sec: Add one second to the playing events duration. Each time you click this button,
one second is added to the duration.
Recue: Recues an on-air event. To play the recued event, click the Play button.
-1 Sec: Subtract one second from the playing events duration. Each time you click this
button, one second is subtracted from the duration.
Blank buttons are not visible by default, but can be assigned. For more information see section:
Setting Hardware Control Panel Properties.
Loss of Focus Issue: To avoid control panel/playlist loss of focus with a dual screen client and the
subsequent inability to insert an event or revise the playlist, disable (uncheck) the Windows 7
setting Control panel>Ease of Access Center>Make the mouse easier to use>Activate a
window by hovering over it with the mouse.
Panel Color Configuration

The Software Control Panel of each Transmission List can be configured with:
A specific color
The possibility to enable / disable the Control Panel functions.
Transmission List Window

A transmission list is a play list loaded in a transmission list window. A transmission list window
looks almost identical to a play list window except, in a transmission list window, you can edit
and broadcast a transmission list. Air Client supports list windows of four types: play lists,
compile lists, GMT lists and media lists.
NOTE: Due to the customizable nature of the Air Client product, a stations columns may appear
different than shown in the following example window.
30-July-2013 | Page 39 of 336

Air Client Overview
Air Focus/List Locked

This entry on the list status bar shows if On Air Focus is turned ON or OFF. To the right is an
indicator to notify user if the list is "locked" which means the list is in Revise (Done=0).
Event Types
Most Common Playback Event Types
A (Automatic Event): It will thread, play event for duration listed and switch. An event with
an A by itself will play out its duration and roll into the next event
U (AU): Upcounter/Unknown Duration this event type is used for air events of an unknown
duration; such as network, news or sports events
O (AO/AUO): On-Time/Override Also known as a hard start, time trigger, or absolute, this
event will play based on a time of day entered into the time of day field
Caution: An incorrect time of day value will cause incorrect playback
N (AN/AUN): Time to Next provides a countdown through all sequential pre-recorded events
until the next N is seen in the list mostly used for countback to live news segments
Q (AQ/AUQ): Audible Time to Next provides an audible countdown starting 30 seconds from
a commercial break into the next live event. To minimize affect on existing functionality N
(Time to Next) is automatically set and hidden from an operator when letter Q is entered.
30-July-2013 | Page 40 of 336

Air Client Overview
Note: The Q event type option requires the Audible Time To Next option be enabled
(checked) on the Environment->List Options tab.
necessary to close and re-open the list windows in the client for the feature to work. (Reloading the lists is not necessary.)
D (AOD): Deadroll allows you to deadroll a taped show at its intended time further down the
list to join-in-progress later
Other Event Types:
R (Record Event): This event type will only be found on a Record List. A Record event starts
at the time indicated in the time field and records for the duration indicated
P (Play): This is an event that will simply play without threading or switching
S (Switch): This is an event that will simply cause a switch to occur
T (Thread): This is an event that will simply cause a device to cue
Program Delay Event: A Program "delay" event allows a single-file-multi-segment event to
continue to roll under a break and join in progress after the break without re-cueing.
A Delay event allows the automation to play material from a video server port while it is still
being recorded. However, unlike a typical playout event for video servers, it is handled
more like a live event. The user cues a break to run on a SECOND video server playout port.
The OCP panel is used to roll the break when required.
Unlike typical video server playout behavior, for the Delay event, the video file server
playout that is delayed continues to roll under the break that is rolled by the user. When
the break is over, the list returns to the video server delayed programming and picks up
right where the file is still playing. This behavior modifies the server playout to behave
much like delaying with a VTR.
Event Data Fields

Most of a transmission list windows fields are identical to a playlist windows fields. Following is
a description of each event data field column unique to a transmission list window:
Device: The name of the device assigned to an event. For a switch-only event, the device is
SWTCH.
Status: The status of a device, such as playing, cued or threaded.

Protect: The name of the protect device assigned to an event.
PStatus: Identifies the Air/Protect status, or the play source, of an event.
Bin: Displays the location of a tape in a cart machine.
30-July-2013 | Page 41 of 336

Air Client Overview
Playlist Window
Playlist windows are used to create and edit playlists.
Event Data Fields

A playlist window lists events vertically and the event data fields are listed horizontally and
grouped in columns. A description of each event data field column follows:
Event: This is the number, or position, of the event in the playlist. The number is
automatically generated by Air Client.
Time: The time primary events are scheduled to play, or offsets for secondary events. Time
is entered in the format hh:mm:ss.ff, where hh=hours, mm=minutes, ss=seconds and
ff=frames. For primary events, a value is entered when the event uses a hard start. For
secondary events, a value is entered to indicate the offsets from the start time of the
associated primary event.
Sec: This uneditable column displays codes that represent effect types or special secondary
events. The codes are:
sAV: Secondary Audio/Video
sDAT: Data
bAV: Back Timed A/V
sBAR: Barter Spot
sGPI: GPI Contact
sRSW: Record Switcher
bGPI: Secondary Back Timed GPI
sSRC: Switcher Crosspoint
sKey: Keyer On/Off
sREC: Secondary Record
sTKY: Transition Key
sSYN: Break Sync
sAOV: Audio Over On/Off
sSYS: Secondary System
sTAO: Transition Audio Over
vDT: Secondary A/V Event with Data
30-July-2013 | Page 42 of 336

Air Client Overview
Break: Break event; no symbol is displayed.
sDAT: Secondary Data Event with Data
Comment: Operator comments.
bSYS: Back Timed System
cmID: Compile ID
AUD-XPT: Switcher Audio Crosspoint
Type: One or more event types can be entered for each event. In the playlist, enter the
symbol for the primary event types.
The event type controls how the automation system will execute that event. The event type,
A, is the default when an event is inserted, which is a play, thread and switch event;
however, you can play an event without switching or threading, or you can just have an
event switch without threading or playing by changing the type value.
ID: The ID of the event which uniquely identifies a piece of material or action for the event.
The maximum length of an ID is determined by the configuration of the Air Client
workstation.
Seg: The segment number of the event, ranging from 1 to 99, if the material has multiple
segments.
Title: The title of the event. The maximum length of a title is determined by the
configuration of the Air Client workstation.
Dur: The duration of the event. Duration is entered in the format hh:mm:ss.ff, where
hh=hours, mm=minutes, ss=seconds and ff=frames.
Ch.: The channel, or switching path, an event plays or records on. The values are A, B, C or D.
The default is A. When the Ch field is blank, the channel is A.
SOM: The start of material for an event. This is the timecode location of the first frame of
video to be seen on-air for an event. Use the format hh:mm:ss.ff, where hh=hours,
mm=minutes, ss=seconds and ff=frames.
E: Displays the transition effect type for an event.
Qual: (Qualifiers)
S: Displays the transition effect speed for an event. Values are S for slow, M for medium and
F for fast.
Air Client: This field is used to display the Qualifiers for secondary keyer events. The
field indicates the enabled Modifier (Normal, Shadow, Drop Shadow, Border) and then
the enabled Source (Self, External, Chroma).
For example: If in the Key Event configuration the Modifier: Shadow is enabled and the
Source: Chroma is enabled, then the field will display SC.
The Qualifier LOSE appears on a PRIMARY event, when the End Key Hold is
checked.
All keyers in HOLD mode, will be turned OFF.
For the IconMaster Master Control Switcher only: All keyers in HOLD mode, are
turned OFF when the keyer number is 0. If the keyer number is not zero, but a
number 1 to 254, then only that specific keyer number is turned off.
Media Client: Displays the video quality of a spot or program. The specific quality grades
indicated in this field are OK, Marginal or Do Not Air. A, B, C or D quality are arbitrary
30-July-2013 | Page 43 of 336

Air Client Overview
grades to which the user may assign values. For example, A may represent to-air quality
and D may represent draft quality. This field is for reference only and does not affect the
automation system.
#: Displays the source input number used in Keyer or Audio Over secondary events.
Compile ID: Displays the ID of the tape whose media has been compiled onto a compile reel.
ABOXSOM: The SOM of a spot on the ABOX.
%: Displays the audio over ratio value as a percentage and is used for audio over events
only.
Compile SOM: Displays the SOM of the compile ID on the compile reel. ABOX. The primary
box ID of a multispot or Odetics tape.
BBOX: The backup box ID of a tape containing BSPOT (multispot) material IDs.
BBOXSOM: The SOM of a spot on the BBOX.
sSP: The secondary switching parameter contains values depending on the event type. For
primary and secondary Audio/Video events, the value is the audio modes, mono and stereo.
By default, the audio mode is stereo. The value is initially set in a media prep product, such
as Media Client, for the Audio Format database field. It can be modified in Air Client by
clicking an event and entering S or M in the sSP field in Revise mode (ALT + R).
For secondary key and secondary audio over events, the value ranges from 1 to 9. The
number corresponds to a keyer or mixer channel number on the master control
switcher.
If the Audio Mode selection for an existing ADC DB record is modified by the Media
Client Operator, then this update is sent to the event if it exists within an active playlist.
MONO: When mono is set on the playlist sSP column, it will send this command to the
switcher, if the switcher is pre-configured for a mono setting it will switch the audio to
mono.
Unique Event Data Fields

The following playlist columns are unique to a transmission window.
Device: The name of the device assigned to an event. For a switch-only event, the device is
SWTCH.
Status: The status of a device, such as playing, cued or threaded.
PStatus: Identifies the Air/Protect status. The PStatus should mirror the Status to ensure
protect device is ready in case of an on air emergency.
Bin: Displays the location of a tape in a cart machine.
Protect: The name of the protect device assigned to an event. This is an option for the
Automation system.
30-July-2013 | Page 44 of 336

Getting Started
Getting Started
To Launch Air Client
1. From the desktop double click on the Air Client Icon.
2. Only on initial startup of an installed Air Client:
If your system has only one active Network connection to the Air Client, skip to step 3.
If your system has two active Network connections to the Air Client, the Active Network
Interface dialog is displayed prompting the operator to select an interface.
Select the required LAN (for example, select the Automation LAN). If the LAN your
require is not clearly indicated and you are uncertain which one to select, please
contact your Network Administrator for guidance.
Press OK. The system creates a Network.ini file in the systems designated
installation location. (Once correctly set, this dialog will not be displayed for any
subsequent restarts.)
If the incorrect network connection was selected, Air Client will not connect.
To correct this delete the Network.ini file from the systems designated installation
location, restart the Air Client, and then select the correct network connection from
the Active Network Interface dropdown.
3. The Login dialog is displayed.
30-July-2013 | Page 45 of 336

Getting Started
4. Enter the following:
User Name: Admin
Password: <No password. Leave blank>
5. Click OK, or press [Enter]
To Stop Air Client

Logout and In-Session Authentication
End Air Client sessions by clicking Change User on the File ribbon tab, then clicking the Logout
button.
If a system administrator has setup multiple users to use the Air Client workstation, other users
can login from the Change User dialog box.
Air Client User Authentication

When Air Client is launched, enter your username and password in the User Name: and User
Password: fields in the Login dialog box. Usernames and passwords are created by the system
administrator using the Windows Security Administration Tool.
Admin is not assigned a password because it is commonly used in broadcast facilities as the
access name for multiple users. To prevent unauthorized access to the Air Client workstation, a
system administrator should assign an administrator password for this account.
NOTE: If the username field contains the username Default, the privileges assigned to the
Default account are used. At facilities where the security administration tool is used, this
account may be configured to limit access to certain Air Client functions. The original settings for
Default include no privileges.
Some Air Client features, such as configuration options for transmission list windows, will not be
available to all users if security is used.
30-July-2013 | Page 46 of 336

Getting Started
Assigning an Administrator Password

Use the following procedure to assign a new password to the Admin username.
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Set Password icon (
Password dialog is displayed.
). The Set Admin
2. In the Set Admin Password dialog box, perform the following tasks:
Current Password: Enter your password in this field.
New Password: Enter a new password in this field.
Confirm Password: Verify your new password by entering it in this field.
If the password you entered in the New Password: and Confirm Password: fields do
not match, reenter them.
Managing Server / MultiServer

Connections
Use the following procedure to manage Device Server connections for the application.
IMPORTANT: To be able to select multiple servers, the file multiserver.bin must be
present in the installation directory. Contact Harris Automation Technical Support for details.
Multi-Server Note: In a multi server environment, up to 25 Device Servers can be configured as
available in ADC, but only up to 12 can be connected to at one time.
Multi-Server Note: With multiple server login the backup server name is not needed on the
shortcut command line.
Multi-Server Note: With Air Client v4.18 and higher in a multi-server environment it is possible
to operate the playlists of the second (alive) Device Server (load list, start it, etc.) even if the first
Device Server is shut down and the message "Ignore/Retry" appears.
30-July-2013 | Page 47 of 336

Getting Started
Limitations:
Ensure the MAIN and BACKUP Device Servers are configured identically in terms of devices
and assignments. It is expected a Main/Backup configuration is to be used with a serial
transfer switch to move devices from the MAIN Device Server to the BACKUP Device Server.
Do not configure both main/backup Device Servers in the shortcut and the multiserver login
at the same time (on a per client basis) as it can cause issues with prep form displays during
connection/reconnection.
Configuring main/backup Device Servers in the client shortcut is not dependent on

Multiserver login feature.
Device Server Connections (No MultiServer Logon)

If the multiserver login feature is not enabled, the Servers tab on the ribbon is absent, and it is
impossible to edit the available Device Servers connections list.
The only connection available is the startup-defined connection. The Client tries to establish this
connection as soon as it is started.
If connection attempt fails, and there no Backup Device Server was defined at the
startup, only Retry and Abort options are suggested to the operator.
If there is a Backup Device Server is defined, the system also suggests switching to
backup.
To Connect to a Device Server (w/ MultiServer Logon)

With Air Client v4.16/ Media Client v4.16 and higher, ADC Device Server connections are
implemented as follows:
Each connection is defined as a pair of servers (pair of server names) main and
backup
Servers in pair must be of the same generation (both ADCv12)
Each server may have its IP defined (this used to manage the Connect by IP
feature)
Duplicate Device Server names are not allowed. If one server (with particular name)
is used in any role (either as MAIN or as BACKUP) in some connection, it cannot be
used for any other connection. Only one Device Server in the pair can be connected
at the moment
The connection may have no Backup Device Server name defined.
If the connected Device Server fails
And the Backup Device Server name is defined for this connection the client
initiates the server swap procedure and shows the server reconnection dialog
with retry/swap/ignore options.
After the swap all the clients features stay completely available. If, for some
reasons, the Backup Device Server fails too, the client tries to connect back to the
Main Device Server of the Device Server pair.
30-July-2013 | Page 48 of 336

Getting Started
And the Backup Device Server name is not defined for this connection, there is no
swap option in the Device Server reconnection dialog.
Each configured Device Server has its own AsRun and Error Log configurations
Auto List Save and Auto Bin Save (used for main-backup swap) are related to the
connection (Device Server pair) as a whole.
Connecting to a Device Server (w/ MultiServer Logon)

1. From the Servers Ribbon tab select the Connect.... icon (
). The Connect to server
dialog box is displayed listing the device servers Air Client can connect to.
In this dialog each line in a list of available servers describes the connection, which, in its
turn, has its server version (mandatory), main server name (mandatory) and backup
server name (optionally).
The first line in the list is always a startup-defined connection, which cannot be edited
or removed. If no additional server connections are configured, it will be the only one in
the list.
Note: Currently connected servers are displayed in green text and it is impossible to perform
a connect action to these servers (the OK button is grayed-out).
2. In the Connect to server dialog box, select a server (or Main/Backup server pair) from the
Available Servers: pane and then click OK.
3. To connect to another server (or Main/Backup server pair), repeat Step 2. The Air Client can
connect to a maximum number of eight (8) servers.
Disconnecting from a Device Server (w/ MultiServer Logon)

To remove access to transmission lists and device storage and device status windows on a server
connected to Air Client, disconnect from a server by the following procedure.
1. From the Servers Ribbon tab select the Disconnect... icon (
connected, a Choose Server dialog is displayed.
). If multiple servers are
30-July-2013 | Page 49 of 336

Getting Started
2. Select the server to disconnect from and then click OK.

3. The System prompts to confirm disconnect. Click OK to disconnect.
To Add/Edit/Remove/Scan Available Device Server Entries (w/

MultiServer Logon)
Use the following procedure for managing Device Server connections in a multi-server
environment.
1. From the Servers Ribbon tab select Available Servers (
dialog is launched.
). The Edit Available Servers
30-July-2013 | Page 50 of 336

Getting Started
2. (Option) To Add or Edit a Device Server:
To add a server entry, Click Add / To Edit an existing server entry, highlight an existing
Server entry in the Available Servers pane and then click Edit
The Configuration Connection popup dialog is displayed.
Main Server: Enter the Server Name. Device Server names, which are already used in
the configuration of any connection, are not listed in the drop-down, since it is
prohibited to use the same Device Server name twice.
Server version: Select the version of the Device Server to connect to
If v.11 is selected, only v.11 Device Servers are listed in and available for selection
from the drop-down list.
If v.12 version is selected, only v.12 Device Servers are listed in and available for
selection from the drop-down list.
Backup Server: Enter the Server Name. A Device Server name entered in the alternate
server name edit box is not listed in the drop-down, since it is prohibited to use the
same Device Server as main and backup at the same time.
When finished click OK.
3. (Option) To Remove a Server: Highlight an existing Server entry in the Available Servers pane
and then click Remove.
4. When finished, click OK
30-July-2013 | Page 51 of 336

Getting Started
Viewing Resources
Use the following procedures to view / review device server resources.
To View a Full Resource List

1. Select the Resources tab and then select the Resources List icon (
dialog is displayed.
). The Resources list
2. Available Device Servers are listed in a hierarchical tree (e.g. DS1, DS2, etc.)
3. Highlight a Device server and expand the list: The following resources are viewable for the
selected Device Server: Device Status, Lists, Storages, and Switchers.
4. Expand the entry from the resource you want to view.
5. Select a resource. The details of that selection are displayed in a separate dialog.
For example, selecting Device Status from the list display the status of devices connected to
that Device Server.
30-July-2013 | Page 52 of 336

Getting Started
To View Device Status of a Server

Select the Resources tab and then select the Device Status icon (
is displayed for the currently active Device Server.
). The Device Status dialog
To View Lists available on a Device Server

1. Select the Resources tab and then select the View Lists icon (
is displayed for the currently active Device Server.
). The Choose List dialog
30-July-2013 | Page 53 of 336

Getting Started
2. Select a list to view and then click OK. The selected playlist is displayed.
To View Storage Devices available on a Device Server

1. Select the Resources tab and then select the Device Storage icon (
dialog is displayed for the currently active Device Server.
). The Choose Device
2. From the Choose Device dialog select the device that contains the spots you want to purge,
and then click OK. The Device Storage window for that device is displayed showing all spots
recorded on it.
30-July-2013 | Page 54 of 336

Getting Started
Each row in the Device Storage display shows a different clip, which may be highlighted
by clicking on its number in the Num column at the left of the display. Click on an
individual cell to highlight it.
Each column in the display shows a different clip field. The order of these columns may
be changed by clicking and holding down the mouse on the header of a column and
dragging it to a new location. A selected clip may be dragged to the Purge Material
window.
A status bar at the bottom of the window displays the status of the device, as well as the
current server time.
To View Switchers available on a Device Server

1. Ensure a Device Server is selected and active.
2. Select the Resources tab and then select the Switcher icon (
).
If only a single Device Server is connected, the Choose Switcher dialog is displayed for
the currently active Device Server. (Go to Step 3.)
If multiple servers are connected, a Choose Server dialog is displayed for the currently
active Device Server. Select the target server and then click OK.
30-July-2013 | Page 55 of 336

Getting Started
3. The Choose Switcher dialog is displayed for the currently active Device Server.
4. Select a switcher to view and then click OK. Details of the selected switcher are displayed.
Traffic-Generated Lists
Events entered in a traffic system by the traffic department are stored in an external file which
can be translated into a playlist. Translating and importing this file, versus entering each event
manually, avoids redundant data entry, saves time and allows the traffic file to be edited by an
Air Client operator.
30-July-2013 | Page 56 of 336

Getting Started
Use the WinCmms tool to translate a log from traffic into a .LST file. For information on this
application see WinCmms.
To Save the Desktop

Use the following procedure to save all desktop settings, including which windows are open and
how they are tiled in proportion to one another. This will determine which windows will be
opened automatically each time the program is launched.
From the Air Client Properties ribbon tab select the Save Desktop... the icon (
).
Help and About Information
To Launch the Help System

From the Help Ribbon bar select Help. The Air Client Help System is launched.
To View About Information

From the Help Ribbon bar select About... The About Air Client window displays legal notices,
copyright information, and version information. The following is an example screen; the version
information displayed on your screen will be different.
30-July-2013 | Page 57 of 336

Getting Started
NOTE: When calling Harris Broadcast Technical Support to report a problem, make sure you
have the displayed version number handy.
Managing Window Layouts and Colors

Use the Window Ribbon Tab to manage window layouts and colors.
To Change Window Skin Color Schemes

Use this procedure to change the GUI skin color by selecting a different color for the list of
available colors.
1. From the main ribbon tool bar select the Window tab.
2. From the ColorScheme group select a color from the palette. The window skins of the
application change to the selected color.
To Change Window Layouts

Use this procedure to change the layout of windows within the application.
1. From the main ribbon tool bar select the Window tab.
2. From the Windows group select windows layout or action:
Default Desktop: Changes desktop appearance back to the saved desktop settings
Cascade: Cascades all open windows [screens] so that title-bar lines will be visible
30-July-2013 | Page 58 of 336

Getting Started
Tile: Allow viewing all open windows [screens] simultaneously in a tile view
Arrange Icons: Allows you to arrange icons on your desktop
Close All: Closes all open windows [or screens]. This does not close the program.
Aero WindowsTheme Issues

Do not change the Desktop Theme while Air Client is in operation. Please be aware that Air
Client will fail if an operator switches between a Classic WindowsTheme and an Aero
WindowsTheme on the Client workstation.
Also, connecting an Air Client workstation running an Aero WindowsTheme with another
workstation via a Remote Desktop Connection (e.g. mstsc.exe) can interrupt Air Client
functionality.
To Change the Windows Aero Effect Theme

If the Client computer is running Windows 7 Operating System, the operator can use standard
Microsoft operations to change the Windows Aero Effect theme, the Display properties (color of
windows, turn off transparency), or text color and style as desired. For example, use the
following procedure to change the Main Window Caption Text color and background in a
Windows 7 environment.
1. From the desktop choose the Personalize option (Control Panel\Appearance and
Personalization\Personalization).
2. The simple way (Don't use it if you prefer Windows Aero theme) to disable light shadow of
text (no transparency) is to choose Windows 7 Basic theme.
3. For advanced settings it is possible to choose Windows Color.
4. Now it is possible to choose suitable color of a background and to choose Title Bar text
(font, color, and size).
About Operator Control Panel (OCP)

Functions
The OCP comes with 24, hi-res, remotely-relegendable 64 x 32 LCD buttons, 10 bank buttons,
and 17 additional function and navigation switches. The hi-res LCD buttons can be programmed
to provide a range of functions. Most commonly used when breakdowns or other failures occur,
each button on the OCP can call up actions needed in a hurry.
For example, a button can be configured to:
Cut back to Network, or even backup device with a ready content.

Display a full-screen apology slide or trigger a caption for missing audio.
30-July-2013 | Page 59 of 336

Getting Started
To force reinitialize the OCP

When the OCP panel is used with Air Client, ensure it is connected and powered on before Air
Client is started, otherwise Air Client will not recognize and initialize it.
If, for some reason, Air Client was started before the OCP panel was connected and turned on, it
is recommended to re-start Air Client or to force panel initialization in the following way:
1. From the Properties ribbon menu select the Hardware Control Panel icon (
Hardware Control Panel dialog is displayed.
). The
2. Click OK to close this dialog. This action forces Air Client to re-initialize all configured control
panels.
Locking the Operator Control Panel (OCP)

To avoid accidental action, Air Client allows the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to be locked when
the panel is not in use.
Pressing Shift+F5 on the OCP Panel acts as a toggle to enable /disable panel lock:
Press Shift+F5 once. Panel buttons are changed to Red indicating panel operations are
locked.
The LCD buttons labels remain, but the colors are changed to a low intensity red.
Pressing a bank button changes the mapping of the top row of LCD buttons
(representing the lists) but causes no action.
No action occurs if any LCD button is pressed.
Press Shift+F5 again. Panel buttons are restored to normal operation mode.
Pressing any LCD buttons- either the top row representing lists or any of the actionsperforms the appropriate action.
Pressing a bank button changes the definitions of the list buttons
The LCD buttons are labeled and illuminated as normal.
Note: The shift function can also be used to 'guard' a particular function, by making it less likely
to be invoked.
Using the Shift Function

The Operator Control Panel (OCP) Shift function is mapped to the labeled Shift button (F4). The
shift + action of another button can be invoked either by pressing and releasing the shift buttonlatching shift mode- or by holding the shift button while pressing the other button.
Shift + F4 is Release Shift and clears a latched shift mode. While in shift mode, the shift button is
illuminated.
Note: The shift function can also be used to 'guard' a particular function, by making it less likely
to be invoked.
30-July-2013 | Page 60 of 336

Getting Started
Keyboard Shortcuts
It is possible to access certain commands through Keyboard Shortcut Keys. Memorizing these
shortcuts may save time in the future. The shortcut keys are displayed next to their
corresponding function within the Ribbon tab or pop-up menus. The following is a list of the
primary shortcut keys.
A list of shortcut commands

Commands
Shortcut(s)
File
Ctrl+N = New Playlist

Ctrl+O = Open Playlist
Ctrl+S = Save
Ctrl+P = Print
Alt+X = Exit Program
(Note: Alt+F4 is the Windows shortcut for closing an application.)
Edit
Ctrl+X = Cut
Ctrl+C= Copy
Ctrl+V= Paste
CTRL+F= Find
CTRL+R= Replace
DEL = Clear / Delete
Events
Alt+R = Toggle Revise

Alt+Q = Revise
INS = Insert New Primary
Shift+INS = Insert Secondary
Alt+O = Toggle Hard Start
Alt+M = Ripple Time
Windows
Alt+Hyphen/Alt+Spacebar =window sizing pull-down

Shift+F5 = Cascade
Shift+F4 = Tile
Ctrl+Tab = Select a windows alternate entry field
Ctrl+F6 = Display next open window
Ctrl+F4 = Close active window
Shift+F10 = Display a windows Right Click Menu
Playlist
Ctrl+H = Hide All Secondaries
30-July-2013 | Page 61 of 336

Getting Started
Commands
Shortcut(s)
Options
Ctrl+T = Hide Some Secondary Event Types

Ctrl+E = Expand/Contract an event
Alt+V = Device Control Panel
Alt+C = Recue a selected event
Alt+T = Thread a selected event
Alt+U = Unthread selected event
Others /
Misc.
F1 = Help
Ctrl+Home = Top of List
Ctrl+End = End of List
Running Air Client Offline

If required, Air Client v4.18 and higher can be run offline (not connected to a Device Server) for
list prep/validation purposes.
Note: Only Admin user, Default user and users with full access to all servers are able to login
to the Air Client, running in the Offline Mode.
The offline Air Client can be set to run in NTSC or PAL by modifying the Air Client .ini file located
in the clients installation folder.
[DefaultTimecode]
FrameRate=
DropFrame=
Possible values:
FrameRate: NTSC, PAL
DropFrame 1 (for Drop Frame type), 0 (for Non-Drop Frame type)
IMPORTANT: The DefaultTimecode section must be added at the top of the ini file for Air Client
to apply it at next start.
Note: If the DefaultTimecode section does not exist in the Air Client INI file - NTSC Non-drop
frame clocking is used.
30-July-2013 | Page 62 of 336

On-Air Playback Operations

About On-Air Playback
This section describes how to quickly start using the Air Client application. Detailed use of the
features of the Air Client application will be described later in the following chapters of this
manual.
The Harris Broadcast Air Client application allows real-time monitoring and control of the on-air
playout channel. Play List files generated by a traffic department may be translated by the play
list translator utility and then appended into the transmission list. Play list files may also be
created manually with the Air Client software. The transmission list controls the actual
sequence of playout events. Events may be cut, copied, pasted, dragged and dropped within
the transmission list. New play list files may be appended to the current on-air transmission list
to form a single, continuous playout list.
As the transmission list plays events, the list packs - DONE events will disappear from the top
of the list, and new events will enter the event lookahead. When events enter the lookahead,
their IDs are compared to IDs within the storage collection of the video server or to a VTR
assigned to the transmission list. If the ID is found in the video server or a VTR, the event is
registered and will turn blue on the transmission list. A registered event is available for playout.
Missing events IDs not found in an assigned device will appear in red on the transmission list
to alert the operator that they must be readied for air. Events outside the event lookahead are
not registered. The transmission list will always display a configurable amount of DONE events
at the top.
The transmission list actually runs on the Device Server, under the control of the Air Client. In
case of a failure of the Air Client, the transmission list will continue to run on the Device Server,
preventing an interruption of the playout channel. Both the Air Client and Media Client
applications may be safely restarted at any time. The Air Client may be safely rebooted without
affecting air.
Automated V11 to V12 list translation utility

Air Client 4.20 and higher incorporates a list translation utility which automatically converts any
version 11 formatted playlist file into a version 12 format. This function changes the extension
of the original v11 file to ".v11", while the translated v12 playlist has the original filename and
the .lst extension. This eliminates any change in the length of the either file's filename.
When a version 11 formatted list is loaded, inserted or appended into Air Client v4, the user
is presented with a warning message that states the list will be converted into a version 12
format and the original list renamed with a .v11 extension.
For Example: "The play list you have selected: list_1 will automatically be converted into a
compatible format. Initial file will be renamed to the list_1.v11."
30-July-2013 | Page 63 of 336

On opening a version 11 playlist file that has previously undergone this conversion and
created a version 12 formatted playlist file, a warning message is generated asking the user
if they want to overwrite the version 12 playlist file.
Translator Known Issues

The following are known issues for the in-line translator:
External data written in the Text editor is lost: If a v3/v11 playlist is created, vDT Secondary
External Events inserted, and the playlist is then loaded with a v4 client, when it converts it
to a v12 format the external data written in the Text editor is lost and must be re-written.
To View an ON AIR List / Transmission List

Use the following procedure to quickly view an ON AIR List / Transmission List.
NOTE: The Operation Control Panel (OCP) play list buttons can also be used to view an ON AIR
List. Actions taken on the OCP are logged in the Operations log.
1. From the Resources ribbon tab select the View List Icon (
displayed.
). The Choose List dialog is
2. Choose the desired List, and then click OK.

Note: Your Play List name may be different than what appears here.
3. The selected Transmission List opens in the Air Client desktop.
Note: Loading a List overwrites any events that are currently in the transmission list with the
play list file that is selected. This will stop an event that is currently playing On Air. This is
intended to be used for Record Lists or when the transmission list is already off the air.
30-July-2013 | Page 64 of 336

To Build a Play List File

1. From the File ribbon tab select the New Playlist icon (
opened in the workspace.
). A new blank Playlist window is
2. Select the Insert key on keyboard OR from the Events ribbon tab select the Insert Primary
icon (
). The application is automatically placed in Revise Mode and a new event
appears in the Playlist window.
3. Click on the ID column of this new event, enter the ID of a program that was prepared using
Media Client, and then press <Return>. The Select Segment box appears.
4. Click the Single Spot button to view single spots for the ID. A message box will appear if no
single spots exist for the ID.
5. Select segment 1 in the segment box and then click OK.
30-July-2013 | Page 65 of 336

6. Position yellow cursor on the play list and repeat steps 3 - 4 for additional segments and/or
spots. Any new events will be inserted above the cursor. When inserting of events are
completed, exit Revise Mode.
7. To exit Revise mode press <Alt+R> or from the Events ribbon tab select the Cancel icon
(
).
8. From the File ribbon tab select the Save PlayList As icon (
displayed.
). The Save Playlist dialog is
9. File Name: Type the name the Play List is to be saved as, and then select Save. The play list
filename will appear at the top of the window.
Air Client will not load or save any Playlist <<Playlists, (.lst & .cur), Auto List Save Lists,
(.rcv & .rcb), Sectional Lists, (.sec), Compile Lists, (.cpl)>> with a name longer than 32
characters total, (including its filename extensions). A warning pops up when
attempting to save a Playlist name longer than a total of 32 characters.
10. Close the Play List window.

30-July-2013 | Page 66 of 336

To Save a Playlist file as Text

1. Select a playlist file or the On Air transmission list
2. From the File ribbon tab select the Save As Text icon (
displayed.
).The Save as Text dialog is
3. File Name: Enter the file name or select existing file form list options, and then select Save.
Air Client will not load or save any Playlist <<Playlists, (.lst & .cur), Auto List Save Lists, (.rcv
& .rcb), Sectional Lists, (.sec), Compile Lists, (.cpl)>> with a name longer than 32 characters
total, (including its filename extensions). A warning pops up when attempting to save a
Playlist name longer than a total of 32 characters
To Open an Existing Playlist

1. From the File ribbon tab select the Open play list icon (
).
2. Select the play list file you wish to open and view. The default playlist file directory is the
same directory where the Air Client application resides.
3. From the Open/Save dialog box, select a playlist and click Open. Playlist filenames use a .LST
extension.
30-July-2013 | Page 67 of 336

characters total, (including its filename extensions). A warning pops up when attempting
to save a Playlist name longer than a total of 32 characters.
Once the playlist file is open, the file can be checked for accuracy, changes can be made,
etc.
Note: Your playlist name(s) may be different than what appears here.
Note: The first time File/Open Playlist, File/Open Text, Append/load/insert list is used,
the dialog window shows the directory specified in Properties/Environment. If the
operator browses to a different location, the Dialog remembers/remaps to the last
used folder, and opens it by default the next time File/Open Playlist, File/Open Text,
Append/load/insert list' is used.
To Insert a Play List file to the Transmission

List
Use this procedure to insert a play list file above the placement of the cursor on the
transmission list. This can be used for schedule or program changes.
1. From the Resources ribbon tab select the VIEW LIST Icon (
displayed.
30-July-2013 | Page 68 of 336

2. Choose the desired List (PlayList1), and then click OK. This brings up the Transmission List
that will be used for On Air Playback.
NOTE: Your Play List name may be different than what appears here.
3. Select the event line where the playlist will be inserted. Position the cursor on the
transmission list at the specific point where the play list will be inserted.
IMPORTANT: The playlist is inserted ABOVE the selected line.
4. From the Quick Access ribbon tab in the List Tools group, select the Insert List icon (
The Insert PlayList dialog is displayed.
).
Note: The first time File/Open Playlist, File/Open Text, Append/load/insert list is used, the
dialog window shows the directory specified in Properties/Environment. If the operator
browses to a different location, the Dialog remembers/remaps to the last used folder, and
opens it by default the next time File/Open Playlist, File/Open Text, Append/load/insert list'
is used.
Note: If using the ADC AirFlex functionality for breakaway scenarios, browse to the location
of the Breakaway Lists. This is typically a subfolder to the ADC Playlist location. For more
information see the ADC AirFlex Reference manual.
30-July-2013 | Page 69 of 336

5. On the Insert PlayList dialog, select the Play List file that will be inserted to the On Air Play
List window, and then select Open.
The selected play list is inserted above the selected line.
The filename of the inserted play list appears above the newly inserted play list.
In ADC no more than 12500 events can be added into a Transmission List.
Playlist name longer than a total of 32 characters.
To Append a Play List file to the

Transmission List
displayed.
30-July-2013 | Page 70 of 336

2. Choose the desired List (PlayList1), and then click OK. This brings up the Transmission List
that will be used for On Air Playback.
3. From the Quick Access ribbon tab in the List Tools group select the Append List icon (
The Append PlayList dialog is displayed.
).
Note: If using the ADC AirFlex functionality for breakaway scenarios, browse to the location
of the Breakaway Lists. This is typically a subfolder to the ADC Playlist location. For more
information see the ADC AirFlex Reference manual.
CAUTION: You can also right click in the transmission list to open the Playlist Options menu
and select Append List. Do this with care. Load List is located next to Append List on the right
click transmission list options menu. If Load List is selected the On Air Transmission List will
be taken off the air!
About ADC v11 vs. ADC v12 Lists: The Air Client v4 application contains an embedded
playlist converter that allows existing ADC v11 playlists to be automatically and
transparently converted to ADC v12 playlist format upon loading or appending.
30-July-2013 | Page 71 of 336

is used.
4. On the Append Playlist dialog, select the Play List file that will be appended to the On Air
Play List window, and then select Open.
characters total, (including its filename extensions). A warning pops up when
attempting to save a Playlist name longer than a total of 32 characters.
In ADC no more than 12500 events can be added into a Transmission List.
5. The selected play list will be appended to the window.

6. When the filename marks done at the top of the transmission list:
The bottom of the transmission list will update with the currently running play list.
(Example below is a representation only of what it will look like)
Below is an example of how events appear in the window when not running.
To Load a List
This operation will overwrite any events that are currently in the transmission list with the play
list file that is selected. This is intended to be used for Record Lists or when the transmission list
is already off the air.
WARNING: If Load List is selected the On Air Transmission List will be taken off the air!
Right click in the transmission list to open the Play List Options menu, and then select Load
List.
Playlist name longer than a total of 32 characters.
30-July-2013 | Page 72 of 336

is used.
About ADC v11 vs. ADC v12 Lists: The Air Client v4 application contains an embedded playlist
converter that allows existing ADC v11 playlists to be automatically and transparently converted
to ADC v12 playlist format upon loading or appending.
To Run the Transmission List

With a playlist loaded:
1. Select Run on the optional Hardware Control Panel (OCP)
OR
Double click on the play list to bring up the software version of the On Air Play list control
panel and select Run.
2. Selecting Run threads up all available devices that have the IDs located in the device.
Typically only the disk is able to thread and any Switch Only sources such as Studio or
Network sources.
Software Panel buttons:
Run: Thread and cues the first event in a playlist and any events within the time range
specified in the lookahead. The number of events cued is limited by the number of
available media heads and devices. You cannot play events until you run the playlist.
Play: Plays the first event in a playlist; however, before you can play events, you must
first click the Run button. The Play button can also be used to restart a frozen or held
playlist or a playlist stopped by a break event. Clicking the Play button initiates preroll
for the playlist so the following event will play after the preroll time.
The Play button will not play a hard start event unless it is configured to do so, as
described in Miscellaneous on page 4-14. Use the Play Hard Hits option to start a hard
start event with the Play button on the control panel. If this is not set, the operator
cannot play an event that has a hard start if the playlist has stopped running.
Ready: Turn on tension to the next VTR event in tension release to prepare upcoming
VTR events. Click this button to prepare a VTR event for transmission that is out of the
standby on-time range. Usually used after an upcount events to get the next event
ready.
30-July-2013 | Page 73 of 336

Hold: Holds the countdown of an event that is playing, causing the event to continue
playing longer than its duration. You can extend the events duration until the Play
button is clicked. The playlist will then advance to the next event which can only be
played with the Play or Skip button.

SyncSkip command concept is that the next event with a designated sequential Seg #
becomes equal to the remaining part of the current event. Since each of these events
represent the entire program, the SOM of the next event is shifted to the EOM point of
the current event and the DUR of the next event is made equal to the remaining DUR of
the current event.
Skip: Skips the event currently playing and plays the next event. Also, click this button to
skip a frozen or held event.
Ten Rel: (Tension Release) Places a cued events VTR into tension release. At the
Standby On time (before an event is about to air), Air Client issues a command to the
VTR to enter Ready status and tension up the tape. The Status field of the event in a
transmission list window displays Ready.
Freeze: Stops play and countdown. Click this button to pause the current event. Then,
you may skip, roll, reinitiate play or recue the event using the Play button. The Status
field of the event in a transmission list window displays Still.
Roll: Roll bypasses normal preroll values and plays the next event as fast as the
equipment will allow. If the current event is playing normally, the Roll button skips it
and plays the next event using normal preroll values unless configured to use instant
preroll values. If the current event is frozen, this button will play the next event. If the
current event is being held, clicking this button plays the event.
UnThd: (UnThread). Stops a running transmission list, including the on-air event and any
events that follow. All events are uncued and the list goes off-air.
Protect: Toggles the signal switching paths between the on-air and protect devices. Click
this button to play an event from the air device, or vice versa. This is an optional
function and may not be available on your workstation.
Secondary: The ADC hardware control panel can be configured to add the action Play
Secondary. This allows a secondary event to be manually triggered
+1 Sec: Add one second to the playing events duration. Each time you click this button,
one second is added to the duration.
Recue: Recues an on-air event. To play the recued event, click the Play button.
-1 Sec: Subtract one second from the playing events duration. Each time you click this
button, one second is subtracted from the duration.
3. (Option) If loading a tape that does not have User Bits into a VTR follow these steps:
Insert tape into an available On Air VTR deck that is in Local mode.
Set levels.
Select event on play list that represents loaded tape in VTR, right click and from the
popup menu select Barcode Event.
30-July-2013 | Page 74 of 336

Put VTR into Remote. Event on the play list will turn blue, the VTR will cue to SOM in the
SOM column, and device column will reflect the VTR tape is loaded into.
4. With the Play list loaded and cued up, select Play on the Hardware Control Panel or on the
Software Control Panel.
The play list starts playing. If the system is configured correctly, the switcher switches these
events to the program output of the switcher. Each event plays for the duration designated
on play list.
To Air a Live Event

Live shows can air using a switch only device that was configured as a source on the switcher.
The switch only device and its audio/video cross points are configured in the device server.
Once you know for sure you will want to air a live show:
1. Insert a Primary Event into the transmission list at the time a live event is to air. (Note If
the log was translated from traffic, the event type should be on the list already.)
2. Enter the ID name of the switch only. (Note The event may already be in the playlist).
Type AU for the event type. The duration can be set to 00:00:00:00 for event to count up
from the start, or the estimated duration for the live event.
3. Exit Revise Mode. To exit Revise mode press <Alt+R> or from the Events ribbon tab select
the Cancel icon (
).
The switch only will play at the designated time if an O is also entered for the live
shows first segment only. If an O is not used then the live show will air in the order it
is entered in the On Air Play List.
Check the Device Status Window to see what the proper ID name is for a configured
switch only. The configured switch only will be assigned to the On Air Play List. Use the
ID that is in the ID column of the correct switch only to use.
When each live event plays, the operator will need to manually roll out of a live event
on the On Air Play List. Select the Play button on the hardware or software control
panel to roll out of the live event to the break.
30-July-2013 | Page 75 of 336

4. The events that run during a break will run as A event types (above the blank event types).
The break will play in sequence until the next AU live source is played, at which time the
operator would once again need to manually play out of the live event.
Join an Event in Progress

For details on performing Join in Progress operations see ADC AirFlex..
To Preview Play
A threaded and cued event can be selected and previewed while the On Air event is currently
playing.
1. Position the cursor on the event that is threaded and cued.
2. Right click on the transmission list, and from the popup menu select Preview Play.
3. Allow the event to play out and it will recue automatically.
4. If time does not permit the event to preview completely, select Recue in the right click
options menu while the cursor is still on the preview playing event.
Thread, Unthread, Recue an Event

An upcoming event that is threaded in a device can be unthreaded, recued, and re-threaded if
needed.
Unthread an event
1. On the playlist window select the threaded event.
2. Right click on the playlist window and from the play list options menu select Unthread, or
press <Alt+U>, or press the UnThd button on the control panel.
Thread the event

1. On the playlist window select the unthreaded event.
2. Right click on the playlist window and from the play list options menu select Thread, or
press <Alt+T>, or press the Program Run button on the control panel.
Recue the event

1. On the playlist window select the threaded event.
30-July-2013 | Page 76 of 336

2. Right click on the playlist window and from the play list options menu select Recue, or press
<Alt+C>, or press the Recue button on the control panel.
Using the VTR Device Control Panel

When an event on the transmission list is threaded in a VTR (or cartmachine VTR) a Device
Control Panel for the threaded VTR can be accessed to allow remote control of the VTR.
1. Position the cursor on the event that has a tape threaded in the VTR.
2. Right click on the transmission list, select Device Control Panel. (It can also be invoked by
double clicking on the device in the device status window.) A VTR remote panel will appear
giving the user basic control of the VTR.
Device controls include:
Rewind (Rew): Click to rewind the currently threaded clip.
Fast Forward (Ffwd): Click to fast forward the currently threaded clip.
Stop: Click to stop the action (e.g. play, rewind, fast forward) taken on the currently
threaded clip.
Play: Click to put the currently threaded clip into play.
Cue: Click to cue the clip to event SOM, or to the head if the event SOM field is blank.
If the Device Control Panel is used to preview material on the device, make sure to
select the CUE button on the Device Control Panel when finished.
If the next event to air has been unthreaded and another event selected for control,
the list must manually rethreaded. It is the operators responsibility to ensure that
resources are returned to the list and properly threaded prior to the event.
Eject: Eject the Tape.
30-July-2013 | Page 77 of 336

Note: The Get Clip function present on the VDCP panel - is not required or available for
VTRs.
Jog and Shuttle: Use these controls to move forward or backward in the material.
3. Click Copy SOM to apply the device's current position as the event's SOM.
IMPORTANT:
If configured, the Adjust Durations When SOM Changes function modifies the duration
of the event based on the change in the SOM. Adjust Durations is not invoked if the
initial SOM of the event is blank.
No facility is provided for manually defining the EOM or Duration of the clip using the
Device Control Panel.
This function does not write any data to the database, nor does it update any other
events in the same or other lists. It is not intended to replace the prepping of material via
the Media Client.
This capability is not available when the Device Control Panel is invoked from the Device
Status Window.
CAUTION!
- If a VTR is controlled by a Device Control Panel, the event must be cued prior to playback.
- If the device control panel is used to preview material on the device, make sure the tape is
cued back to the SOM by selecting the CUE button on the Device Control Panel.
- The device will cue to the SOM that is located in the SOM column of the event.
Using the VDCP Device Control Panel

When an event on the transmission list is threaded in a VDCP device, such as a Video Server, a
Device Control Panel for the threaded VDCP device can be accessed to allow remote control of
the VDCP Device. Depending on the resources available to the list and the currently playing
event, it may be possible to unthread a currently cued event and select and thread another
event prior to invoking the VDCP control panel.
WARNING: Extreme caution must be exercised to avoid impacting on-air events. The VDCP
control panel should not be used when either head of the port to be controlled is currently
being utilized on air.
1. Position the cursor on the event that has an event threaded in the VDCP device.
2. Right click on the transmission list, select Device Control Panel. (It can also be invoked by
double clicking on the device in the device status window.) A VDCP remote panel will
appear giving the user basic control of the VDCP device.
30-July-2013 | Page 78 of 336

Device controls include:
Rewind (Rew): Click to rewind the currently threaded clip.
Fast Forward (Ffwd): Click to fast forward the currently threaded clip.
Stop: Click to stop the action (e.g. play, rewind, fast forward) taken on the currently
threaded clip.
Play: Click to put the currently threaded clip into play.
Cue: Click to cue the clip to event SOM, or to the head if the event SOM field is blank.
If the Device Control Panel is used to preview material on the device, make sure to
select the CUE button on the Device Control Panel when finished.
If the next event to air has been unthreaded and another event selected for control,
the list must manually rethreaded. It is the operators responsibility to ensure that
resources are returned to the list and properly threaded prior to the event.
Get Clip: Click to cue to the head of the clip, irrespective of the event SOM. For VDCP
devices, if the event has an SOM, it is not possible to navigate outside of the cued
portion of the clip. The Get Clip command can be used to cue and provide access to the
entire clip.
Note: This will also blank the event SOM.
Jog and Shuttle: Use these controls to move forward or backward in the material. If the
Device Control Panel is used to preview material on the device, make sure to select the
CUE button on the Device Control Panel when finished.
3. Click Copy SOM to apply the device's current position as the event's SOM.
IMPORTANT:
If configured, the Adjust Durations When SOM Changes function modifies the duration
of the event based on the change in the SOM. Adjust Durations is not invoked if the
initial SOM of the event is blank.
No facility is provided for manually defining the EOM or Duration of the clip using the
Device Control Panel.
30-July-2013 | Page 79 of 336

This function does not write any data to the database, nor does it update any other
events in the same or other lists. It is not intended to replace the prepping of material via
the Media Client.
This capability is not available when the Device Control Panel is invoked from the Device
Status Window.
CAUTION!
- The VDCP Control Panel must be used with caution as it can also control Events playing from
On Air Video Servers.
- If the port selected for control is currently playing out a clip to air, playing an event that is
CUED on the 2nd head of the port with the VDCP Control Panel stops the currently playing head.
- If played for its full duration, the reviewed clip is marked DONE.
- Re-cue the clip after reviewing it by clicking on the Cue button. If the clip is not re-cued before
Air, it starts playing from where it was stopped by the VDCP Control Panel.
To Set on Air Focus

Use the following procedure to ensure the currently playing event in a play list is always visible
in the play list window.
1. Right click on a playlist and from the popup menu select On Air Focus,
Or from the Quick Access ribbon tab in the List Tools group press the ON Air Focus icon
(
).
The currently playing event is highlighted in the play list.

If you scroll the window until the playing event is not visible, the list will scroll back to the
next event when it goes into preroll.
Note: The colors on the following image have been modified to enhance readability. Your
display will look different.
The List Status bar indicates if On Air focus is ON or OFF, and if List is locked (Done Count =
0) or not.
Calculate Durations of Multiple Events

Use the following procedure to calculate the duration of multiple events.
1. Block highlight a sequence of events to calculate. (Click an event, then hold Shift and click
another event to select a range.)
30-July-2013 | Page 80 of 336

2. From the Events ribbon tab select the Calculate Durations icon (
appears giving the total duration of all highlighted/selected events.
). An Information box
Find an ID
To find an ID that is located on a playlist file or transmission list, the Find option can be used.
1. Position the cursor at the top of the list in the ID column.
2. From the Edit ribbon tab select the Find (
) icon. The Find Id box opens.
3. Specify the search parameters:
Find what field: Type in the ID to find. (e.g. Demo0001)
Match whole word only. Check to have search look for whole word matches.
Match case: Check to have search look only for entries that match the case (Upper or
Lower) for the entry specified in the Find what field.
30-July-2013 | Page 81 of 336

Ignore secondary event: Check to ignore secondary events in "Find" operation. (When a
search in list is typically done, the result includes secondary events. If there is a
secondary event with the same ID, the user may not want to find it.)
Direction: Specify the search direction: Up the list or Down the list form the current
cursor position.
4. Click Find Next. The cursor will jump to the first match of the ID or text string.
5. Edit the found ID or text string as necessary.
6. If additional IDs or text strings need to be found select Find Next. (Repeat this until all
records are found)
Find Next Occurrence of an ID in a List

Use the following procedure to find the next occurrence of an event with the same Media ID in a
list.
1. Position the cursor on an event in a viewlist.
2. Press <F3> or right click on the list and from the menu select Find Next Occurrence. The
cursor jumps to the next occurrence of that event (with the same media ID) in the list.
Managing Bookmarks
Air Client v4.19 and higher provides a bookmark facility that allows operators to return to
marked locations in the playlist/Transmission list. Bookmarks are saved as part of the playlist
file. If a playlist is edited, bookmarked and then closed, when it is opened again the bookmarks
is still e present. They can be cleared or new bookmarks added again.
IMPORTANT: The Bookmark feature is supported in ADC v12 only.
To Add / Remove a Bookmark

A selection toggle between bookmarking the event and clearing the bookmark is accessed via a
right click option on the playlist or as a keyboard short cut (ALT+B). Up to 3 bookmarks can be
set at one time. If the operator attempts to create a forth bookmark, a pop up window is
displayed stating that the Maximum Number of Bookmarks already in Use.
To Add a Bookmark
Use the following procedure to add a bookmark.
Select an event on the playlist.
30-July-2013 | Page 82 of 336

1. Right click and from the context menu select Toggle Bookmark or press <Alt+B>.
2. The first column cell of the bookmarked event is highlighted with a distinct yellow color:
To Remove a Bookmark
Use the following procedure to remove a bookmark.
1. Select a bookmarked event on the playlist.
2. Right click and from the context menu select Toggle Bookmark or press <Alt+B>.
3. The bookmark is removed and the first column cell of the event is returned to normal color.
30-July-2013 | Page 83 of 336

To Jump to a Bookmark
The following options allow the operator to quickly move from on air event to bookmarked
events and back again:
To jump to the next/previous bookmarked event use the right click contextual menu or the
keyboard shortcuts: CTL+Alt+PageDown/ CTL+Alt+PageUp.
If the operator is at the last bookmarked event in the playlist jumping down to the next
bookmarked event will bring them back to the on-air event and from there they can
continue to jump down to the first bookmarked event.
To Set a Hard Start Event

A hard start is an event type that will play an event at a predetermined time of day. (i.e. it plays
at its start time instead of when the previous event finishes playing). The device must be
threaded and cued for the hard start to run correctly.
To Toggle a Hard Start

1. Position cursor in type field of event that will be a hardstart event.
2. Select Alt+O in the Events ribbon tab, or get into Revise (Alt+R) and type in what event
types are needed.
NOTE: An O only designates an event to be a hard start, an A will still be required to
correctly thread, play, and switch the event.
3. Position cursor in the time field of the event to hardstart. If not already in Revise, get into
Revise mode (Alt+R).
4. Type in desired time of day for the hardstart to play to air. Get out of Revise Mode.
NOTE: Remember the times will not ripple past the hardstart event until it plays. Ripple time
can be used to see what time of day following events will play).
If the playlist is running short in duration to the hardstart event, the list will stop and wait
until the hardstart events scheduled start time. Alternately, if the list is running long in
duration to the hardstart event, the list will cut out of any playing event and start playing the
hardstart event at the scheduled start time.
30-July-2013 | Page 84 of 336

Toggle Look Ahead

The Look Ahead is the area of the transmission list that will query the devices assigned to the
transmission list for availability of media in the lookahead area. The toggle lookahead option will
adjust the lookahead area from the current setting to a full list lookahead. If the lookahead is
set to the full list, then it will adjust to the pre-configured lookahead value.
The lookahead value is the configured value of events that the automation will check for device
availability.
Events within the lookahead range display in blue (or customized color as set in the playlist
options menu/colors) if they are primary events and are located on an assigned device to
the transmission list.
Events outside of the lookahead range will display in black. If an event is within the
lookahead range, but is missing media, it will display in red.
Toggle look ahead for the entire list checks the entire list and has a direct impact on how GMT
transfers media.
To Toggle Look Ahead

Right click on a playlist list window and from the popup menu select Toggle Look Ahead or press
<F8> shortcut.
Managing List Confirmations

It is possible to configure a Confirmation for any modification of a Play List, If list confirmations
are configured, the concerned parameters are displayed in a confirmation window. For details
see Configuring Playlist Options.
The operator can choose to Apply the change, Find Next change, or Cancel the Confirmations
for:
Event Time, ID, Title and Number

Event(s) Delete / Cut
Event(s) or Playlist Paste / Insert
Event(s) Move.
Managing Secondary Events on a Playlist

Options for secondary events allow an operator to customize their display in the playlist.
30-July-2013 | Page 85 of 336

IMPORTANT: To use the option of Secondary Event Hiding in the Playlist Options menu, enable
the Air Client Properties parameter Environment>List Options>Allow Secondary Event Hiding.
IMPORTANT: When secondary events are hidden, if an event or block of events are highlighted
and then deleted, the hidden events within the selection are also deleted.
IMPORTANT: ADC Air Client operators can attach up to 49 secondary events to a primary event
within the ADC Transmission List. This value is critical to know for users who utilize hard start
events within their ADC Transmission List. The logic within the ADC Transmission List requires
the next hard start event to occur within the next 50 events.
Note: For a list of secondary events: Appendix B: Secondary Events.
To Show / Hide Secondary Events

1. Click the right-mouse button on the playlists window to display the right-click menu.
2. Select the desired display option.
When secondary events are hidden, the playlist right-click menu option changes to display
the option Show All Secondaries.
When secondary events are displayed, the playlist right-click menu option changes to
display the option Hide All Secondaries.
If any secondaries are currently hidden in the list, from the right click menu select Show
All Secondaries to ensure all secondary events are shown in the playlist.
If any secondaries are currently shown in the list, from the right click menu select Hide
All Secondaries to hide all secondary events in the playlist. Hidden secondary events are
represented with icons in the Event column of the playlist.
To toggle expand / contract a specific hidden secondary event on the list, select a
hidden event and then from the right click menu select Expand/Contract An Event.
Alternatively double click the event to toggle expand/contract.
To hide a preconfigured set of secondary events, from the right click menu select Hide
Some Secondary Type. See below: About Specifying which secondary events to show or
hide.
An example of a secondary event represented with icons is shown in the following image.
The icon appears in the associated events title button.
30-July-2013 | Page 86 of 336

About Specifying which secondary events to show or hide

To specify which secondary events to show or hide, open the Event Types to Show or Hide
dialog box by clicking Select Secondaries to hide.
Primary Event in Play and Other Primary Events: In the List, there is a distinct display filtering
setting for the Secondary events of the OnAir/OnLine Primary event only (does not apply for
30-July-2013 | Page 87 of 336

preview played events), and for the Secondary events of the other Primary events (not
playing).
The activation of these 2 secondary events display filtering is configurable per List (in multilogin mode).
These options are available only when configuring Select Secondaries to Hide from a
transmission list (Resources>View List> "select a playlist list").
They do not appear for a playlist that is being created (File>Open Playlist> "select a
playlist list").
Configure the Secondary events to hide :
per Sec criteria (sAV, sGPI, ****, ),
per ID criteria (Extended Ids managed),
and per Type criteria (P, T, S, A, R,).
It is possible to combine these criteria. For instance :
Hide any Comment with blank type, but show any Comment with R or P type.
Hide any sAV (whatever the ID and Type is).
Hide any sAV with ID LOGO, and show all other sAV.
Show any sKEY or sTRANSKEY .
The Displayed Sec. Event & Hidden Sec. Events mode allow users to hide the Secondary
event per Event Type. It avoids having to configure keys if only this mode is used.
The Available Hide Sec. Keys & Hide Sec. Keys mode allows users to use the keys
configured in the key library through Properties ribbon tab > Hide Secondary Event keys
(
) function. For configuration details see Properties: Hide Secondary Event Keys.
NOTE: Both modes can be used together but attention must be taken not to use contradictory
hiding conditions.
(Single-Server logon) Select Secondary Events to Show/Hide

1. To specify which secondary events to show or hide, open the Event Types to Show or Hide
2. Select a Secondary event in the Displayed or Hidden area and choose arrows to move it to
the opposite area.
Single arrows (<, >) move individual items.
Double arrows (<<, >>) will move all items.
Some hidden Secondary events are transcoded for a more readable display in Custom
Column of the Primary event line.
3. Click OK. When a primary event goes to air, the specified secondary event(s) assigned to the
primary event are hidden.
30-July-2013 | Page 88 of 336

(Multi-Server logon) Select Secondary Events to Show/Hide for a Primary Event

in Play
The activation of these 2 secondary events display filtering is configurable per List (in multi-login
mode).
1. To specify which secondary events to show or hide, open the Event Types to Show or Hide
2. Select the target Primary Event (Primary Event in Play). The dialog is now active for that
selection.
the opposite area.
4. Click OK. When a primary event goes to air, the specified secondary event(s) assigned to the
primary event are hidden.
(Multi-Server logon) Select Secondary Events to Show/Hide for all Primary

Events
1. Select the target Primary Event (Other Primary Events). The dialog is now active for that
selection.
the opposite area.
3. Click OK. The specified secondary event(s) assigned to all primary events in the schedule are
hidden. (An icon indicates the presence of hidden secondary events.)
Revising the Primary Event

When Revising the corresponding field of the Primary event (for example: Format, Scrambling,
Logo, 5+1, and Pattern), a graphic edition allows user to modify the corresponding hidden
Secondary event, by choosing in a list of pre-defined values.
In the List, there is a distinct display filtering setting for the Secondary events of the
OnAir/OnLine Primary event only (does not apply for preview played events), and for the
Secondary events of the other Primary events (not playing).
30-July-2013 | Page 89 of 336

Note: The following image is provided for reference only. The colors and window
style are used to enhance readability. It is a representation only, illustrating this
type of revision. Your screen may look different.
Managing Trigger Events

ADC v12.19 and higher support a software solution for triggering one list by another via primary
events only. These triggers allow all of the same functions available via the GPI inputs- all of the
control panel functions plus 'Skip to next N'. Also, it is possible to issue a ganged command, and
to issue triggers across connected Device Servers.
Note: This software trigger list Linking functionality only applies to playlists. Media, GMT,
Compile and Record lists do not need to be linked to each other or playlists.
Reference Note: This functionality provides an alternative to the GPI method. Historically, in
order to have one playlist control the start of another playlist on ADC a sGPI output is used on
the Master playist to send a GPI trigger to the Slave playist(s)' GPI Input. The Slave playlists are
then configured to accept a 'Contact Start'.
Function Configuration:
For details on configuring Trigger events see section Configuring List Types>Configuring
Transmission List Options in the ADC Device Server v12.19 and ConfigManager Install and Ops
Reference.
Setting the Trigger Column parameter

In Air Client v4.19 and higher a Trigger column is available in a playlist. This column provides a
drop-down combo box list of selectable parameters:
No Action (Default)
Play to Next
30-July-2013 | Page 90 of 336

Cut Next
Freeze
Hold
Play
Play Secondar
Ready
Roll
Run
Skip
Skip to Next
Note: This functionality applies to primary events only. All secondary events default to No
Action and do not allow any other command to be selected via drop-down combo-box.
Example: Trigger column Drop-down combo-box with action types.
Colors for Action events:

Events with non-blank actions are displayed in different foreground and background colors.
These colors are chosen by the user (right-click on transmission list - Colors menu).
Default colors are:
Foreground (clBlack)
Background (clMoneyGreen).
30-July-2013 | Page 91 of 336

Displaying list caption with the name of Master list:

A playlist keeps information about the list which it is currently triggered by. This data (the exact
list name) is used in the caption of a Transmission List in Air Client.
If a transmission list can be triggered by another list, it shows the name of the Master list in
the caption of the transmission window.
If the list isnt triggered by any other list, the caption of transmission window doesnt differ
from previous versions.
Known Issues in Air Client and Device Server

A new command was added to list commands which requests the name of the Master list to
display it in the Transmission windows caption. When an Air Client v4.19 sends this command
several times to an earlier Device Server (pre 12.19), the Device Server will never reply to it and
so Air Client interprets thus as a lost connection with the Device Server. To avoid this
connection lost scenario, when Air Client v4.19 sends this command once and doesnt receive
a reply, it stops sending the command to the Device Server.
Manage the Operation Log

The Air Client Operation Log tracks the operation activity within the Air Client and is recorded in
binary, and text formats. The text file and the binary file are both created when the Operation
Log is enabled (i.e. The option Enable operation log is checked (enabled) under the Properties
ribbon tab option Operation Log.)
The binary Operation Log is written in descending order by time. The text Operation Log is
written in ascending order by time.
The Days To Keep configuration is only active for the binary Operation Log. The text
Operation Logs are kept until they are manually deleted.
Along with the binary version, the Text file version is automatically created and saved in the
Operation Log Directory specified under Properties > Operation Log.
The binary log can be opened and viewed from within Air Client. The text Operation Log can
be opened with any Text Editor, (Notepad, WordPad, Word, etc.).
The length of the operation log directory name is limited to a maximum 256 characters.
Attempts to save an Operation Log file with a longer name display the following warning
message: 'The Directory for Operation Log file is too Long, Please adjust to a shorter one'.
30-July-2013 | Page 92 of 336

To Open the Operation Log in Air Client

1. From the File ribbon tab select the Open Operation Log (
) option.
2. From the browse dialog, navigate to and select the operation log to open.
3. Click OK to open. The Operation Log (binary version) is displayed in its own window.
To Save the Operation Log as a Textfile in Air Client

1. From the File ribbon tab select Open Operation Log (
).
2. From the Open Operation Log window, navigate to and select the operation log to open.
3. Click OK to open. The Operation Log (binary version) is displayed in its own window.
4. From the File ribbon tab select Save Operation Log as text (
).
5. In the Save Operation Log as text window:
Accept the default file name or - if desired- specify a new file name.
Accept the default path or - if desired - specify a new location to save the file.
6. Click Save to write the log file to a text file.

This textfile can be copied to other locations as required. Use a standard ASCII editor, such
as NotePad, to or view the file. (For details see To Export the Textfile Operation Log.)
To Export the Textfile Operation Log

The Air Client text format Operation Log can be exported as required. This allows the log to be
read outside the ADC system.
1. Manually navigate to the Operation Log Directory that is specified under the Properties
ribbon tab option Operation Log (
).
2. Copy the desired .txt format Operation Log to a target location.

3. The operator can forward the text Operation Log and/or open it for viewing using any Text
Editor, (Notepad, WordPad, Word, etc.):
30-July-2013 | Page 93 of 336

Using Air Protect

Air Protect is an option for the Harris Broadcast Automation system. When properly configured,
if a problem occurs with an event that resides on both a primary playout device and a backup
"protect" device, then the air protect option could be used.
To Use Air Protect

To use this option when a noticeable problem is occurring with an event that is protected:
1. Click on the Air Protect button on the OCP hardware control panel, or click Protect on the
Software Control Panel.
2. If the next cued item needs to be switched to the protect device instead/also, then right
click on the transmission list and select Air Protect in the Play List Options menu.
This causes the protect device to go to air instead of the primary device when the event
plays.
To Check Switcher Control

This is typically used as a troubleshooting/engineering tool to check switcher control from the
Air Client software. Any switcher or router that is connected to the device server can be
remotely selected and controlled with a control panel.
CAUTION: Special attention during the use of this feature. This panel could override what
crosspoint is currently switched to Air.
1. From the Quick Access Ribbon tab, select the Switcher Control Panel icon (
Standard group. The Choose Switcher dialog is displayed.
) from the
2. Select a switcher for the Switcher list and then click OK. A switcher panel for the selected
device is displayed.
30-July-2013 | Page 94 of 336

3. Press the Switch button on the switcher panel. This causes the selected Input to be switched
to the Output setting.
Reviewing Tally status information in the

AsRun log text file
The Tally feature allows a report in the List (and corresponding Zoom window) GUI, and in its
AsRun log on a given Air Client station a corresponding Tally information.
Example:
A typical application example of this feature is a system with List Redundancy feature: E.g. For a
given TV channel, the Master transmission list and the slave transmission list are playing in
parallel (mirrored and synchronized).
In normal situation the Master transmission list is ON AIR (= broadcasted), and the slave
transmission list is ON LINE.
If a problem occurs on the Master transmission list (automation or device problem), the
Slave transmission list is manually switched On Air by the operator through a change-over
(or another way).
In that situation the previously Master list is ON LINE, and the previously Slave list is ON AIR.
The change-over (or any other switching device) which allows to put 1 of the 2 redundant
Transmission Lists ON AIR provides a tally signal indicating which one (Master or Slave) is On
Air.
On the Air Client station, the Tally signal(s) information is (are) received through one (or
several) GPI board(s) by the Air client application.
30-July-2013 | Page 95 of 336

Tally: On Air / On Line status and color for the playing event(s)
of the list
Tally status display in the Transmission List & Zoom window GUI
The Air client can uses the Tally information of a given List to display an On Air / On Line
status and color for the playing event(s) of the corresponding transmission list(s) and zoom
window(s).
If a Tally is configured for a given List, and if it is seen as On Air according to the Tally
configuration, then the On Air color and ON AIR status are used in the List and its Zoom
window,
The On Line color and ON LINE status are used in the List and its Zoom window, if it is seen
as On Line according to the Tally configuration.
The Secondary events of the On Air / On Line Primary event (first playing event of the List),
use the On Air / On Line color and status (depending of the Tally status of the List).
Primary events in preview play use the On Air / On Line color (depending of the Tally
status of the List), but have a PLAY status.
If no Tally is configured for a given List, then the On Air color and PLAY status are used in
the List and its Zoom window for playing events.
On Air Transmission list & its Zoom window (On Air color and status used for playing
events) :
The following image is provided for reference only. The colors and window style are used to
enhance readability. Your display will look different.
30-July-2013 | Page 96 of 336

On Line Transmission list & its Zoom window (On Line color and status used for playing
events):
The following image is provided for reference. The colors and window style are used to enhance
readability. Your display will look different.
Log format
If this option is activated on the Air Client, and for the AsRun log configuration of a given
transmission list, the AsRun log text file indicates on a specific line each change in the
OnAir/OnLine status (Tally information associated with a specific transmission list).
The Tally information is logged in a specific line:
ON-AIR DATE/TIME ID
-------- ----------- ----------- -03/04/10 03:00:00.00 TALLY
TITLE
-----------IS:ONAIR
03/04/10 22:30:10.00 TALLY
CHANGE:ONLINE
03/04/10 22:31:00.00 TALLY
CHANGE:ONAIR
The corresponding line contains :
the date and time of the Tally status change,
30-July-2013 | Page 97 of 336

the information TALLY in the ID field,

the information CHANGE:ONAIR or CHANGE:ONLINE (corresponding to the new status after
a change is detected) in the Title field.
To avoid having to scan previous log files to know the Tally status of a given one, when the daily
AsRun log file is created (at a configurable time of the day), the current Tally status is logged in
the first line.
The corresponding first line contains :
the date and time of the Tally status change,

the information TALLY in the ID field,
the information IS:ONAIR or IS:ONLINE (As this is not corresponding to a change of the Tally
status).
Extended Play Mix/Wipes Early

The ability to play mix/wipes early allows dissolves (mixes) or wipes to be done between the
source that is currently on-air and the next source. Events that include a mix or wipe transition
are required to roll several frames early to allow the events to overlap.
Typical uses are to dissolve between VTRs inside an LMS, or when going from a station promo to
a station ID. These promos and Station IDs always have extended vision on the videotape, i.e.
the actual vision on the videotape have a longer duration, than what is shown in the Database.
Configuration NOTE: This feature is configured in the Configuration Manager, List Options >
Mix/Wipe tab. For configuration details reference the ADC Device Server and Configuration
Manager v12 Installation and Operations Reference : section Configuring List Types >
Configuring Transmission List Options.
When properly configured, playlist timing can be automatically maintained by playing an event
with a transition for an extended duration, so that it finishes at its scheduled time, leaving the
list timing unchanged. The event is played early to provide overlap for the transition, but
compensates for the changed playlist time by playing the event for an extended time, which is
equal to the mix or wipe transition duration.
With a standard Cut transition events are played back-to-back and the list keeps its timing.
However, using Extended Play there are three options:
Extend Old: When configured for this option, the On-Air event is extended to provide
overlap material for the transition (e.g. Dissolve or Mix). The list timing is maintained.
Extend New: When configured for this option, the Next event is played early and for an
extended duration. The list timing is maintained.
Extend Both: When configured for this option, the On-Air event is extended by the effect
duration, the incoming event is played early by the effect duration, and the new event is
extended by the effect duration.
30-July-2013 | Page 98 of 336

NOTE: Extend Both is not fully implemented as described above, because currently the playlist
always plays early by the full transition duration.
Example: Automatic Duration Update on the Playlist

This example applies to Extend New Play Mix/Wipes, and illustrates Automatic Duration
Update on the playlist from extended play mix/wipes.
Before the events are CUED, the playlist looks similar to the following.
Once the Events are Cued:

The incoming (New) event is extended when it is CUED
If an event has a MIX on it, and Extend New has been selected, the duration of the NEW
event is automatically increased in the Play List by the duration of the transition. (i.e. If the
duration of the event was 20 seconds and the transition (mix) has a duration of S (Slow =
60 frames = 2 seconds using NTSC), then the Play List duration for that event is
automatically changed to 22 seconds.
30-July-2013 | Page 99 of 336

Displaying AFD and BarData Values in a

Playlist
The NEXIO Native IP driver can control ARC (Aspect Ratio Conversion) override using Secondary
Events to trigger the ARC on the NEXIO Port.
Air Client can be set up to display the AFD data. Real AFD of media, which is stored in the
Database and transmitted to the Device Server (Driver) via the AFD column.
The BarData parameter is implemented as an option in MoreInfo Builder. Bar data defines
the extent of the image within the coded frame.
Note: For more information see Appendix F: About AFD Codes.
Create an AFD column in the PlayList

1. Configuring Video ARC Override by Stream in the Config Tool.
Note: For information on configuring the Video ARC Override by stream see ADC Device
Server v12.14 and Config Tool Installation Reference: section Configuring Devices using
Configuration Manager > Video Disk Configuration (General) > To Configure a NEXIO Video
Disk (NEXIO Native Driver).
2. In Air Client: go to the PlayList window, right-click and choose Columns
3. Click Add... and configure a new column as shown in the following picture.
4. Highlight the new column entry in the Available columns list pane and click > to move it to
the Displayed columns list pane. Use the Up / Down buttons to place it in the desired order
position.
30-July-2013 | Page 100 of 336

5. Click the OK button and ensure the new column is added to the Playlist. This column will
display the AFD value.
6. In Revise mode can be selected different values from the dropdown list:
To Display BarData Values in a Playlist

Add an MI Additional Field
1. From Air Clients Properties ribbon tab select MI Additional Fields (
Fields Configuration dialog is displayed.
). The Additional
30-July-2013 | Page 101 of 336

2. Click Add
3. In the More Info Field dialog use the dropdown lists to select the following:
The Database (i.e. ASDB) in which the Table and Field reside.
The Table (i.e. ASEXT) in which the Field resides.
The Field (i.e. BarData). A field with the name "BarData" must exist in the Database.
4. From the Configured fields pane select the newly entered field (i.e. BarData) and then click >
to move the selection to the Used fields pane.
30-July-2013 | Page 102 of 336

5. When finished select OK.
Add the New Column to a Playlist

1. In Air Client: go to the Playlist window, right-click and choose Columns. The Column setting
2. Click Add... button. The Column Name dialog is displayed.

3. In the Column Name dialog, enter a name for the new column which will be used to set the
BarData value after AFD, and then click OK.
4. Select the new column in the Available columns list and click Edit... button.
5. Choose Additional API BData from drop-down list in the column settings dialog, set
Property values to Datasource: DS_API and Datafield:Bar Data, then click OK.
30-July-2013 | Page 103 of 336

6. Highlight the new column entry (i.e. BData) in the Available columns list pane and click > to
move it to the Displayed columns list pane. Use the Up / Down buttons to place it in the
desired order position.
7. Click the OK button and ensure the new column (i.e. BData) is added to the PlayList. This
column will display the BarData value in text form.
H - means the Horizontal (letterbox)
V means the Vertical (pillarbox)
First digit is the line number of end of left or top bar.
Second digit is the line number of start of right or bottom bar.
If in the database there is no BarData for the event, the cell will be empty.
8. The Revise mode values must be entered in the same format:
30-July-2013 | Page 104 of 336

Implementing ID Video ARC Override

The New AFD value provides support for implementing ID Video ARC Override. The NEXIO
Native IP driver can control ARC (Aspect Ratio Conversion) override using Secondary Events to
trigger the ARC on the NEXIO Port.
Create a Custom AFD Override column in the PlayList

1. Configuring Video ARC Override by Stream in the Config Tool.
Note: For information on configuring the Video ARC Override by stream see ADC Device
Server v12.14 and Config Tool Installation Reference: section Configuring Devices using
Configuration Manager > Video Disk Configuration (General) > To Configure a NEXIO Video
Disk (NEXIO Native Driver).
2. In Air Client: go to the PlayList window, right-click and choose Columns
3. Click Add... button
4. Enter a name for the new column which will be used to set desired AFD value after ARC, and
then click OK.
30-July-2013 | Page 105 of 336

5. Select new column in the Available columns list and click Edit... button
6. Choose Additional API New AFD from drop-down list in the column settings dialog, and
then click OK.
7. Move new column from Available columns list to the Displayed columns list and place it to
desired position.
30-July-2013 | Page 106 of 336

8. Click the OK button and ensure new column is added to PlayList.
Manage AFD Override in a Playlist

1. Create an event in the Playlist with an ID taken from the NEXIO storage. Ensure that event is
displayed blue.
2. Choose the Desired Conversion
Determine what is the direction of Aspect Ratio Conversion that you are going to apply
basing on the Aspect Ratio of the ID and Aspect Ratio of the NEXIO stream:
16:9 to 4:3 or
4:3 to 16:9
Revise the event and select desired AFD for the video output after conversion. Take into
account the following correspondence between AFD values and values available in
configured custom column drop-down list:
Table 1. Conversion from 4:3 to 16:9.
30-July-2013 | Page 107 of 336

Desired AFD after conversion
Value from corresponding custom column

in Playlist
0100
16:9CF-16:9 Wide
1001
16:9CF-4:3 PillarBox
1010
16:9CF-16:9 NoCrop
1011
Table 2. Conversion from 16:9 to 4:3.

Desired AFD after conversion
Value from corresponding custom column

in Playlist
0100
4:3CF-16:9 Wide
1000
4:3CF-16:9 Full
1010
4:3CF-16:9 NoCrop
1011
3. Play the list and check results
Thread and play the list.
Look to the output video from corresponding NEXIO port and ensure that video is
formatted according to desired AFD.
4. (Optional) Try another conversion
Unthread the list.
Revise the event and set another desired AFD value in the configured custom column.
30-July-2013 | Page 108 of 336

Thread and play the list.
Look to the output video from corresponding NEXIO port and ensure that video is
formatted according to desired AFD.
Using the Zoom Window

The Zoom Window option will show a view of the currently running event, the next event to run,
and the next missing event on the transmission list. When the Zoom Window is opened in the
Air Client, there are time code values in the status bar at the bottom of that window that can be
double-clicked and displayed in separate re-sizable windows.
To launch the Zoom Window

1. Ensure an active Transmission List or a playlist is loaded.
2. From the Quick Access ribbon tab select Zoom Window (
). The Zoom Windows is
displayed for that list showing the currently running event, the next event to run, and the
next missing event on the Transmission List.
Zoom Window status bar
Device Server Time: Shows the Device Server time of day adjusted by the appropriate offset.
The specified offset is shown in the next time field.
Drop Frame/No Drop Frame. DF and NDF represent drop frame status for a broadcast
facility. For example: When drop frame is on, DF displays in the status bar. When drop frame
is off, NDF displays in the status bar.
30-July-2013 | Page 109 of 336

Source Clock Settings T/P/S: Indicates the specified type of clock input connected to the
system: (SMPTE timecode, Video Sync, or the Device Servers internal PC clock). The
displayed Source type changes to reflect the connected input: PC (P), Sync (S), Time Code
(T).
Timezone Offset: The amount of time (in HH:MM) that the Master Time must be delayed
(Or advanced) to account for time zone differences. When configured and set to a list, the
Time Zone is displayed in the title bar of it List window, and of its Zoom window. The time
zone offset is added to the time value of each event in the List.
Duration of the playing event. Duration is displayed in the format hh:mm:ss.ff, where
hh=hours, mm=minutes, ss=seconds and ff=frames.
Played time of the playing event (counting up from 00:00:00:00)

Current Timecode of the playing event (counting up from the SOM)
N/Q/O: Time to Next (N), Audible Time to Next (Q), or Hardstart (O) event.
N (AN/AUN): Time to Next provides a countdown through all sequential pre-recorded

events until the next N is seen in the list mostly used for countback to live news
segments.
Q (AQ/AUQ): Audible Time to Next provides an audible countdown starting 30 seconds

from a commercial break into the next live event. To minimize affect on existing
functionality N (Time to Next) is automatically set and hidden from an operator when
letter Q is entered.
Note: After the Audible Time To Next checkbox option is enabled in the List Options, it
is necessary to close and re-open the list windows in the client for the feature to work.
(Re-loading the lists is not necessary.)
O (AO/AUO): On-Time/Override Also known as a hard start, time trigger, or absolute,

this event will play based on a time of day entered into the time of day field
**Caution: An incorrect time of day value will cause incorrect playback.
(L)ong or (S)hort. The playlist is running Long or Short and this is the gap or overlap time to
the next Hard Start.
If the list is running Long in duration to the hardstart event, the list will cut out of any
playing event and start playing the hardstart event at the scheduled start time.
If the playlist is running Short in duration to the hardstart event, the list will stop and
wait until the hardstart events scheduled start time.
Expandable Windows
Double clicking on the fields indicated below will launch expandable windows. These windows
can be resized as required. The can be individually closed, but will all close when the Zoom
Window is closed.
30-July-2013 | Page 110 of 336

In order of appearance these expandable windows are:
TC Timecode Window: Shows the Device Server time of day adjusted by the appropriate
offset. The specified offset is shown in the next time field.
Duration Window: Starting from zero and counting down, this window shows the remaining
duration of the current on-air event.
Played Window: Starting from zero and counting up, this window shows the amount of time
played in the current on-air event.
Current TC Window: Starting from the events SOM and counting up, this window shows the
real time code of the current on-air event. The time value displayed in this window can be
used should an operator need to break away and then rejoin the event in the same place.
Time to Next Window: Starting from zero and counting down, this window shows the time
until the Time to Next (N), Audible Time to Next (Q), or Hardstart (O) event.
N (AN/AUN): Time to Next provides a countdown through all sequential pre-recorded

events until the next N is seen in the list mostly used for countback to live news
segments
Q (AQ/AUQ): Audible Time to Next provides an audible countdown starting 30 seconds

from a commercial break into the next live event. To minimize affect on existing
functionality N (Time to Next) is automatically set and hidden from an operator when
letter Q is entered.
O (AO/AUO): On-Time/Override Also known as a hard start, time trigger, or absolute,

this event will play based on a time of day entered into the time of day field
**Caution: An incorrect time of day value will cause incorrect playback.
Long/Short Window: When a Hardstart (O) event has been set in a Transmission List, this
window shows the currently playing event is Long (L) or Short (S) by the displayed amount.
30-July-2013 | Page 111 of 336

Long means that the currently playing event is scheduled to end xx amount of time after
the Hardstart is scheduled to start. This means the currently playing event will be
truncated by the displayed amount.
Short means that the currently playing event is scheduled to end xx amount of time
before the Hardstart is scheduled to start. This means the currently playing event will
end the displayed amount before the Hardstart begins.
With Air Client v4.18 and higher the long/short indication at the bottom of the list
window is emphasized; the background of this field is changed to red, and the font is
slightly larger and bolded when a long/short situation is on the list.
This is illustrated in the following image:
Using SyncSkip
SyncSkip provides synchronous payout of commercials across multiple lists. This command is
initiated via the Software or Hardware control panel in Air Client and sent to the Device Server.
Note. If the current event is frozen and the SyncSkip button is pressed, SyncSkip action is
performed with all necessary calculations.
Transmission list and As-Run Log: SyncSkipped events are shown as SYNCSKIPPED in the
Transmission List and As-Run Log.
Software Control Panel: When the SyncSkip button on Air Clients Software control panel is
pressed, the SyncSkip command is sent to Device Server where all operations to handle this
command are performed. The decision as to which command is finally applied, Skip or
SyncSkip, is taken by Device Server. Air Client isnt aware of this.
Hardware Control Panel: By default this SyncSkip command occupies button 12 (right button
in the second row) on Air Clients H/W control panel, but its position can be changed via
H/W control panel setting in Air Client:
SyncSkip & GPI Triggers: The GPI Input Configuration in the Config Tool allows GPI triggers to
be configured to support the SyncSkip command. When set up, if an appropriate GPI signal
is received and the SyncSkip command is chosen, the SyncSkip list action is performed.
SyncSkip & List Redundancy: Since List Redundancy is used to synchronize lists and to keep
the up-to-date copy of Master list, it also supports the SyncSkip command.
About the SyncSkip command

The SyncSkip command concept is that the next event with a designated sequential Seg #
becomes equal to the remaining part of the current event. Since each of these events represent
30-July-2013 | Page 112 of 336

the entire program, the SOM of the next event is shifted to the EOM point of the current event
and the DUR of the next event is made equal to the remaining DUR of the current event.
Events characteristics before and after SyncSkip

Elapsed and remaining duration are taken at the point when the SyncSkip command is sent, so
preroll is taken into account because after a Skip is performed the event finishes playing during
preroll of the next event.
Required Conditions
The SyncSkip action can be performed for primary events (Single Spot or Multi-Segment events)
only if the following conditions are satisfied.
The current playing event:
Is AN (time-to-next).
Has a non-blank segment number in the segment column.
The next event down the list within the lookahead meets the following requirements:
The same ID as the current playing event.
Is the same type: AN
Has a non-blank segment number. Segment numbers must be sequential (i.e. 1, 2, 3)
If using Multisegments, segments must be sequential and ingested with the same SOM and
full Duration of the entire show.
If any of the above conditions are not met, this command is replaced with simple Skip.
NOTE. Each of two events for SyncSkip (current and next) should represent the same entire
program, with the same DUR and SOM, i.e. there should be 2 identical events in the
transmission list.
Example Operation
In the following example event Demo0017 occurs six times in the list and each occurrence of the
event is followed by two 30 second spots (in this example Demo0018 and Demo0019).
All occurrences of Demo0017 are validated to have the same SOM and DUR.
The next three occurrences of Demo0017 are set as AN events and are listed sequentially in
the Seg column: 1, 2, 3. (line 10, line 13, and line 16).
The first three occurrences of Demo0017 are each set as an AN event and are listed
sequentially in the Seg column: 1, 2, 3. (line 1, line 4, and line 7).
1. Set up the playlist to meet the SyncSkip requirements.
30-July-2013 | Page 113 of 336

2. Run the playlist.
3. Suppose that Demo0017 (Seg 1) has played ~ 00:00:29.00 and at this moment the SyncSkip
command was sent (i.e. The SyncSkip button was pressed on the Software Control Panel).
List preroll is 3 seconds. After the SyncSkip command the list will look something like this:
4. Suppose that Demo0017 (Seg 2 on line 3) has played ~ 00:02:02.00 and at this moment the
SyncSkip command was sent (i.e. The SyncSkip button was pressed on the Software Control
Panel). List preroll is 3 seconds. After the SyncSkip command the list will look something like
this:
30-July-2013 | Page 114 of 336

5. Suppose that Demo0017 (Seg 3 on line 5) is playing and the SyncSkip was sent. (i.e. The
SyncSkip button was pressed on the Software Control Panel)
The system notes that the next occurrence of Demo0017 (Seg 1 on line 10) is not
sequential with Demo0017 (Seg 3 on line 5). This means the SkipSync action is invalid
and instead it is treated as a Skip action.
On reaching the first occurrence of Demo0017 (Seg 1 on line 10) the SyncSkip action will
become a valid action for that grouping.
Example good and bad lists

The following are examples of good and bad lists.
Good list:
30-July-2013 | Page 115 of 336

Bad list (IDs dont match):
Bad list (event are not segmented):
Bad list (there is no second AN event down the list within lookahead):
30-July-2013 | Page 116 of 336

30-July-2013 | Page 117 of 336

Playlist Editing Operations

To Open an Existing Playlist
Use play list windows to create and edit play lists.
1. From the File ribbon tab select the Open Play List icon (
).
2. Select the play list file you wish to open and view.
3. Once the play list file is open, the file can be checked for accuracy, changes can be made,
etc.
Saving a Play List File

1. Select a play list file or the On Air transmission list to save.
2. From the File ribbon tab select the:
30-July-2013 | Page 118 of 336

Save Play List icon (

), to save the Play List to the current file name. This will
overwrite if filename exists already OR
Save Play list As icon (

), to save the Play List to a different file name. A file type
can be selected prior to saving.
3. In the Save Playlist dialog, type in a new file name or accept the existing file name.
4. Select Save.
Inserting Primary Events

Primary events, such as programs and commercials, constitute the majority of a play lists
events. They may be accompanied by secondary events, and transition effects.
Events can be inserted into a play list using two methods:
Manually. You can type event data directly into a play list.
Move events to the play list. You can move records from the database or spots from a
device storage window directly into a play list, via drag-and-drop or copy-and-paste.
Limitation: Do not use the same ID between different record types (i.e. single spot and multisegment event).
30-July-2013 | Page 119 of 336

To Insert a Primary Event

1. Position cursor on the list where you want to insert a new event.
) or press the <INS>
2. From the Events ribbon tab select the Insert Primary icon (
button on the keyboard. (A new Primary event is inserted above the cursor.)
3. The cursor will be in Revise Mode. Type in the ID in the ID column. Below is an example of
an event in Revise mode.
When an ID is entered, it is checked against its record in the database. If the ID is not found,
the remaining fields are checked and their values may be changed or left as is according to
list options configured in the Environment dialog box.
4. If the record is in the database, the fields will fill in with data when getting out of Revise
Mode.
5. Repeat these steps for additional primary events.
6. When finished inserting primary events, exit Revise mode. To exit Revise mode press
<Alt+R> or from the Events ribbon tab select the Cancel icon (
).
NOTE: When Insert Primary is selected again while still in Revise Mode the new primary event is
placed below the cursor. This speeds up the process of building a play list file or block of events
on a transmission list.
Inserting Multi-Segment Events

When inserting an event with multiple segments as defined in the database, you must specify
which segment to insert by entering its number in the Segment field. If you do not enter a
segment number, the Select Segment dialog box opens and displays all segments of the multisegment event.
Limitation: Do not use the same ID between different record types (i.e. single spot and multisegment event).
To Insert a Segment
1. Click a segment in the Select Segment dialog box, and then click OK to insert it into the play
list.
30-July-2013 | Page 120 of 336

2. Make changes to event info if necessary.

3. When finished, exit Revise Mode. To exit Revise mode press <Alt+R> or from the Events
ribbon tab select the Cancel icon (
).
About Display Sequence Gaps

Although ADC automatically numbers segments sequentially there are scenarios, such as
secondary recording, that can create multi segment records with non-sequential segment
numbering (i.e. gaps in the sequence). Air Client displays such a gap properly, including all of the
segments with the correct information from the database.
Media Client Note: Media Client allows and preserves multi-segment records that have nonsequential segment numbering (i.e. where there is a gap in the number sequence), although it is
not intended that such records would be created within the Media Client prep form.
Managing Duplicate Single Spot and Multi Segment IDs

If duplicate Single Spot and Multi Segment IDs appear in the Database, the operator can choose
which to insert on a Transmission List.
1. When a duplicate ID (e.g. ID 00011) is inserted onto a New, Edit, or Transmission List, on
exiting Revise Mode the Select Segment dialog is displayed.
2. Perform one of the following actions as required for the operation. Select Segment dialog:
Choose Click on Single Spot to get the Single Spot Database Record.
Highlight the desired Segment number, and then click OK to get that Segment's
Database Record.
30-July-2013 | Page 121 of 336

Highlight the entire record, (Multi Seg), and then click OK to get the entire Multi
Segment Database Record.
Insert Secondary Events

Secondary events are inserted using the Insert Secondary option in the Events
ribbon tab. Secondary events run in along with the primary event that precedes it.
For a list of secondary events see: Appendix B > Secondary Events.
IMPORTANT: ADC Air Client operators can attach up to 49 secondary events to a primary event
within the ADC Transmission List. This value is critical to know for users who utilize hard start
events within their ADC Transmission List. The logic within the ADC Transmission List requires
the next hard start event to occur within the next 50 events.
To Insert a Secondary Event

1. Launch a playlist to view.
2. Select an event on the playlist
) or press the <Shift +
3. From the Events ribbon tab select the Insert Secondary icon (
Insert> key in the keyboard. The Secondary Events Directory is launched.
When inserting a secondary event in a play list, Air Client switches to Revise mode, allowing
you to edit field data for the event.
You can also click an existing event and manually enable Revise mode to edit the existing ID
or info in the event fields. To enter Revise mode press <Alt+R> or from the Events ribbon
tab select the Revise icon (
).
4. Select the Secondary Events to insert into the playlist.
30-July-2013 | Page 122 of 336

NOTE: The configuration parameters of some secondary events can be edited. For details on
configuring these events see Configuring an Editable Secondary Event.
Audio/Video: This function will insert a Secondary Audio/Video event into the list. It is
used to air effects with the primary, like keys and or audio over mixes.
When inserting a new secondary audio/video event in a playlist, play (P) and thread (T),
but not auto (A), are entered into the Type field. Switching is not used for this event.
The event can be used to produce the audio/video over for a key/ audio over input to a
master control switcher or as an audio/video breakaway.
An A/V event may be run to switch the switcher. To do this, enter an A, instead of a P or
T, in the Type field. The secondary event will begin with an audio-follow video
transition. You may also add a transition effect.
Backtimed A/V: Same as a regular Sec. Audio/Video event, but the on-air time is the
amount of time before the primary event that this event will begin.
In the event Type field, these events are inserted with types P and T (but not A). No
switching is done on these events, unless this is changed. These events can be used as a
key/audio over inputs to a master control switcher.
It is possible to associate a switching event with a back timed event. To do this, change
the Type field to A. This event starts with an audio-follow-video transition. You may also
add a transition effect.
NOTE: Backtimed events cannot be run after up-counting events.
GPI Contact: Inserts a GPI Contact Closure to a device that initiates a switch. The GPI
Contact will play with the corresponding Primary Event at the same time, regardless of
value of Time. The event will display as played at the primary event time, although the
actual GPI contact will close at the exact time.
For details on configuring this secondary event see Configuring an Editable Secondary
Event: To Configure a GPI Contact.
Backtimed GPI: Similar to a standard GPI event, except that the offset is measured
backwards in time from the start of the associated primary event.
For example, a backtimed GPI event with an offset of 5 seconds fires the GPI contact 5
seconds before the start of the associated primary event. A backtimed GPI event cannot
be attached to an event following a primary upcount event. In this case, the system
would not be able to calculate when to begin the GPI event.
NOTE: Backtimed GPI events cannot be attached to an upcount event.
Event: To Configure a Backtimed GPI Contact.
Keyer On/Off: This allows you to define a secondary Keyer event in which a hole is cut in
the associated primary events video output and is then filled with the output of the
Keyer source.
Event: To Configure a Keyer On/Off.
30-July-2013 | Page 123 of 336

Transition Key: Similar to a Keyer On/Off event except, the key is brought up at the start
of the associated primary event with the same transition type (i.e. brought up with a
fade up, cut, wipe etc.).
Event: To Configure a Transition Key.
Audio Over On/Off: This is used to add another audio source over the primary
audio/video source. The audio over source may replace the primary audio source or be
mixed with it.
NOTE: This event is only performed if the primary events A/V Data is configured to use a
Master Control Switcher.
Event: To Configure an Audio Over On/Off.
Transition Audio Over: Similar to a standard Audio Over event except that it is brought
up with the primary event and corresponding transition type.
Event: To Configure a Transition Audio Over.
Break: This is inserted at a point in the list where you would like the list to stop running;
events will play out normally up to this event. The first event after the break line will cue
up, but will not play out, and the program switches to black.
To restart the list [after the break line], press Roll or Play on the control panel.
This list may also begin if a GPI contact input is used or if preroll is initiated on a
hard start event that is next on the list.
Comment: Used to enter Notes into the playlist. Any text may be inserted into the title
field of a comment. Comment event lines are ignored during transmission. However,
they do add events to the list size. You can enter text in the title field up to sixteen
characters.
Compile ID: Used to attach a title to the head of a compilation list (i.e. It is used to label
a compilation list with an ID). It has no effect on the playlist and is ignored during
transmission.
Data Event: This type of secondary event is associated with a device, but does not
generate any video output. Instead, the action specified by the event is performed at
the time the event would be put on air (i.e. the time entered in the on-air [or Time]
column), had the event been associated with a video device.
Typically used with video disk servers, a data event is used to control and automate the
deletion of spots from the server. The use of this event with video disk servers requires
an accurate scheduler or traffic program. If the events are not used carefully, spots may
be accidentally deleted in the video disk server. Secondary data events are used to
command serial devices requiring a simple command that does not need to run a
countdown on the time of an event.
This type of secondary event attaches to a primary event that plays at the time the
command is sent to the device to execute the data event command. The primary event
can be any primary event for any device. The command is sent to the device whose
device ID matches the event ID.
30-July-2013 | Page 124 of 336

For example, the commands for the video disk server are entered in the secondary
events title.
The command, Delete From Disk, is entered as DEL:XXXXXXXX:YY. Xs represent the

spot ID and Ys represent the optional port value.
The command, Get From Archive, is entered as GFA:XXXXXXXX:YY.
The command, Delete From Archive, is entered as DFA:XXXXXXXX:YY.
NOTE: This secondary event may work differently on each devicerefer to user notes for
details on this option.
Barter Spot: Used for reconciliation with the traffic system. A barter spot is a source of
audio/video that is part of another audio/video source. It is not played as separate
audio/video, but is treated as a comment that is passed to the AsRun log and to the
reconciliation process. This event is attached to the primary event. When the primary
event finishes running it is logged to the AsRun log.
Attached to a program segment that has barter spots in it [network, natl]., these events
appear in the text AsRun log as Barter in the status field. In the enterprise log, they
appear as BTR in the program type field. The appearance of the spots in the logs does
not positively indicate the spots have run. If the primary event runs, the spots are
logged; however, the spots may not have actually been on the primary material.
Record Switcher: This is a secondary event that performs extra switching for inputs.
During a recording, this switches to the source denoted in the secondary events Title
field. This name must also be in the source name table for the switcher that is supplying
the video to the record device.
The event is only performed if the primary events device has the A/V data parameters
configured to specify the switcher number that has the matching name in its source
name table.
NOTE: The proper configurations must be set before this function can perform as
dictated.
Switcher Audio Crosspoint: This is a secondary event that performs extra audio
switching for outputs. It allows routing audio to a different destination.
Switcher Crosspoint: This is a secondary event that performs extra switching for
outputs. It allows routing a program from one list to a different destination. While an
event plays, this function switches to the secondary events source:destination.
This type of secondary event allows the control of multiple crosspoints during one
primary event. The name of the new source:destination is entered in the title field. Use
the format SRC, DEST where SRC is the name of the source and DEST, the destination.
You may enter a maximum of 16 characters for the title and the name you enter must
also be defined in the switchers device parameter field for Source Name and/or
Destination Name for the switcher that is controlling the output for the primary event.
This type of event requires that the primary device have the specified switcher device
configured for its switching information. If the secondary event does not specify the
source (title =, DEST), the input crosspoint must be specified in the primary events
device for the secondary event to default the destination.
30-July-2013 | Page 125 of 336

For example, in the Title field, put source and destination desired (separated by a
comma or space) i.e.Sat1, TelcoThe program airing from Sat1 will be routed to Telco.
This must be configured first in the Device Parameters and not have the same crosspoint
as the air source.
Secondary Record: Allows for the automated recording and segmenting of live program
material, for immediate or future playback to air. Unlike most record events, this event
type is used in lists that combine record and playback activities. A secondary record
event is attached to each primary event that is being recorded. It functions only in lists
that combine record and playback material.
Break Sync: Break sync contains an estimated time of day a pod will run, a deviation
time and a time for a window of opportunity for the operator to react to the event.
This event is normally used on a list that contains only pods/breaks of commercials. The
pods are separated by either an upcount event or by this Break sync event. The pods are
triggered to run by an external contact closure (GPI) or by clicking Play on the control
panel. In normal operation, a contact closure/play button is detected and the next pod
on the list is played. The break sync event is marked DONE immediately. The pod plays
out until either an upcount event, break sync event or the end of the list is encountered.
If the next pod has not played by the time of day specified on its break sync event, plus
its deviation, the automation sends out a user notification to all automation clients. The
event then waits for the opportunity time for a client to respond to the notification. If
no response is received at the end of this time, the automation marks each event in the
pod and the break sync event as being missed. It stops marking events as missed when it
encounters an upcounting event or break sync event. If the list was running an upcount
event, that event is skipped and the next upcount event runs.
During the time the automation is waiting when the break sync occurs, the user
notification is sent to all clients. One or more clients are enabled to detect the user
notification. The enabled clients display a dialog box prompting the operator to click OK
to Delete Pod and Keep Pod.
The dialog box is displayed only during the waiting time and automatically closes if the
operator does not respond. This is the equivalent to clicking OK to Delete Pod since the
list on the server times out and mark the pod missed.
If the operator clicks Keep Pod, a message is sent back to the server causing the server
to mark the break sync event as done, but leaves the pod intact waiting for the contact
closure/play button. There is no other user notification for this pod.
If the contact closure/play button does not occur, the time of day for the break sync
event for the next pod may occur. To eliminate a potential problem, the next break sync
event is used to mark the previous pod missed. This occurs automatically at the time of
day of the next break sync event minus its deviation time. When this occurs, all events
before this event are marked missed. If the automation had been running an upcount
event, then this upcounter and the next up-counter before this break sync event are
terminated before this event runs.
Secondary System: Used to allow the sharing of resources between lists.

This event allows the traffic system to schedule device (resource) assignment during the
execution of a transmission list. Like all secondary events, this type of event is attached
30-July-2013 | Page 126 of 336

to a primary event. When this event type is run, it is able to move unowned device
heads to the list that is running this event or release device heads in order to make
them available to another list. It is up to the traffic department to schedule the
assignment and release of heads so that two lists will not conflict in their usage of these
heads.
This event is programmed by filling in the time, ID and title fields of the event with
control information. The time field controls the time when the event will run offset from
the primary event. The following event IDs act as commands to the list:
Assign: Will assign the device and head(s) specified in the title field to the
transmission list the event is located in. The title format is: DEVICENAME,X[,Y]
Where,
DEVICENAME is the device name (5 characters) that is assigned to the device,
X is the head number assigned to the list
[,Y] is the number of other heads to be assigned.
Release: Removes the device and head(s) specified in the event title field from the
transmission list the event is located in and returns it back to the system as an
unowned device head. The title format is identical to the above described.
Protect: Performs a protect assignment on the device and head(s) to the device
specified in the type field. The title format is: PROTECTNAME,DEVICENAME,X[,Y]
Where,
PROTECTNAME is the name of the device that is to be protected.
DEVICENAME is the device name (5 characters) that is assigned to the device.
X is the head number assigned to the list.
Y is the number of other heads to be assigned.
NOTE: You must first have assigned the primary device heads to the list before
assigning the protect heads.
Space Character: A space character may be substituted for the comma in any of
the title field commands.
Backtimed System: Works in the same manner as secondary system except that this
event type runs prior to the primary event by the time specified in the Time field.
External: Use an External secondary event to send commands or other information to a

device through a device server. This event acts as a secondary A/V event with the
capability of sending commands or other information to a specific device on the device
server. When inserting this secondary event, use the text editor to enter the commands.
Event: To Configure an External Secondary Event.
Data Event with Data: Use this event to send commands and other information to a
specific device on the device server. When inserting this secondary event, use the text
editor to enter the commands. The commands are sent to the device whose device ID
matches the event ID.
30-July-2013 | Page 127 of 336

Event: To Configure a Data Event with Data.
5. When finished click OK. The secondary event is placed above the cursor in the play list.
Configuring an Editable Secondary Event

The configuration parameters of some secondary events can be edited. When inserting an
editable secondary event, a dialog box allows you to configure its attributes and settings.
Editable secondary events include GPI Contact, Back Timed GPI, Keyer On/Off, Transition Key,
Audio Over On/Off, Transition Audio Over, External and Data Event with Data.
To Configure a GPI Contact

This procedure configures a GPI Contact Closure secondary event that has been inserted into the
list.
IMPORTANT: The GPI event controls the contact closure on a GPI card. The Air Client workstation
must have the optional GPI card. For more information about GPI and switch-only device
configuration, reference the Device Server Operations and Installation documentation.
Note: The GPI Contact will play with the corresponding Primary Event at the same time,
regardless of value of Time. The event will display as played at the primary event time,
although the actual GPI contact will close at the exact time.
1. To open the associated dialog box of an editable secondary GPI event already in a playlist,
click the events number, and then from the Events ribbon tab select Edit Secondary icon
(
). The Secondary GPI dialog is opened.
2. Set the following parameters for each event:
ID: Specify the ID of the secondary event (e.g. GPI). If required, click the Browse button
() to locate.
On Time (offset): An offset indicates how long after the start of the primary event the
contact closure should occur. The offset is entered in the events on-air field.
30-July-2013 | Page 128 of 336

Duration: The duration value sets the duration of the pulse or length of closure of the
contact. The duration is entered in the events DUR field.
The GPI closure may be longer than the associated primary event.
3. When finished click OK.
To Configure a Backtimed GPI Contact

This procedure configures a Backtimed GPI Contact Closure secondary event that has been
inserted into the list. Backtimed GPI is similar to a standard GPI event, except that the offset is
measured backwards in time from the start of the associated primary event.
1. To open the associated dialog box of an editable secondary Backtimed GPI event already in
a playlist, click the events number, and then from the Events ribbon tab select Edit
Secondary icon (
). The Backtimed GPI dialog is opened.
ID: In the playlist, a switch-only devices ID must be entered in the secondary events ID
field. If required, click the Browse button () to locate.
Back Time (offset): An offset indicates how long before the start of the primary event
the contact closure should occur. The offset is entered in the events on-air field.
Duration: Enter the length of time the GPI contact is closed. This value can exceed the
duration of the primary event. The duration is entered in the events DUR field.
To Configure a Keyer On/Off

This procedure configures a Keyer On/Off secondary event that has been inserted into the list.
This option allows you to define a secondary Keyer event in which a hole is cut in the associated
primary events video output and is filled with the output of the Keyer source.
1. To open the associated dialog box of an editable secondary key event already in a playlist,
click the events number, and then from the Events ribbon tab select Edit Secondary icon
(
). The Key Event dialog is opened.
30-July-2013 | Page 129 of 336


NOTE: The task performed by the key depends on the capabilities of the device you are using.
This function will only be performed if the primary events A/V Switching data is configured
to use a Master Control Switcher.
Modifier: This parameter specifies how the key source is outlined. The options are
normal, shadow, drop shadow and border.
Source: The key fills source. When self is selected, the fill input both cuts and fills the
hole. When external is selected, the key input cuts the hole and fill input fills it in. When
chroma is selected, the key is determined by the colors of the background video.
Matte: When selected, fill input is replaced by a matte source. The matte source color is
determined by the mixer controls.
Key Hold: When selected, this option will keep the keyer on through subsequent
primary transitions.
On Time: This will determine the start time of the keyer event. This option determines
how long after the start of the primary event the key is overlaid. The value must be
greater than 1.5 seconds or the key will arrive late.
NOTE: This secondary event behaves identically to the Transition Audio Over and
Transition Keyer secondary events when the value for the On Time field is blank or
00:00:00.00.
30-July-2013 | Page 130 of 336

Duration: Determines the length of time the key is overlaid. Do not specify a keyer
event to turn off during the next events preroll, as mixers are not equipped to carry out
both actions concurrently. In order to have the key last as long as the primary event,
make the duration field blank.
The duration of the keyer event can either be blank, or specified as equal or greater
than to:
the duration of the primary minus the secondary's (normal) offset.
the duration of the primary plus the secondary's back timed offset.
the duration of the secondary's end-timed offset.
The keyer can be removed by the End Key Hold function.
Speed and Effect: The speed option determines the speed of the transition effect. You
may also set which type of effect will run between events by using the icons located
above the time fields. Effect options are cut, mix, wipe, fade fade, cut fade and fade cut.
Key: Specifies which key source to use. Do not specify a keyer event to turn off during
the next events preroll, as mixers are not equipped to carry out both actions
concurrently. Also, it is not possible to have two transitions overlapping in time.
However, you can associate two keys with the same event as long as you set their 'on
time' and duration so they do not overlap.
To Configure a Transition Key

A Transition Key is similar to a Keyer On/Off event except, the key is brought up at the start of
the associated primary event with the same transition type (i.e. brought up with a fade up, cut,
wipe etc.).
1. To open the associated dialog box of an editable secondary event already in a playlist, click
the events number, and then from the Events ribbon tab select Edit Secondary icon (
).
30-July-2013 | Page 131 of 336

2. This type of secondary event has a configuration dialog box similar to Keyer On/Off;
For the transition key, the value of the offset cannot be set.
It is possible to define a transition key event so it will last as long as the primary event.
To do this, make the duration field blank.
If the key hold option is on, the key is held over the transition in the same way as an
ordinary secondary keyer event.
To Configure an Audio Over On/Off

Audio Over On/Off is used to add another audio source over the primary audio/video source. It
can be set with a percentage over ratio (For example, if set to 100%, it will completely replace
the primary events audio.)
NOTE: The event is only performed if the primary events A/V Data is configured to use a Master
Control Switcher.
1. To open the associated dialog box of an editable secondary audio over event already in a
playlist, click the events number, and then from the Events ribbon tab select Edit
Secondary icon (
). The Audio Over dialog is opened.
30-July-2013 | Page 132 of 336

Audio Over: The number of the audio input line on the mixer.
Ratio: The ratio of over audio source to primary source audio, ranging from 0 (all
primary sources) to 99 (all audio over source).
Speed and Effect: The Speed option determines the speed of the transition effect. You
next to the time fields. Transition effect options are cut, mix, wipe, fade fade, cut fade
and fade cut.
On Time: This determines the start position of the event and how long after the start of
the primary event the audio is overlaid. The value must be greater than 1.5 seconds or
the event arrives late; however, you may use the transition.
NOTE: This secondary event behaves identically to the Transition Audio Over and
Transition Keyer secondary events when the value for the On Time field is blank or
00:00:00.00.
Duration: Determines the length of time the event is overlaid.

NOTE: To have the secondary audio event end at the same time as its primary event,
To Configure a Transition Audio Over

Transition Audio Over is similar to a standard Audio Over event except that it is brought up with
the primary event and corresponding transition type. It allows specification of a secondary audio
event to coincide with the primary event in the same manner as a transition keyer event.
1. To open the associated dialog box of an editable secondary Transition Audio Over event
already in a playlist, click the events number, and then from the Events ribbon tab select
Edit Secondary icon (
). The Transition Audio Over dialog is opened.
30-July-2013 | Page 133 of 336

2. The Transition Audio Over dialog options are identical to that of the audio over on/off
secondary event, except that the ontime option is missing (the ontime for a transition audio
over event is 0).
Audio Over: The number of the audio input line on the mixer.
Ratio: The ratio of over audio source to primary source audio, ranging from 0 (all
primary sources) to 99 (all audio over source).
Speed and Effect: The Speed option determines the speed of the transition effect. You
next to the time fields. Transition effect options are cut, mix, wipe, fade fade, cut fade
and fade cut.
Duration: Determines the length of time the event is overlaid.

NOTE: To have the secondary audio event end at the same time as its primary event,
Ontime: The ontime for a transition audio over event is 0.
To Configure an External Secondary Event

Use an External secondary event to send commands or other information to a device through a
device server. This event acts as a secondary A/V event with the capability of sending commands
or other information to a specific device on the device server.
1. When this secondary event is inserted into a list, the Secondary External Event Text Editor
dialog box opens that prompts for the data to send to a device. Normally this box is a text
editor window, but if there is a special .dll file for the device, this may vary.
30-July-2013 | Page 134 of 336

2. In the text editor, enter the data to send to a device on the network.
3. When finished click OK. Air Client inserts a line in the playlist or transmission window and
enters into Revise mode. vDT is inserted in the Sec field.
4. When finished, exit Revise mode. To exit Revise mode on the list, press <ALT + R> or from
the Events ribbon tab select the Cancel icon (
).
To Configure a Data Event with Data

A Data Event with Data secondary event is used to send commands and other information to a
specific device on the device server. When inserting this secondary event, use the text editor to
enter the commands.
1. When this secondary event is inserted into a list, a text editor dialog box opens that prompts
for the data to send to a device.
30-July-2013 | Page 135 of 336

2. In the text editor, enter the data to send to a device on the network.
3. When finished click OK. Air Client inserts a line in the playlist or transmission window and
enters into Revise mode. sDAT is inserted in the Sec field.
4. When finished, exit Revise mode. To exit Revise mode on the list, press <ALT + R> or from
the Events ribbon tab select the Cancel icon (
).
The time in the time field is the offset from the preroll of the associated primary event. At
the offset time, the commands are sent to the device whose device ID matches the event ID.
Manage Back-Timed Events

It is possible to create a back-timed event by editing the event type instead of having to replace
the event with a back-timed event. This is accomplished by placing a < feature in the event
type field to create a back-timed event.
Event Type Field Syntax

StartEventEndTimed
= PT >
MatchPrimaryDuration = PT =
StartEventBackTimed = PT <
A > feature in the event type field creates an end-timed event.
It is recommend to stop using backtime event types (Like: bGPI, bAV, etc) and instead use the
normal events (sGPI, sAV) with the backtime modifier (PT <).
These events are available on the translator as ExtendedEventControl := [tStartEventEndTimed]
or [tStartEventBacktimed]
30-July-2013 | Page 136 of 336

Secondary Events that can be Back-Timed

The following Lists which secondary events can be back-timed by enabling the
StartEventBackTimed bit in the event control field.
Data Events can be run back-timed. When run back-timed they are run at the offset
value before the first frame of the primary they are attached to.
Transition events (KEY and AUDIO OVER) always run at pre-roll of the primary.
Keyer, Audio Over, Combined Audio/Video with Audio Over or Key, Record Switcher,
and Source Switcher Events cannot be back-timed. While it might seem that there are
uses for this, these events require using the primary event to handle switching, and the
primary event may not be threaded at the time these events are run. Without having a
primary device threaded there is no way to establish the audio/video output path to
apply the switch to. There may also be a conflict with using the Master Control
switcher during the transition of the actual primary.
EVENT TYPE
ALLOWED
Break Event (Stops List)
no
Logo Event (Equivalent to Break Event)
no
Audio/Video Event
YES
Back-timed Audio/Video Event
no
GPI Event
YES
Back-timed GPI Event
no
Keyer On/Off
no
Transition Keyer On/Off
no
Audio Over On/Off
no
Transition Audio Over On/Off
no
Combined Audio/Video with Audio Over
no
Combined Audio/Video with Key
no
BreakSync Event (custom feature)
no
Data Event
YES
System Event
YES
Back-Timed System Event
no
Record Switcher Event
no
Source Switcher Event
no
Record Device Event (for recording live events)
no
30-July-2013 | Page 137 of 336

EVENT TYPE
ALLOWED
Comment Event
no
Compile ID
no
Barter Spot
no
For a reference of secondary events see: Appendix B: Secondary Events.
To Specify PT Event Type syntax

1. Open a list.
2. Highlight a primary event
3. Insert a target secondary event (See above Secondary Events that can be Back-Timed.)
Or
Select an existing secondary event. (See above Secondary Events that can be Back-Timed.)
4. Enter Revise Mode
5. Specify Type as the desired Event Type syntax (PT > , PT = , PT <)
6. Exit Revise Mode.
Manage End-Timed Events

End-timed means offset from the end of the primary event.
Secondary events can be end-timed by enabling the StartEventEndTimed bit in the

event control field.
Secondary events can be started at an offset from the end of the primary event (end-timed).
This is accomplished by placing a > feature in the event type field to create an end-timed
event.
Event Type Field Syntax

StartEventEndTimed
= PT >
MatchPrimaryDuration = PT =
StartEventBackTimed = PT <
A < feature in the event type field creates a back-timed event.
These events are available on the translator as ExtendedEventControl := [tStartEventEndTimed]
or [tStartEventBacktimed]
30-July-2013 | Page 138 of 336

When Enabling a Key

End-timed events can be used to enable a key on the last 20 seconds of program material. Since
the exact program segments length may not be known by traffic at the time the schedule is
made, an end-timed event allows traffic to accurately bring the key on for the last 20 seconds.
When Event Duration Matches the Offset

When using end-timed offset events whose duration matches the offset, such as an Audio Over
device that runs 20 seconds from the end for 20 seconds, there are two ways to specify this
event.
Put 20 seconds in for the duration for the event, or
Use any arbitrary duration, but enable the MatchPrimaryDuration bit in the event
control field.
Secondary Events that can be End-Timed

The following table lists which secondary events can be end-timed by enabling the
StartEventEndTimed bit in the event control field.
Transition events (KEY and AUDIO OVER) always run at pre-roll of the primary.
End-timed events following UpCounter events are not supported.
EVENT TYPE
ALLOWED
Break Event (Stops List)
no
Logo Event (Equivalent to Break Event)
no
Audio/Video Event
YES
Back-timed Audio/Video Event
no
GPI Event
YES
Back-timed GPI Event
no
Keyer On/Off
YES
Transition Keyer On/Off
no
Audio Over On/Off
YES
Transition Audio Over On/Off
no
Combined Audio/Video with Audio Over
YES
Combined Audio/Video with Key
YES
BreakSync Event (custom feature)
no
Data Event
YES
System Event
YES
30-July-2013 | Page 139 of 336

EVENT TYPE
ALLOWED
BackTimed System Event
no
Record Switcher Event
YES
Source Switcher Event
YES
Record Device Event (for recording live events)
no
Comment Event
no
Compile ID
no
Barter Spot
no
To Specify PT Event Type syntax

1. Open a list.
2. Highlight a primary event
3. Insert a target secondary event (See above Secondary Events that can be End-Timed.)
Or
Select an existing secondary event. (See above Secondary Events that can be End-Timed.)
4. Enter Revise Mode
5. Specify Type as the desired Event Type syntax (PT > , PT = , PT <)
6. Exit Revise Mode.
Enable a List Freeze

ADC offers the ability to freeze on the last frame of a videodisk clip before a live (generally a
promo, or a specific buffer event) in order to wait if the journalist is not ready on time and make
the switching to the live manually on the MCS.
Option 1: Using a secondary Backtimed System event (bSYS)

1. For a List with a Preroll of 2 seconds, if a Freeze is required on the last frame of a Profile clip
before a live break: (Your display may look different.)
2. Attach a Backtimed System event (bSYS) to the Live event to freeze: (Your display may look
different.)
30-July-2013 | Page 140 of 336

3. Increase the Duration of Profile clip (Demo0001) before the news break (STUDIO1 switch
only) to 5 seconds to ensure the preroll of STUDIO1 will not have started when the freeze
event plays.
4. Set the Backtimed offset of the freeze event to play on frame 00:00:09.17 after the
beginning of Demo0001. This to effectively address the device latency involved with
executing the freeze (7 frames) 00:00:09.24 (i.e. the last frame).
The result is: (Your display may look different.)
5. Once the list is frozen, the operator switches manually the MCS to the live source.
Option 2: Using a Secondary System event (sSYS)

1. If a Freeze is required on the last frame of a Profile clip before a live break, attach a
Secondary System event (sSYS) to the event to freeze:
2. The result is: (Your display may look different.)
3. Once the list is frozen, the operator switches manually the MCS to the live source.
Enable a Data Event (sDAT)

A Data Event is a type of secondary event that is associated with a device, but does not generate
any video output. Instead, the action specified by the event is performed at the time the event
would be put on air, had the event been associated with a video device.
For video disk servers, a data event is used to control and automate the deletion of spots from
the server. The use of this event with video disk servers requires an accurate scheduler or traffic
program. If the events are not used carefully, spots may be accidentally deleted in the video disk
30-July-2013 | Page 141 of 336

server. Secondary data events are Secondary Events used to command serial devices requiring a
simple command that does not need to run a countdown on the time of an event.
Note: This secondary event may work differently based on the device being used.
For a list of secondary events see: Appendix B: Secondary Events.
Data Event Commands

This type of secondary event attaches to a primary event that plays at the time the command is
sent to the device to execute the data event command.
The primary event can be any primary event for any device.
The command is sent to the device whose device ID matches the event ID. As an example,
the commands for the video disk server are entered in the secondary events title.
These events are executed at preroll time of the primary event. Since these commands are
performed instantly no heads are threaded and the disk status does not change (unless the
disk goes BUSY for a moment).
The event is marked done if ADC sends the command to the disk. The event is marked
missed if ADC cannot execute the command for any reason.
The ID of the secondary data event must match the ID MATCH NAME of the disk port to
perform the action. Multiple Secondary Data Events may be placed on a single primary
event.
While many of these functions are not implemented on many disk systems, the following
functions have been implemented:
Local Disk System Commands
Delete: DEL:AnID or D:AnID

Delete Protect: PRO:AnID or P:AnID
Delete UnProtect: UNP:AnID or U:AnID
Archive System Commands
Get From Archive: GFA:AnID:TapeID or G:AnID:TapeID

Delete From Archive: DFA:AnID:TapeID
Send To Archive: STA:AnID:TapeID or S:AnID:TapeID
Network or Fiber Channel System Commands
Delete From System: DFS:AnID

Move or Copy To Disk: MOV:AnID:#1:#2 or M:AnID:#1:#2:#3:#4 or C:AnID:#1:#2:#3:#4
Delete From Disk: DFN:AnID:#1
Abort Disk Transfer: ANC:AnID:#1:#2 or A:AnID:#1:#2:#3:#4 or T:AnID:#1:#2:#3:#4
Command Parameter descriptions:

30-July-2013 | Page 142 of 336

AnID is the ID to perform the function on.
TapeID is an optional parameter that is the Tape ID of the tape in the archive system that
this file should be operated on.
#1 is the source unit number of the source video disk in the networked disk system.
#2:#3:#4 are destination unit numbers configured for the networked disk system (only one
destination is required, but as many that will fit in the title field may be specified.
Add a Transition Effect

Transition effects can be added between events in a playlist. A master control switcher is
required to use transition effects. A transition effect is configurable according to type, speed,
key hold status and mixed audio/video and wipe effect qualifiers.
1. Open a Playlist and ensure Revise mode is off/disabled.
To exit Revise mode on the list, press <ALT + R> or from the Events ribbon tab select the
Cancel icon (
).
2. Select the event in a playlist to assign the transition to by clicking the event number of the
event.
3. From the Events ribbon tab select the Edit Transition Effects icon (
Effects dialog is displayed.
) The Transition
4. Configure the following options as required:
Transition Type: Select the type of effect to run between events by using the icons
located next to the time fields. Transition effect options are cut, mix, wipe, fade fade,
cut fade and fade cut.
30-July-2013 | Page 143 of 336

Transition Speed: Select the speed of the transition effect. Options are Slow, Medium,
Fast.
End Key Hold: Checking this box causes the transition of an event to remove any key
that was held by a previous keyer event.
#: Specify the qualifier for mixed audio/video and wipe effect. Qualifier values range
from 0 to 255 and are facility-dependent.
Cut, Copy, Paste Playlist Events

The following procedures outline basic Cut, Copy Paste operations that can be performed from a
Playlist.
To Cut an Event from a Playlist

1. Select event to be cut by clicking on event number on list that corresponds to current
location of event to be cut.
2. From the Edit ribbon tab select the Cut icon (

onto a clipboard in the software.
). The event is cut from the list and put
To Cut a Block of Events from a Playlist

1. Select the first event of a block to be cut by clicking an event number on list that
corresponds to current location of event to be cut.
2. Holding down the Shift key, use the mouse to select the last event of a contiguous block of
events. This causes a sequence of events to be highlighted.
3. From the Edit ribbon tab select the Cut icon (
and put onto a clipboard in the software.
). The block of events is cut from the list
To Copy an Event from a Playlist

1. Select event to be copied by clicking on event number on list that corresponds to current
location of event to be copied. (The event remains on the playlist or transmission list when
copy is chosen).
30-July-2013 | Page 144 of 336

2. From the Edit ribbon tab select the Copy icon (

the software.
). The event is copied onto a clipboard in
To Copy a Block of Events from a Playlist

1. Select the first event of a block to be copied by clicking an event number on list that
corresponds to current location of event to be copied.
3. From the Edit ribbon tab select the Copy icon (
list and put onto a clipboard in the software.
). The block of events is copied from the
To Paste Cut / Copied Event(s)

1. Copy an event line. For details see: See To Copy an Event from a Playlist.
2. Position the cursor on the play list where the event will be pasted.
3. From the Edit ribbon tab select the Paste icon (

the specified location.
). This pastes the event(s) into the list at
Copy/Paste Cells
A cell can be Copied / Pasted in the Air Client Play list form or Transmission list form.
1. Select the cell to be copied.
IMPORTANT: Cell copy is only permitted from three columns: Title, SOM, or DUR column.
2. Copy the Cell: From the main menu select Edit > Copy. The event is copied onto a clipboard
in the software.
3. Position the yellow cursor on the play list column where the event will be pasted.
IMPORTANT: The selected pasted cell must have the same column index as the copied cell.
(e.g. A cell cut or copied from the Title column can only be pasted in the Title column.)
4. From the main menu select Edit > Paste. This pastes the event(s) into the list at the specified
location.
30-July-2013 | Page 145 of 336

Clear / Delete Playlist Events

Use the following procedure to delete an event from a playlist.
1. Select an event to be deleted. Click the event number on the list that corresponds to current
location of event to be cut.
2. From the Edit ribbon tab select the Clear icon (

This deletes the event off of the list.
) or press <Delete> on the keyboard.
NOTE: This event is not placed on the clipboard. Once deleted it is gone.
To Clear a Block of Events from a Playlist

1. Select the first event of a block to be copied by clicking an event number on list that
corresponds to current location of event to be copied.
3. From the Edit ribbon tab select the Clear icon (
list and put onto a clipboard in the software.
). The block of events is cleared from the
NOTE: The events are not placed on the clipboard. Once deleted they are gone.
Moving Events within a List and Between

Lists
An operator can use drag- and-drop or Cut and Paste on the Edit ribbon tab to move (reorder)
events within a playlist, copy events between playlists, or copy events from a device storage
window or database window directly into a play list.
Edit Operation Notes
An event must be dragged by its event or spot number to move it to a playlist.
Drag and drop only works within the look ahead. You cannot drag an event from beyond the
look to within the look ahead.
When dragging-and-dropping, all secondary events associated with primary events are
moved with the primary event. This is not true when using cut and paste.
30-July-2013 | Page 146 of 336

Cut and Paste will work if an event is Beyond the look ahead and needs to be placed within
the look ahead.
Warning: Unless the List options is set to get around this, copy-and-paste should never be used
if you are using a traffic system that uses reconciliation because this will cause the event to
repeat the reconciliation key.
so consider omitting this warning.
Open the source List(s)

Open the list or lists to be used when moving events:
If moving events within a single playlist, open the playlist.

If moving between playlists, open the destination playlist, and the source playlists.
If moving from other windows to a playlist, open the destination playlist, and the source
windows (device storage window and/or database window)
To Drag-and-Drop a Single Event

1. Select the event to be dragged. Click the event number on the list that corresponds to
current location of event to be cut and continue to hold down on the mouse button.
2. Drag up or down to the location the event will be dropped. (note stay in the event column)
3. Position yellow cursor on the play list where the event will be dropped.
4. Release the mouse button to drop the selected event above the cursor.
Dragging and dropping within one window is effectively a cut and paste
Dragging and dropping from one window to another is a copy, paste
To Drag-and-Drop Multiple events

1. Press and hold the Shift key and click an event, then click-hold another event to select a
range.
2. Drag the selection to an event in the playlist before which you want to insert the selection.
The yellow cursor is positioned on the play list where the event will be dropped.
3. Release the mouse button to drop it. The events are inserted above the target location.
30-July-2013 | Page 147 of 336

Move Events using Copy / Paste

Warning: Copy-and-paste should never be used if you are using a traffic system that uses
reconciliation because this will cause the event to repeat the reconciliation key.
1. As an alternative to drag-and-drop, click an event, spot or record, or the range of, then from
the Edit ribbon tab select the Copy icon (
).
2. Click the event in a playlist after which you want to insert the selection, and then from the
Edit ribbon tab select the Paste icon (
).
Revise Playlist Event Field Text

Revise allows the operator to revise (edit) the text in a particular field of an event.
1. Position cursor on a specific event field.
2. From the Events ribbon tab select the Revise icon (
) or press <Alt+R> on the keyboard.
3. The Revise option is highlighted to indicate the client is in Revise Mode. Revise is also shown
at the top of the window. The cursor is now in Revise Mode ready to type.
4. Revise the event as needed. If Enter is pressed prior to getting out of Revise Mode the
database will be checked.
If the ID is not found, a warning message will appear. Click OK to continue
5. When finished exit Revise Mode. To exit Revise mode press <Alt+R> or from the Events
ribbon tab select the Cancel icon (
).
NOTE: If currently in Revise Mode Cancel can be used to put event back to what it was prior
revising the event. Cancel does not work if the operator already clicked off the revised event,
or the operator already got out of revise mode).
Clear Done Events

An event that is marked done can be dragged and dropped down the transmission list and then
re-activated so it can play on the list again.
1. Position the cursor on the event that is marked Done.
2. Drag and drop this event down the list to where it will need to re-air.
30-July-2013 | Page 148 of 336

3. With the cursor on the Done event that was dragged, right click on the playlist window and
from the popup menu select Clear Done Events.
Replace an Event ID
Replace allows operator to find and then replace the ID with a designated ID.
1. Position the cursor at the top of the list in the ID column.
2. From the Edit ribbon tab select the Replace (
) icon. The Replace ID dialog is displayed.
Find what field: Type in the ID to find. (e.g. Demo0001)
Replace with field: Type in the ID to replace with.
Match whole word only. Check to have search look for whole word matches.
Match case: Check to have search look only for entries that match the case (Upper or
Lower) for the entry specified in the Find what field.
Ignore secondary event: Check to ignore secondary events in "Find" operation. (When a
search in list is typically done, the result includes secondary events. If there is a
secondary event with the same ID, the user may not want to find it.)
Direction: Specify the search direction: Up the list or Down the list form the current
cursor position.
4. Select Find Next.

5. If the ID is in the database, an information box appears with the database info for the
replacement ID.
30-July-2013 | Page 149 of 336

6. Select OK to replace the found ID with the replacement ID.

7. (Repeat steps 5 6 until all records are found.)
NOTE: Replace All can be used to speed up the process. Ensure the replacement spot is not
already in a break with the ID being replaced. This will prevent the same spot to air back to
back.
Ripple Time
AutoRipple is the process of adjusting the time column to reflect the time of day each event will
play based on the duration of each event. As an event plays to air, the time field of the events
following down the list will adjust as necessary to reflect the approximate time of day they will
execute.
This is especially useful if the start time of an event is changed. Ripple time allows the start
times of the following events to be updated to reflect the adjusted time.
The exception to this scenario is if a hardstart is located on an event. A hardstart will not
allow the times to ripple past it and the events following may not reflect the correct time of
day they will actually play.
Due to this blocking of AutoRipple it may be necessary to ripple the times manually to keep
the list accurate to what time of day the events will play.
To Manually Ripple Times

1. Position cursor in a column of the event that the Ripple Time will be initiated from. Modify
the time as required and if necessary.
30-July-2013 | Page 150 of 336

2. From the Events ribbon tab select the Ripple Time icon (
keyboard.
) or press <Alt+M> on the
The time field ripples from the event the cursor is located on down to the next hard start or
the end of the list. Each successive event is offset by the duration of the previous primary
event.
NOTE: All events start times are changed until a hard start event is encountered. Hard start
events interrupt any preceding events whose times overlap its start time.
Checking if a List is Timed Out

Ripple time can be used between hard starts to check if the list is timed out between the hard
starts.
If Ripple Time is initiated on an event and a hard start is located on a future event an info
box appears if the events are running long or short to the future hard start.
The info box informs the operator if there is overlap (long) or gap (short) time to the next
hardstart.
Managing Pull Lists

The Pull List window lists all missing events in a play list. Missing media are events not located in
any of the devices assigned to the transmission list that the Pull List was generated from. Once
opened, the Pull List Window can be refreshed on demand (F5 key and Refresh function of its
contextual menu).
Review Missing Events using the Pull List Window

Use the following procedure to review missing events using the Pull List Window.
1. Ensure a list is open for viewing
2. From the Events ribbon tab select the Pull List icon (
). A Choose Order box appears.
3. Choose the order to display any found missing material.
30-July-2013 | Page 151 of 336

Event #: List entries in order as they appear on the playlist.
ID: List entries in sequential ID order, lowest to highest.
Box ID: List entries in sequential Box ID order: lowest to highest, numbers before letters.
Chronological: List all entries by time only as they would fall within a 24hour period.
(Not by Date/Time.)
4. Click OK. Any missing items appear on the Pull List.

Note: The Pull List displays a single entry for a multi-segment program ID. The total number
of segments in the list is displayed in the Occurrences column.
The event column designates the location of the missing event on the play list.
The TOD Time of day column is the time of day on the play list the event is scheduled to
play.
If the record is not in the database, the Comment column indicates this by a Not Made
comment.
The Occurrences column shows the number of times the event is scheduled on the play
list.
The SOM and Duration on the Air Client Pull List allow it to be used as a Dub List on the
Media Client.
The Segment number (01 to 99) field can be displayed.
The Title field will indicate if an ID is on a Storage Device or not and if it is in the
Database or not.
30-July-2013 | Page 152 of 336

About MultiSegment events

The Pull List displays a single entry for a multi-segment program ID. The total number of
segments in the list is displayed in the Occurrences column for that event.
Timezone in a Pull List

A Pull List requested for a List with a Time Zone configured will take in account the Time Zone in
the TOD column of the Pull List. The Time Zone name is displayed in the title bar of the Pull List
window (like for the List window), and the offset value in the status bar.
The following image is provided for reference. The colors are used to enhance readability. Your
display will look different.
GMT Pull Lists

The GMT Pull List option allows to list in the Pull List only the clips missing in the devices
assigned to the List and not in a GMT source device usable for this List. This helps operators
determine if the missing media is already loaded into a GMT source device if it is not on the Pull
List.
To use GMT Pull Lists select the Properties ribbon tab, click the Environment icon (
select the List Options tab, and check the option Use GMT Pull List option.
),
The Administrator or operator with security rights can enable the new GMT Pull List.
As with others options (e.g., Storage Options/ Display Free Disk space), a
confirm/warning dialog box is displayed to the operator when this feature is selected.
From this dialog the operator can:
30-July-2013 | Page 153 of 336

Click Ok to confirm and enable new option. This parameter is saved in the ini file of
the application so the selection is not lost when the Air Client is closed.
Click Cancel to invalidate option.
If Enabled (Checked), when the operator chooses Events>Pull List, the Pull List window is
displayed on top of the transmission window and a warning message appears (Job in
Progress) along the bottom of the Pull List window. Once complete, the warning message in
Pull List window disappears.
It is not listed in the Pull List result.
If Disabled (Unchecked), is it is listed in the Pull List result.
Show/Hide Columns in a Pull List

The ADC Air Client v4, Pull List utility allows the show/hide of columns on the Pull List display.
This option is similar in functionality to the Columns option of the playlist/transmission list.
1. Right click on the Pull List and from the right-click popup menu select Columns. The Column
setting dialog is displayed.
2. Use the Column setting dialog to specify which columns to show or hide.
3. Select a Column in the Available columns or Displayed columns area and choose arrows to
move it to the opposite area.
Single arrows (<, >) move individual columns
moves entry from Available pane to Show pane.
moves entry from Show pane to Available pane.
30-July-2013 | Page 154 of 336

Reset moves all columns to the Show pane.
Cancel aborts the operation and closed the Column Configuration dialog.
Help launches the application Help system.
4. Click OK. When the Pull List is displayed the columns shown will be as specified.
Add DBStatus Field as a Column

Any one Database field can be displayed in the DBStatus column of the Pull List Window.
Example:
For instance the status PAD / Not PAD (Ready for air / Not ready for air) could be displayed.
Configuration:
The following parameters of this additional column are configurable in the Air Client ini file.
These parameters are:
The column name (i.e.: Status)

The Database field to display, and the DB table concerned
The value to display if the clip is not found in DB (i.e.: Not Found).
The section corresponding to these parameters in the aclnt32.ini file is done manually (if the
feature is required, a Pull-List_Status.txt file to copy/paste and adapt will be provided).
For instance: [Pull List ColX]
Name=DB Status
DBField=ASEXT/Status
Default=Not filled
Recycle Bin Window

When the Air Client software user deletes one or several events from the Transmission list, if
the Link to Recycle Bin option of the Transmission list is checked, those events are written
into the RECYCLE.lst file. The Link to Recycle bin option is located in the "Security" tab of the
Playlist Options Menu (right click menu on transmission list).
This setting if enable is active for each list independently.

Multi-login to several device servers is managed (relative parameters saved in aclnt32.ini).
This RECYCLE.lst file is saved in the local directory of the Air Client application.
30-July-2013 | Page 155 of 336

Retrieve Deleted Events from the Recycle Bin Window

The Air Client software can retrieve the deleted events in the Recycle Bin window that displays
the Recycle.lst file.
This file saves the events deleted from a transmission as well as the cut events, in the case
where the user cuts some events but does not paste them, so those events could be lost.
When a primary event with hidden secondary events is cut or deleted from the list, the
primary and its relative secondary events are copied in the Recycle Bin.
Any new entry of a cut/deleted block is done at the top of the in the Recycle Bin.
The chronology of the action can be easily found.
At each modification of Recycle.lst file, the Recycle Bin window is updated. Possible
modifications include: the insertion of events in the Recycle.lst file and a purge on an
event.
To use the Recycle Bin

From the Tools ribbon tab select the Recycle Bin icon (
displayed with any contents.
). The Recycle Bin window is
To reuse the events of the Recycle Bin window in a transmission list or in a playlist, the
user can use a copy/paste or a drag&drop operation.
Clicking on a block header selects all the events of the bloc. This allows an easy and fast
selection before copy or drag-and-drop action.
Each cut or deleted event or block of events begins with a header that gives information
about the edition action made on this range. The header is a comment event giving the
following information:
In the Time field: The hour of the edition action.
In the ID field: The action done (DELETE / CUT) on the event(s) under the header.
30-July-2013 | Page 156 of 336

In the Title field: The Server name - the List name where the action was done - The
Date of the action.
About Configuring the Recycle Bin

To enable use of RECYCLE.lst
In normal operation the RECYCLE.lst file is not use as a standard play list, but through the
Recycle Bin feature. The administrator sets this option by:
1. Right click on an open playlist window and from the popup menu select Options This
opens the Options dialog box
2. From the Options dialog select Security tab and enable (check) Link to Recycle Bin option.
The access to the functions of this Security tab is granted to the System Configuration
permission only, from login.
To Configure Colors
The foreground and background colors of the Header comment event are configurable from
the Colors command of the pop-up menu that opens the standard configuration color of event
dialog box (it is also the case for Playlist and List).
1. Open the Recycle Bin window
2. Right click on the Recycle Bin Window and from the popup menu select Colors. The Select
Colors dialog is displayed.
3. Use this dialog to set Event Colors and select default colors. For details on using this dialog
see Configuring Event and Window Parameter Colors.
To Configure a Purge
To prevent the Recycle.lst file from becoming huge, a purge of the oldest part of the file can be
configured by the administrator.
NOTE: The access to the functions of this Security tab is granted to the System Configuration
permission only, from login.
1. Right click on the Recycle Bin Window and from the popup menu select Options. The
Recycle Bin Options dialog is displayed.
2. Use the Purge tab of the Recycle Bin Options dialog to configure purge operations for this
window.
30-July-2013 | Page 157 of 336

3. Configure the following parameters as required:
Start Of Day: Define the time of the triggering of the purge.
Hours To Keep: Specify which events, in the Recycle.lst file, will be kept or not.
4. When finished click OK. The events, which exist in the Recycle.lst file that are greater than
the defined hours, are deleted.
30-July-2013 | Page 158 of 336

Managing Resource Windows

Robust Database Search Window
Air Client allows for full database searches using the Robust Database Search Window. This
window allows an operator to search for and review records of existing spots and, if spot
information is already recorded in the database, to export the information to the playlist.
Search Pane
Search Results Pane
Show Details Pane
To Search for a Record

1. From the File Ribbon tab select Robust Database Search (
). This opens the Robust
Database Search window. Search Parameters are specified in the Find records Group box.
30-July-2013 | Page 159 of 336

Record types
Parameter Fields
Search Range
Search By Field
2. In the Find Records pane, specify the Record Types: Click the type of record(s) you to search
for. These settings are used to limit searches to records of certain types.
To include a record type in a search, select its checkbox. To exclude a record type from
a search, uncheck the box. The default is to include all record types (all boxes checked).
To include all listed record types in a search, click the All button.
To exclude all listed record types from a search, click the None button.
Available record Types: The record types available for inclusion or exclusion in a search are:
Single: A single spot record. A single spot has only one SOM and EOM.
Aspot: A master spot on a multi-spot library tape.
Bspot: A backup spot on a multi-spot library tape.
Multi-Seg: A multi-segment record. A multi-segment record can have multiple SOMs and
EOMs, whereas a single spot can have only one SOM and EOM.
Lib Box: (Tape only). The ID of a multi-spot record. The library box contains from 1 to 99
spots, with each spot containing its own unique material ID.
P-Arch: A record associating a primary archive cartridge numerical ID with an

alphanumeric archive ID.
B-Arch: A record associating a backup archive cartridge numerical ID with an

alphanumeric archive ID.
Disk: A record created in Louth TurboMedia for material residing on a video disk.
3. In the Find Records pane, select the Search By field type. This parameter determines on
which field a database search is based. The exception to this is Duplicates (see below).
The values for the Search By parameter may be any of the following:
Material ID. The ID of the spot.
Title. The title of the spot.
User Data. This parameter searches for the text in the User Data field of the spots
record that matches the text in the adjacent parameter field. Only 6 characters can be
30-July-2013 | Page 160 of 336

specified if you are using a standard database and 16 if you are using an extended
database.
Note: All clients connecting to the same Database and Device Server's in a facility should
be configured in the same mode (extended or non-extended).
Made On. Searches for spots that were created on the same date as specified in the
adjacent parameter field.
Played. Searches for spots played on the date specified, if the Air Client workstation that
played the spot is configured to record play dates. If it is not, you will not be able to find
the spot you are looking for by this parameter.
Purge On. Searches for spots that will be purged on the date specified.
Tape ID. Searches for text in three fieldsMedia ID, Box ID and Alternate IDthat
matches the text entered in the adjacent parameter field.
Duplicates. Searches for duplicate material IDs that exist for more than one type of spot
and displays them in the Search Results pane.
Note: When Duplicates, Purge On and Tape ID are specified as search parameters, all
records types are searched. Any settings you specified in the Record Types area are
ignored. For example, you cannot search for duplicate single spots only.
4. In the Parameter field next to the Search By field, enter all, or a segment of, the information
the property you specified above must contain.
5. In the Find Records pane, choose the Search Range. These search qualifiers determine how
specific the search is.
Two different Collation sets are currently being used with ADC SQL Servers. Your search
results depend on Collation set for which your Database is configured.
The following logical operators are available:

NOTE: When specifying a range of values, the value in the first parameter field must be less
than the value in the second parameter field or an error message displays. The hierarchical
search order of characters and numbers is: numbers come before capital letters and capital
letters come before lowercase letters. When specifying a range of dates, the first date
specified in the range must be earlier than the second.
Is. This operator only lists records that contain the exact value specified in the
Parameter field next to the Search Parameters button.
For example, if you click ID on the Search Qualifiers button and enter 12345 in the
Parameter field, only the spot whose ID number is 12345 appears in the Search Results
pane.
30-July-2013 | Page 161 of 336

Is between. When this operator is selected, an additional Parameter field appears next
to the Search Qualifiers button. The value entered in the Parameter field above it and
the value in this new field determine the range the value of the property you specified
in step three must be between.
For example, if you click ID on the Search Qualifiers button, enter 001 in the top
Parameter field and 003 in the bottom Parameter field, only the spot whose ID number
is 002 appears in the Search Results pane.
Is before. This operator lists records whose property value specified in the Parameter
field precedes the value of the property specified in the Search Parameters button.
For example, if you click ID on the Search Qualifiers button and enter 12345 in the
Parameter field, only spots whose ID number is less than 12345 appear in the Search
Results pane.
Is after. This operator lists records whose property value specified in the Parameter field
is greater than the value specified in the Search Parameters field.
For example, if you click ID on the Search Qualifiers button, enter 001 in the Parameter
field, only spots whose ID number is greater than 001 appear in the Search Results pane.
Is outside. This operator lists records whose property value specified in the Parameter
field is outside values specified in the Search Parameters field. The value entered in the
Parameter field above it and the value in this new field determine the range the value of
the property you specified in step three must be outside.
6. Once the search parameters are specified, click the Search button. The results are displayed
in the Search Results pane, located under the Find Records pane.
A Results Summary is displayed at the bottom left corner of the window. (Display colors
have been modified to enhance readability. Your display may appear different.)
7.
Found: # of records found that met search criteria.
Selected: # of IDs highlighted.
(Optional) Records can be sorted (ascending/descending order) by clicking on a column

header and property columns resized by dragging with the mouse.
Managing Search Results

The results of a database search are displayed in the Search Results pane.
Right Click Popup menu

A right click menu is available from the Search results pane to help manage search results.
30-July-2013 | Page 162 of 336

Option
Description
Copy
Copies the highlighted record
CopyAll
Copies all records in the Search Results pane.
Save As Text
Allows the user to save the highlighted records to a text file.
Print
Prints the highlighted records. A printer must be configured.
Print Notes
If this option is selectedthe checkmark indicates it is selectedand

Print is chosen, any notes associated with any selected record will also be
printed.
Show
Spots/Segments
This option will display more information about selected Multi-Segment

or Multi-Spot records. If one of these record types is selected when this
option is chosen, the spots or segments associated with that ID will be
displayed in a separate pop-up box.
Show
Spots/Segments
(no sorting)
<<This option is grayed out and currently unavailable.>>
Show Search
Panel
When these options are onas they are shown herethe database
window will display as it does on the previous page. If these options are
turned off, either the search panelthe panel including the search
parametersor the Details panelthe panel on the bottom of the
screen displaying the details of a selected recordwill disappear from
the screen allowing more records to be displayed in the search results
panel.
and
Show Details
Panel
To Review Record Details

Select / highlight a record in the search results pane. All available information on the selected
record is displayed in the Show Details pane located beneath the Search Results pane. Select the
desired tab to see various information related to the record. If multiple records are highlighted,
the fields of the last record clicked are displayed in the Database Parameter pane.
30-July-2013 | Page 163 of 336

To change the column width
The width of each column may be adjusted by passing the cursor over the right edge of the
column, and holding down the mouse button to drag the edge of the column when the
cursor resembles a crosshair .
To Resize Columns
If any particular record information, such as ID or title, is too wide to be displayed in a column,
the information is truncated and followed by ellipses (...). You can widen columns to show the
truncated information.
To widen a column:
1. Position the pointer over the right border of the column heading.
2. Drag the border to the right. If the total width of the columns exceeds that of the Search
Results pane, a scroll bar appears at the bottom of the pane, allowing you to scroll hidden
columns into view.
To Sort Records by Column

You can determine how records are sorted in the Search Results pane using their property
column header.
Click on a field's column heading to sort all the records displayed in the Search Results pane by
that field. The order of the sort follows the alphanumeric hierarchy: numbers come before
capital letters, and capital letters come before lowercase letters.
Each click on a header toggles sort in ascending or descending order. For example, if records are
listed in ascending order, clicking the ID column header sorts them in descending order.
30-July-2013 | Page 164 of 336

To Save As Text
Right-click on a selected record in the database search results pane, and then from the pop-up
menu select Save As Text.
Saves the output displayed in the Search Results pane as a data (.dat) file. Selecting this
command invokes a dialog which prompts the user for the filename to save as.
To Print
Right-click on a selected record in the database search results pane and from the pop-up menu
select Print.
Prints the output displayed in the Search Results pane. Selecting this command invokes a dialog
which allows the user to configure the print job.
Show Segments
This option is available for multi-segment only; it is grayed out for all other selections.
Right-click on a selected record in the database search results pane, and then from the pop-up
menu select Show Segments.
Opens a Segments Record dialog that displays segment information of a highlighted multisegment program display.
About Display Sequence Gaps

Although ADC automatically numbers segments sequentially there are scenarios, such as
secondary recording, that can create multi segment records with non-sequential segment
30-July-2013 | Page 165 of 336

numbering (i.e. gaps in the sequence). Air Client displays such a gap properly, including all of the
segments with the correct information from the database.
Media Client Note: Media Client allows and preserves multi-segment records that have nonsequential segment numbering (i.e. where there is a gap in the number sequence), although it is
not intended that such records would be created within the Media Client prep form.
Showing More Records

There are two options available: [Show Search Panel] and [Show Details Panel]. Both are for
expanding display area of search result panel.
Disable Show Search Panel

Right-click on the database search results pane, and then from the pop-up menu disable
(uncheck) Show Search Panel. This action hides the Find Records tab pane. Hiding the Find
Records tab pane expands the Search Results pane, allowing more records to be viewed at one
time.
To re-enable the display of this area, right-click on the database search results pane, and then
from the pop-up menu enable (check) Show Search Panel.
Disable Show Details Panel

Right-click on the database search results pane, and then from the pop-up menu disable
(uncheck) Show Details Panel. This action hides the area displaying additional information of
the highlighted record and the Find Records Material, Media, and Notes tab panes. Hiding this
area expands the Search Results pane, allowing more records to be viewed at one time.
To re-enable the display of this area, right-click on the database search results pane, and then
from the pop-up menu enable (check) Show Details Panel.
To Copy a Record to a Transmission List

Use this procedure to copy a Record to a Transmission List.
1. Select/highlight a record or records on the Search Results pane.
2. Right click on the Search Results pane and from the popup menu select:
Copy: To copy the highlighted record(s) to the clipboard.
CopyAll: To copy all records in the Search Results pane to the clipboard.
3. From the Air Client main screen, open a Transmission List. (For procedure details see To
Open an Existing Playlist.)
4. Position the cursor on the list at the point the event or events are to be copied and paste
the contents of the buffer to that location. (For procedure details see To Paste Cut / Copied
Event(s).)
30-July-2013 | Page 166 of 336

Drag and Drop a Record to a Playlist or Transmission List

Use this procedure to Drag and Drop a Record to a playlist or Transmission List.
1. Select/highlight a record or records on the Search Results pane.
2. Drag and Drop the record to the desired location on an open playlist or Transmission List.
Device Status Window

The device status window allows you to check the connection status of devices assigned to a
specific device server and provides other device information to help you identify the source of
event errors.
To Open the Device Status Window

1. From the Resources ribbon tab select the Device Status icon (
window is displayed.
). The Device Status
This window gives the status of all devices in control by the device server.
The status bar displays the time of a device server. Time source originating from a PC is
represented by the letter P. The letter T represents time from a timecode generator and
the letter V for reference video.
NDF and DF represent drop frame status for a broadcast facility. For example, when
drop frame is off, NDF displays in the status bar.
The color of a device also signifies its status. By default, when a device is black, its status
is normal and its events may be added to a playlist. Devices that are green are in use by
a playlist in a transmission window. If a device is not connected or responding, the spot
displays in red in the device status window.
Device Status window columns can be reviewed for:
30-July-2013 | Page 167 of 336

Port: Specifies which port a device is connected to. The status of a disk port is
displayed on one line for each head. When playing, one line displays the status of
the on-air event and the other displays the status of the next spot to air.
Device: (Device Name) Displays the device name and type when configured on the
Device Server.. To open a VTR devices control panel, double-click the VTR in the
device status window. The control panel only opens if the VTR contains a tape and is
properly connected and configured.
Status: Current status of the device. Status key words include:

No dev: No device is connected to the specified port.
No comm.: Air Client is unable to communicate with the specified device.
Unthreaded: The device is not threaded.
Cued: The device is cued.
Play: The device is playing a spot.
Standby: The device is in standby.
Online: The device is online.
Offline: The device is offline.
Owner: Transmission list assignment of the device. Specifies which playlist or cache
a device is assigned to. If the owner field is blank and you want to use the device, it
must be configured in the device server.
Pos: (Position) Transmission list event # location of the device. Displays the playlist
position number of an event the device is playing.
ID: Displays the ID of an event the device is playing. This is the current Id that is
threaded in a particular device.
Dur: (Duration). Specifies the duration of the cued or playing event associated with
the device. This is the duration the device is currently scheduled to play the event. A
device that is playing will be green and reflect the counting duration of the event.
An A event would be counting down, while an AU event will be counting up.
Information: Displays the input and output ports of a switcher, if applicable. If a

switcher is connected to a device server, the information field displays the device
status (online or offline), including general information. Certain devices (Switchers,
Routers) may give extra information of device status.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshoot transmission list problems (incorrect status of devices) by checking the Device
Status window for problems with individual devices.
If a device is not available or not communicating correctly, the text indicates the situation.
The status also reveals if the device is not communicating or there is no device currently
connected.
30-July-2013 | Page 168 of 336

NOTE: A VTR's device control panel can be opened if the VTR is currently loaded with a tape.
This is useful when device control is needed without looking for the event on the transmission
list. Since all VTRs for all lists are shown here, ensure the correct VTR is selected.
Device Storage Window

The device storage window lists the media in a device connected to a specified server. When an
event cannot be found, you can use the device storage window to verify that its information
matches the spot ID on the device.
Also, when creating or editing playlists, you can lookup spots on a devices media. You can
search for a spots ID or title and then drag it to a playlist window. Use the database, which is
accessible on the right-click menu of the device storage window, to access a spots record
information.
Cut Copy / Drag Drop to Playlist. Records can be copied and pasted or drag and dropped from
this window into a play list or transmission list.
Note on XDCAM Storage Locations: XDCAM cart, model A480, has 6 faces and each face has 80
bins, with up to 600 disks loaded in the cart. A bin number with the first 2 digits specifying the
face and the second 2 digits specifying the bin number allows an operator to know where in the
cart the disk resides. Air Client displays this XDCAM storage information: the cart as a storage
location with the cart face/slot number and disk label displayed.
To Open the Device Storage Window

This option will give a storage window view of the video server inventory.
1. From the Resources ribbon tab select the Device Storage icon (
).The Choose Device
30-July-2013 | Page 169 of 336

2. Select the target storage device to check the inventory and then click OK
The status bar displays the time of a device server. Time source originating from a PC is
represented by the letter P. The letter T represents time from a timecode generator and
the letter V for reference video.
NDF and DF represent drop frame status for a broadcast facility. For example, when
drop frame is off, NDF displays in the status bar.
The second tray in the status bar displays the number of spots on the device. The third
tray displays the number of minutes used on a disk and the remaining available minutes.
The last tray displays the devices status.
The color of a spot also signifies its status. When a spot is black, its status is normal and
may be added to a playlist. Spots that are green are in use by a playlist in a transmission
window. On Sony cart machines, if a spots title does not match its record in the
database, the spot displays in red in the device storage window.
Device Storage window columns can be reviewed for:
Num: (Number) The number of the spot in the window.
Spot ID: The ID of the media located in the device.
30-July-2013 | Page 170 of 336

Title: The title of the media located in the device.
Duration: The spots duration.
Spot #: Displays the spot number of the media which is assigned by the device.
Play Date: The date the media was last played.
Status: The medias status: normal (available for use), In Use (playing), Title
Mismatch (for Sony cart machines only) and Protect.
Status bar indicators:

Total Available record space on the device
The size of the largest contiguous recording available on the device.
(The following graphic illustrates the relevant indicators on an example status bar.
Your status bar may appear different.)
To Refresh a Window
To refresh a display, right click on the window and from the pop-up menu select Dynamic
Display or press <F5> on the keyboard. This updates the content of the window.
Protecting and Removing Spots

Spots in a device storage window can be delete-protected in the device storage window to
ensure they are not removed from the media. You can also remove spots so they are no longer
available for air.
To Remove a Record from the server

1. Highlight a record by clicking on its entry in the number column.
2. Right click on the window, and then from the pop-up menu select Remove or press
<Delete> on the keyboard.
3. The system prompts to confirm. Click OK to confirm.
To Protect a Record
1. Highlight an event or range of events by clicking on its entry in the number column.
2. Right click on the window, and then from the pop-up menu select Protected. The record is
protected and its Status is set to P. (Protected events display a P in the Status column.)
To Unprotect a Record
1. Highlight an event or range of events currently protected by clicking on its entry in the
number column.
30-July-2013 | Page 171 of 336

2. Right click on the window, and then from the pop-up menu select Unprotected. The record
is unprotected and its Status is reset.
To Check or Search for a record

Note: A status panel in the Device Storage window blinks to indicate a search is in progress. This
lets operators know during long searches that Air Client is functioning and not hung.
To Check a Record against the database

1. Highlight a record by clicking on its entry in the number column.
2. Right click on the window, and then from the pop-up menu select Database. The database
window opens with the comparison result.
3. (Option) A record can be drag-and-dropped from the Robust Database window to an open
playlist or Transmission list.
To Search for a Record by ID

1. Highlight a record by clicking on its entry in the number column, right click on the window,
and then from the pop-up menu select Find ID.
Find what: Enter the search string text.
Check to Match whole word only.
Check to Match Case.
Select Search Direction in the window: Up or Down.
3. Click Find Next.
To Search for a record by Title

1. Highlight a record by clicking on its entry in the number column, right click on the window,
and then from the pop-up menu select Find Title.
30-July-2013 | Page 172 of 336

Find what: Enter the search string text.
Check to Match whole word only.
Check to Match Case.
Select Search Direction in the window: Up or Down.
3. Click Find Next.
Moving Spots and Records to Playlists

A record, or multiple records can be moved from the Robust Database window or a Device
Storage window to an open playlist or Transmission List using drag-and-drop or Cut and Paste
from the Edit ribbon tab.
Drag/Drop from Device Storage Window: Select a record on the Device Storage Window,
then move the record by dragging it from the Device Storage Window and dropping it into a
playlist.
Drag/Drop from Robust Database Window: Select a record, then right click and from the
menu select Database. This launches the Robust Database window. Move the record by
dragging it from the database window and dropping it into a playlist.
Cut/Copy/Paste from Device Storage Window: Selecta record on the Device Storage
). Click the event in a
window, then from the Edit ribbon tab select the Cut icon (
playlist after which you want to insert the cut record, then from the Edit ribbon tab select
the Paste icon (
).
NOTE: Dragging-and-dropping a multisegment record to a playlist opens a multisegment

window.
Multiple Records
To move a range of multiple records, hold Shift and click the first record in the range, then clickhold the last record in the range. Drag the selection to a playlist and release the mouse button
to drop it.
30-July-2013 | Page 173 of 336

Instead of dragging a selection range to a playlist, you can click Cut from the Edit ribbon tab,
click the event after which you want to insert the range and click Paste from the Edit ribbon tab.
More Info Window

When the functionality has been purchased, this option allows the custom configuration of a
More Info column using an ODBC database. The customer uses station-defined procedures to
configure functionality on this display.
More Info Windows display data from the automation database. Access to these fields depends
upon the client they are being accessed from.
In the Air Client, the objective of the More Info Window is to make available any information
in a record by displaying it in a single window. This information can be the data captured
using the Media Client, as well as what currently exists in the database.
In Air Client, they display not only the standard fields found in both the ASDB and the ASSEG
tables, but also any fields that are added to the database, normally in the ASEXT table.
For information on setting up the More Info Window see Configuring System Properties: More
Info.
To Display the More Info Window

To display the More Info window of an ID in Air Client:
Double-click the event number on a play list or transmission list window.

Note: Double-clicking anywhere else on an event line will result in an undesired action to
occur or initiate another feature of Air Client.
OR
Within the Play List Window, right click and then from the pop-up menu select Show
MoreInfo.
Example Window
When the event number is selected, the data associated with the material ID is displayed in the
More Info window. The following is an example window. Your window may be defined
differently.
30-July-2013 | Page 174 of 336

Video Window
Air Client can include an optional feature that displays the on-air event in a video window. It can
be used for monitoring the Output Stream, but has no control functionality. A video board
installed in the Air Client workstation must be connected to the output from the on-air video
stream.
To Display the Video Window

When this feature is available, from the Tools ribbon tab select the Video Window icon (
The view window is launched.
).
If this is not configured a warning message is displayed:
30-July-2013 | Page 175 of 336

Managing Compile Lists

About the Compiler Option
The compiler is an optional feature of Air Client that allows you to create groups of spots, or
pods, to play to air. Compiling spots into pods allows you to air multiple commercial breaks from
one device instead of playing spots from multiple devices. Each pod in a playlist plays as a single
event and is identified by the compile tape ID.
The compile list window is used to create pods and edit its spots. Editing spots when the pod is
loaded in a transmission window may cause unexpected results. You can also play spots from
the compile list window, allowing you to assess the air quality of the media.
List Filename Character Limits
Air Client will not load or save any Playlist <<Playlists, (.lst & .cur), Auto List Save Lists, (.rcv &
.rcb), Sectional Lists, (.sec), Compile Lists, (.cpl)>> with a name longer than 32 characters total,
(including its filename extensions). A warning pops up when attempting to save a Playlist name
longer than a total of 32 characters.
Creating a Compile List

A compile list is created identically to a playlist in a playlist window.
1. To open a compile list window, from the Resources ribbon tab select the View List... icon
(
).The Choose List dialog is displayed.
2. Select a compile list from the Choose List dialog, and then click OK.
To view the individual spots of a compile tape

In a compile list window, you can view the individual spots of a compile tape by using the
append, load and insert list menu options on the right-click menu.
To remove all spots from a compile list window

To remove all spots from a compile list window, point to Compiler on the right-click menu, then
click Clear List.
30-July-2013 | Page 176 of 336

To prepare a list for compiling

Also, you can use the compile list window to prepare a list for compiling by performing these
tasks:
1. Insert a Secondary Event Compile ID at the top of the compile list to indicate where the
compiler begins compiling the list. Air Client automatically switches to Revise Mode.
2. Enter an ID in the ID field of the Secondary Event Compile ID. This is the compile tape ID
number that will display in the ID field of a playlist when the compiled events are inserted.
Each tape containing a compile list must have a compile tape ID number and is used to
identify all of the spots on the tape in a playlist.
3. Insert spots into the compile list.
4. At the end of the compile list, insert a secondary break event or enter Revise Mode (press
ALT + R or from the Events ribbon tab select the Revise icon (
).)
5. Remove letter A from the Type field of the last event to indicated the end of the compile list.
NOTE: Events are compiled according to the value in the Type field.
Remove A from the Type field to indicate which events you do not want to compile. Only events
containing A in the Type field are compiled.
Compiling a Compile List

After creating a compile list, use the compilers control panel to compile its spots on one tape.
1. Right-click the compile list window and from the popup menu select Compiler > Panel. This
opens the Compiler control panel.
2. Select the button function to perform. A description of the function of each button on the
compiler control panel follows:
30-July-2013 | Page 177 of 336

Compile: The Compile button begins the compile process, beginning with the first pod.
This feature will only compile one pod at a time, stopping at each break event allowing
you time to insert another tape.
Auto: The Auto button also begins the compile process, except that the compiler
compiles as many pods as will fit on a single tape. The compiler will not stop at each
break event; however, each compiled pod remains separated by their secondary
compile ID and break events.
Cue One: The Cue One button cues the tape to the SOM position of a selected event,
allowing you to preview it.
Cue Up: The Cue Up button cues the record tape to the pods SOM, allowing you to
preview an entire compiled list.
Replay: The Replay button plays a pod or event that is cued by the Cue Up and Cue One
buttons. You cannot replay lists or events until they are cued with either the Cue One or
Cue Up buttons.
Cancel: Use the Cancel button to abort the compile process. You must recompile the list
after clicking this button.
3. During the compile process information is displayed in the Record Device Status field and
the Compiler Error field:
The Record Device Status field displays the status of the compile lists record device.
When compiling, messages appear in the record device status field indicating the status
of the compile process. Following is a description of each status message: Cueing.
When the compile process begins, the recordable material cues and the source material
cues and threads.
Prerolling Compiler. When the compiler is cued, the source device is in preroll and is
advancing to the SOM of an event.
Compiling. Displays as the compiler is compiling events.
Saving List. Displays when the compiler saves a compile list.
Waiting to Restart. After the compiler saves a compile list, this message displays
until the compiler is restarted after it stops between break events.
NOTE: This is only applicable when compiling in Auto mode.
Canceling. When the compile process is canceled, this message displays until the
recorders stop.
Waiting for User. When an error message is displayed in a dialog box, this message
displays until you close the dialog box.
The Compiler Error field displays any errors that occur during the compile process.
When the compiler encounters an error, it displays the error in the compiler error field
on the control panel. Following is a description of each error:
No recorders or recorders not threaded. Either no record devices are assigned to

the compiler or there is no recordable media in the devices.
Recorders are still moving. This error displays if the recorders are still moving when
the compile process is initiated.
30-July-2013 | Page 178 of 336

Unable to thread and/or cue. Either the recorders did not cue or the first event in
the compile list did not cue or thread.
Operation canceled by user. Displays when the compile process is canceled.
Compile tape mismatch. The compiler tape ID for the compile list does not match
the ID in the record device.
Encountered end of usable tape. No more recordable media is available for the
compiler to record events on.
Unable to locate compilable event. There are no events in the compile list to be
compiled.
Compiler skipped break/POD. The compiler skipped a break event or pod because
of a missing media error.
Record ID has changed. The compiler detected a different compile tape ID in the
compile list than that in the record device. A dialog box appears, allowing you to
confirm that you changed the tape in the device.
4. When a list is compiled, the file is saved with a .CPL extension, instead of the .LST extension.
Recompiling a Compile List

If you cancel the compile process before the entire list is compiled, or you want to insert
another spot in a list that has already been compiled, you must recompile the entire list before
playing on-air. Before recompiling the list, however, you must first mark the compiled spots as
uncompiled by pointing to Compiler on the right-click menu and clicking Clear Compile Events.
Other Compile List Functions

The following functions are optional and may not be available on your Air Client workstation.
Jam New IDs

Jam New IDs marks a point on a compile list from which to create a Sectional List. A sectional list
is a compile list that is recompiled with a new ID and saved with the extension .SEC. It is identical
to the original compile list, except that it contains only the timecode of the original list and not
the events.
A sectional list is used to play regional spots in place of the spots recorded in the compile list.
Both the sectional list and the compile list must be loaded in separate transmission list windows
before aired. To broadcast the sectional list, the compile and sectional list must be played
simultaneously. The compiled list references the sectional list to determine when its spots air.
When the spots of a sectional list air, the compile list plays normally; however, in some
broadcast regions, compile list spots will be substituted by spots in the sectional list.
30-July-2013 | Page 179 of 336

Mark Exception
Mark Exception marks an event in a compiled list as an event to recompile into a sectional list.
To create the sectional list, you must change the event ID of all of the events that you have
marked as exceptions to another ID. The sectional list is created to play regional spots in place of
national spots, so, the ID replacing the original compile ID should be the ID of the regional spot.
Spots that are marked as exceptions will have the letter X next to letter A in the Type field of the
compile list.
These spots are recompiled with the regional spots in place of the national spots. When the
sectional list is loaded into a transmission list window, all spots not marked as exceptions are
ignored by Air Client. When a sectional list is compiled, the timecode from the original compile
list will be transferred on a new tape with the marked exceptions.
Thread Into VTR

Use this option to specify the VTR in a cart machine to thread the source tape into.
30-July-2013 | Page 180 of 336

Error Management
Error Management
About Displaying Errors
To Simultaneously View All Air Client Errors
To simultaneously view all Air Client errors in a separate window, from the File ribbon tab select
the Display Errors icon (
).
From the Choose Server dialog box, click a server whose errors you want to view and click OK.
An Error Log window displays all errors occurring for the server you selected.
To View Error Logs

To view error logs saved as text files, from the File ribbon tab select the Open Text... icon (
and then choose a file you want to view.
),
dialog window shows the directory specified in Properties/Environment. If the operator browses
to a different location, the Dialog remembers/remaps to the last used folder, and opens it by
default the next time File/Open Playlist, File/Open Text, Append/load/insert list' is used.
To Display Errors
1. From the File ribbon tab select the Display Errors icon (
with the most recent errors.
). An error display will appear
2. To clear these errors, from the File ribbon tab select the Clear Errors (
) icons.
NOTE: This does not clear errors saved in the error log. The errors display is only a clipboard
of errors since the last time the errors were cleared.
30-July-2013 | Page 181 of 336

Error Management
Clearing Error Messages from the Air Client

Desktop
Error messages are displayed in the status bar of the Air Client desktop.
Uncleared error messages are displayed in Bolded black text.

Cleared error messages are displayed in normal black text.
To Clear Error Messages

1. Clear any error message by pressing <F4>, or clicking the F4 button located in the lower left
corner of the display.
2. If there is more than one error message, press <F4> to clear the next message displayed
after the previous one.
3. The last error message displays in black, instead of red, after pressing <F4>. To remove this
last message from the desktop, from the File ribbon tab select the Clear Errors icon (
).
List Validation
The list validation option checks through the list of events for potential problems and lists the
events, and their errors.
Sequence: (sequence = missing segments within a series, or segments out of order) The
segment number is out of sequence for the same tape ID in the list, denoted with
sequence in the error type field.
SameSeg: (same segment = same segment number back-to-back) The segment number
is followed by same segment number for the same tape ID in the list, denoted with
sameseg in the error type field.
Separates: (separates = segments not separated by a break) The segments are not
separated by a break, denoted with separates in the error type field.
SameID: (same id = same ID back-to-back) The ID is followed by same ID in the list,

denoted with sameID in the error type field.
Note: The error type for each event is a warning only. All events will play.
List Validation window

The error type for each event in a List Validation window is a warning only. The operator should
check the events listed to ensure proper playback.
30-July-2013 | Page 182 of 336

Error Management
1. While viewing list, from the Events ribbon tab select the List Validation icon (
validation info dialog appears listing any errors.
). The list
If Air Client was not able to find any errors within the transmission list based on the
described error criteria above, a List Validation confirmation box is displayed.
2. (Option) To save the list to a textfile, click Save.

A Save As Text dialog is displayed requiring the operator to specify a file name and then click
Save.
3. (Option) To print the list, click Print.
A Print dialog is displayed, requiring the operator to specify a printer (if other than default)
and then click OK to print.
4. Click Close to close the List Validation dialog.
30-July-2013 | Page 183 of 336

Emergency Operations
Main/Backup Changeover
(FOR NON-CLONING STATIONS)
Changeover Indications:
1. The screen freezes up (Countdown of current event, and clock displayed in lower left corner
will stop moving).
2. A pop-up warning message appears indicating the main Device Server has aborted
operation. Click Yes or OK, to use the alternate Device Server.
Recovery Steps
1. Always try RETRY first, maybe your client just lost connection and the Device Server is
actually still OK (you can also confirm this by checking for the same error status on other
nearby clients) **If RETRY fails, wait before you answer YES to USE ALTERNATE Note the
time that WAS left on your current event, and/or the start time indicated on the auto ripple
next to the next event. Note this time, and how much time is roughly left.
**BEFORE PERFORMING STEPS 2 and 3**
Ensure the BACKUP Device Server is actually on, and the application is running. If a coworker can help with this step that would be a good idea, since you will have limited
time to complete these steps.
If youre in a TAPE EVENT you must put the deck into LOCAL and leave it in LOCAL FOR
THE REST OF THAT EVENT.
2. Throw the MAIN/BACKUP transfer switch (usually in racks by the Device Servers themselves)
this will give control of all your devices over to the BACKUP Device Server. This is also a
step you may want to get a co-worker to do while you look after the Air Client side.
3. Answer YES to the MAIN Aborted Use alternate prompt.
4. Look at the top of the windows bar for MAIN to change to BACKUP, you may see an
hourglass during this time, about 30 seconds.
MAIN.
30-July-2013 | Page 184 of 336

Changes to BACKUP.
5. After a successful connection to the BACKUP, the system prompts to Reload Transmission
Lists on the alternate Device Server; click YES or OK to continue. [This only happens if
youre configured for Auto List Save, and it is best if ONE CLIENT is set up to do this for all
playlists]
PLEASE NOTE: When the client logs in to BACKUP, the Transmission lists will NOT
NECESSARILY open for viewing (though they are indeed already loaded if Reload prompt
above was chosen). Remember to use the VIEW LIST option (from shortcut button, or from
Resources/View List) to see the active transmission list(s). You should discover them already
loaded at this point if you had answered YES to step 4. You may need to delete a few events
to get up to the current event. Delete UP TO AND INCLUDING on-air event. Your list had
already started the current event (which is now already in progress playing out of the Disk
[or VTR in LOCAL]) so its line item needs to be removed from the list.
6. At this point your client should be logged into BACKUP and your list should be loaded and
parked on the next-needed event. Your events should now be blue and ready to cue and
roll. DO NOT hit PGM RUN, and DO NOT CUE EVENTS at this point.
If you are on server-based content (file trailing on for remainder of on-air event) an
early cue command will stop your on-air event and you will be in black.
30-July-2013 | Page 185 of 336

If youre in a tape based event, leave it in LOCAL. Switching to remote will cause the
tape to register and cue to subsequent segments or eject, both scenarios will take you
off the air, so keep it in LOCAL until the segment has ended.
7. To resume automated playout, you can either place a hard start on the first spot in the
break, or wait for the end of the still-playing current on-air file, then (at the fade to black) hit
PGM RUN, to cue, then ROLL (or PLAY).
REMEMBER: If you are using an Operator Control Panel (OCP), it will not be lit up (usable)
initially so you will need to use the software panel to roll the list at first.
Other Considerations
Video server ports that are set to Stop Disk Play/Record on Init will reset to black, thus
stopping your on-air event when the transfer switch is thrown. If you want the option to be able
to failover and have the current file stay on the air during the failover process, ensure at least
one of the ports in a given set (the AIR or the PROTECT [or both]) are set so they do NOT Stop
Disk Play/Record on Init.
This is configured from the Configuration Manager tool. For details reference the ADC Device
Server v12 and Configuration Manager Installation and Operations Reference.
30-July-2013 | Page 186 of 336

System Power Up and Down Sequences

ADC Automation System components power up sequence is performed in reverse order to their
Power down sequence.
Power Up Sequence
Power Down Sequence
1st
File Server
1st
Devices**
2nd
Device Server
2nd
Clients(s)
3rd
B/U Device Server
3rd
B/U Device Server
4th
Clients(s)
4th
Device Server
5th
Devices**
5th
File Server
**NOTE: Only applies when powering up or down of device is required.
30-July-2013 | Page 187 of 336

Automated Recording
Automated Recording
Record Lists
The ADC provides features for automating the recording of taped and live events. The material
you record can come from any source network/satellite feed, studio, or tape.
With AutoSat: Record Lists are created by AutoSat. Your Record Schedules are entered
into AutoSat. AutoSat tunes in your feeds, and schedules the events to record on the ADC
Record List(s).
Without AutoSat: Setting up for timed recordings is similar to preparing for event playout.
You first create a list of Record events, manually or through a traffic system, and save the
list as a .LST file. You will need to load or append this list into your Record List(s) on your
ADC on a daily basis.
For Invenio Ingest Server Scheduled Records, the ADC Record List must have the Record
Sources assigned ON the ADC Record List, as Switch Only Devices, with the appropriate Edit
Input Router Device, Source, and Destination configuration. It is a recommended that the
Source Switches added to the ADC Record List be similar, but unique by one character. (i.e.
ADC Router Source Tab = FS2 ADC Record List Switch only = #FS2.) This difference makes it
easier to choose the correct device in the Invenio Scheduled Record Drop Down lists.
Normally, with no Invenio, for ADC Record Lists, the Sources only need to be populated in
the Source Tab of the ADC Router Device.
Key Elements
The following is an example of a Record List.
In your Record List, insert Primary events as needed with the following information:
30-July-2013 | Page 188 of 336

Automated Recording
TIME: Enter the time of day you want to start the recording. (Most lists run off a 24hr.
clock.) If recording to Video Servers only, and two or more events start at the same time you
need to insert the additional record events on a second record list. (Record lists, like VTRs
can only record one event at a time.) To avoid clipping the beginning of a program adjust
the start time to allow: 15 sec. of pad. If you could have more than one record event start at
the same time if you were using a VTR and Video Disk or Multiple VTRs then these events
may be inserted on the same record list.
TYPE: Enter an R (Record) for the type of event. The Record event is a timed, hard start
Event.
ID:
If Recording to Tape Enter the ID number for the specific program. Use the same
number that the show will be prepped and play back as later. Operators can use
unprepared tapes as Barcode events and tapes with user bit IDs prepared with Media
Client.
NOTE: IDs should be No more than 8 characters in length.
If Recording to Disk A different ID number can be used than what the show will play
back as. This is to ensure that an un-prepped show may not accidentally air. The ID
number can be renamed at Media Client at prep time.
NOTE: Not all video disks support rename. If your facility is using the reject blank SOM
option, this may help ensure the incorrect show does not air.
Title:
If the Record device receives input from a router/switcher, enter the name of the input
source here. Use the pre-configured source name on the Device Server. A User-friendly title
can also be inserted in the TITLE FIELD following the router command in the following
manner; SAT3;Show Monday the routing command first, then a semi-colon, then your user
title.
*If nothing is entered for the title, and the Record device is connected to a router, ADC uses
the A/V channel information to determine the input crosspoint.
The result of this being either recording black or the last source that was routed to this
device.
Dur: (Duration) Enter the duration of the Record event for the duration you want to record
for. Remember to take into account that you may need to start the next recording and that
this recording may have started early.
SOM: Certain videodisks will require an SOM (Start Of Message) value.
Running the Record List

1. Load or Append the Record List file (.LST file) into a designated Record List window.
NOTE: If using AutoSat this will happen automatically.
2. ADC looks for the Record device that has the specific IDd event. If using an external VTR,
insert the tape using a Wand, or a Barcode event. This is done to validate the event on the
list. Remember to rewind after a tape. If using a videodisk, the videodisk must be properly
30-July-2013 | Page 189 of 336

Automated Recording
connected and running. A videodisk must be properly configured. (In most cases this will be
pre-configured.)
3. If devices are ready, and all Record events in the list are valid, recording begins at the
designated time for each event.
NOTE: So as not to clip recordings, make sure at least: 15sec of pad is provided for the start
time and the duration of the file.
Record List Tips/Troubleshooting
DO NOT load/include more than 24-hrs worth of events on one Record List at one time.
(Record lists do NOT recognize dates, only a 24hr clock.)
Make sure SOM fields contain a value (Applies to certain Video Disks only)
You can only have one Disk port assigned to one list at one time, therefore disk recordings
cannot be simultaneous and may not overlap on one list.
Secondary Records
Recording of live shows for time delayed playout requires an optional ADC feature.
This Live Record option provides a Secondary Record event to the standard ADC system.
Unlike timed recordings, live recordings designed for delayed playout use one list for both the
recording, and subsequent playback of the events. i.e. The On-Air Playlist.
Key Elements
The following is an example of a playlist with a Secondary Record event attached.
Inputting Secondary Record Events

A Secondary Record event can be inserted into a playlist two ways
Manually - using the ribbon tab: Events > Insert Secondary > Secondary Record. Or ShiftInsert, then select Secondary Record from the list.
Traffic Log - events can be entered in advance by Traffic.
Secondary Record Entry Guidelines
The ID and Segment Number on the Secondary Record Event should match the requested
replay events ID and Segment Number.
30-July-2013 | Page 190 of 336

Automated Recording
The duration does not have to exactly match the Total Running Time (TRT) of the program,
the duration MUST be AT LEAST the Total Running Time of the program and the duration for
each secondary record event must match one another exactly.
The idea is that the duration scheduled for the Secondary Record event must match or
exceed the Total Running Time of the longest segment. This duration must be used for all
the segments.
Make sure the Time of Day field is blank (not zeros/no value)
Make sure the record tape is put into a VTR before the live program is to be played and
recorded.
Basic Functions of the Secondary Record
A Secondary Record event records the Primary event that it is attached to.
When the operator comes out of an up counting live event [into break] using the PLAY
button on the list Control Panel, the Record event for that live event will be marked done.
When the system starts to play the first segment of the live event, the Record event is
started.
At that time, the replay event down the list will be filled in with the SOM and Duration of
the recorded event ready for replay. The Title field from the SECONDARY RECORD event is
also copied at the replay event line. The recording tape will not be stopped but will be
moved down to the next SECONDARY RECORD with the same ID [for subsequent segments],
where the recording continues until the show is completed.
Once the Secondary Record is completed, the ID and Segment information could be saved to
the database (if configured)
Secondary Recording to Video Disk
When inserting SECONDARY RECORD events, make sure that the Time of Day field is BLANK.
DO NOT put in zeros, only blanks. Set the SOM field of each SECONDARY RECORD event to
00:00:00.00.
The videodisk port doing the recording must be properly configured or the recording will not
be made correctly. The following disk parameters must be set:
Enable Recording of Record Event
Enable Segment Play/Record with ID (Modify Segment IDs must equal zero)
Back to Back Record must be disabled
Make sure that the videodisk port is assigned to the list before the recording is to be
done.
Videodisks require the use of a unique ID for each individual event that is recorded. See
your videodisks documentation for system requirements.
30-July-2013 | Page 191 of 336

Automated Recording
Secondary Recording to Tape
Tapes MUST BE pre-striped with Time Code when used for Secondary Records. It is best to
use the Media Clients Black Tapes feature, to stripe the tapes, so as to Record the tapes
ID and Userbits as well. Putting userbits on the tape will allow the tape to be inserted into a
VTR before use and automatically be recognized by ADC as the Record tape.
An SOM on the Record event is needed because an insert edit Record is used instead of a
hard Record. This ensures that the tape will be started using synchronized play to enable it
to Record at the specified first frame for frame accurate playback. Enter the SOM in all the
Secondary Record events using the same SOM value.
Make sure that the Time of Day field is BLANK in the SECONDARY RECORD event.
DO NOT put in zeros, only blanks. This field is used to store additional information about the
recording while the recording is taking place.
The commercial spaces between the live events are also being recorded on your tape, but
because there are no SECONDARY RECORD events attached to them, the information is not
saved and records black.
When the last live event is finished, the last Record event will also be finished. At that time
the recording will also stop. If that tape is needed anywhere within the Lookahead, the tape
will stay in the deck and cue for playback. When it plays, it will play for the duration that was
determined by the SECONDARY RECORD event.
When using this event to replay segments, remember that when the tape is finished
recording, it will have to be rewound for playback. If the replay program immediately
follows the end of the live program, then the tape may not cue in time. If this scenario
exists, then two record tapes should be used and IDs on both tapes should match exactly.
Database Logging
When a SECONDARY RECORD event is finished recording, all subsequent replay events on
the list are automatically filled in with the recorded duration and SOM. If any other lists on
the same Automation Server contain the same replay events, they will be filled in also.
Enable As Run/Update Database must be set up for your Secondary Record files to be stored
permanently in the Media Client Database. This is only necessary if you need to
permanently store your Secondary Record files for future replay beyond the current log.
You should only use this option if the previous scenarios apply to your station. This must
only be configured on one Air Client.
To activate this option

WARNING: This option can only be enabled in one air client...having multiple air
clients will generate a CURSOR SQL error.
1. From the ribbon tabs select Properties > AsRun Logs
30-July-2013 | Page 192 of 336

Automated Recording
2. On the As Run configuration tab, select Update Database to allow secondary recorded Ids
to be saved to the database with the timecode and segment information.
30-July-2013 | Page 193 of 336

Barcode Event
Barcode Event
Introduction
A Barcode Event is the process of loading a VTR with a tape that will be needed for use by a
specific ON-AIR Transmission Playlist.
When would you need a Barcode Event?

There are three scenarios where a Barcode Event is useful:
There is not enough time to record the media into the video server and it must air off of a
VTR machine.
A Cart Machine or Video Server crash and a backup/contingency reel needs to air off of a
VTR machine.
The ingested copy of the show has been purged from the Video Servers and is now not
available to the ON-AIR Playlist.
Will ADC run this Barcode Event automated?

Yes. The event on the playlist that will run out of a VTR machine will run in a similar manner to
an event that runs from a video server. The only difference is the VTR being used will switch to
air when the ON-AIR Playlist plays the event instead of the video server.
Will a Barcode Event appear on the playlist differently?

No. The event was the same event that was originally appended to the list. The device column
will show the correct device being used. In this case the specific VTR device name as it appears
in the Device Status window Device column.
How do I actually load a Barcode Event?

The following pages will show the correct procedures to load a Barcode Event as well as some of
the different scenarios related to barcode events.
Preparing the list for a Barcode Event if the ID exists on a Video Server?
If a show was ingested incorrectly or there is a bad copy on the Video Server the ID must be
deleted or changed on the playlist and then purged off both the Primary Video Server and the
Protect Video Server (if available). You would then re-insert the ID back into the playlist when it
will need to play.
30-July-2013 | Page 194 of 336

Barcode Event
VTR Playlist Assignment

VTR as Assigned Device
When a VTR is assigned to a playlist that VTR will be available to that playlist when a tape is
loaded and a barcode event is executed.
A barcode event is an option in the automation to designate to the automation that media
will play from a specific VTR. The fact that the VTR is assigned to the playlist ensures the VTR
is only used for the specific playlist it is assigned to. Other playlists will not have access to
this tape machine.
The window on the right shows VTR1 is currently assigned to a specific Playlist as shown in
the Owner column. (Image colors are set to enhance readability. Your view may appear
different.)
VTR as a Floater Machine
A Floater Machine is a VTR that is unassigned to any of the playlists.
The window on the right shows VTR1 is unassigned to any specific playlist. The owner
column for this machine is blank. When a barcode event is performed, the owner column
will fill in with the correct list. (Image colors are set to enhance readability. Your view may
appear different.)
If attempting to perform a barcode event and the owner column in the Device Status
window shows that the VTR is currently assigned to another list, call an engineer.
This Floater Machine can be used by any of the playlists on the Device Server it is
controlled by as long as the Audio/Video configurations are set up for the ON-AIR playlist
that will use the VTR for ON-AIR playback.
30-July-2013 | Page 195 of 336

Barcode Event
Barcode Event Step by Step

1. Select the correct play list to load the tape as a barcode event.
2. Insert tape into a tape machine that is not assigned to the Media List. Place VTR in Local
mode.
3. Set the Audio/Video levels.

4. Click the event on the transmission list that was loaded into the VTR, Right Click on
transmission list, select Barcode Event in the right click options menu.
5. Put VTR into REMOTE. The event on the playlist should turn blue, cue to the correct
timecode in the events SOM column, and then back up the tape to the preroll timecode.
6. The event will play from the VTR at the scheduled time.
If the tape does not have timecode in the SOM column it will go to a STOP status and
play when it receives the Play command from the Playlist at current location on the
tape.
To control tape manually through the automation double click on the event that is
loaded into the VTR and a DEVICE CONTROL PANEL will open up. This will allow standard
VTR control, including play, rewind, forward, and CUE which could be used to QC and
CUE prior to air. If control of the VTR is initiated with this panel make sure to hit the
CUE button prior to airtime (Only if there is timecode).
Barcode Event Scenarios

The following pages discuss several different examples of inserting and playing a barcode event.
A barcode event is an option in the Playlist-Right Click Options Menu. This is one easy way to
load a tape and have the automation control it with the transmission list. Follow the steps to do
a barcode event. Before being able to do a barcode event the ID being used cannot be located
in a Video Server or a Cart Machine assigned to the playlist.
Scenario 1: Using Barcode Event for a tape that has an

automation database record
1. Select correct play list to load the tape as a barcode event.
30-July-2013 | Page 196 of 336

Barcode Event
2. Insert tape into a VTR (in local mode) that is either assigned to the ON-AIR Playlist or that is
an unassigned (floater) machine.
3. (Image colors are set to enhance readability. Your display may appear different.)
4. Set audio/video levels as appropriate

5. Click the event on the transmission list that corresponds to the tape that was loaded into
the VTR, then right click on this event, and from the popup menu select Barcode Event.
6. Place the VTR into REMOTE. The event on the play list should turn blue, cue to the correct
(Image colors are set to enhance readability. Your display may appear different.)
Scenario 2: Using Barcode Event for a tape that does not have
an automation database record (Manually entering SOM)
2. Manually revise event line using Alt+R to enter/change any information necessary (in this
example entering the SOM of the tape in the SOM field is needed to allow the tape to cue to
its correct position) Alt+R again to exit the revise mode.
6. Set audio/video levels as appropriate.

the VTR, then right click on this event and from the popup menu select Barcode Event.
30-July-2013 | Page 197 of 336

Barcode Event
8. Place the VTR into REMOTE. The event on the play list should turn blue, cue to the correct
Scenario 3: Using Barcode Event for a tape that has bad or no

timecode
2. Click <Alt+R> to set Revise mode. Then manually revise event line to enter/change any
information necessary (in this example the SOM field should be left blank <not zeros> to
ensure that the automation will not try to cue up to any TC location on the tape)
4. Set audio/video levels as appropriate.
5. With machine still in local, cue the tape up to its in point and then back the tape up to its
appropriate pre-roll position
the VTR, then right click on this event, and from the popup menu select Barcode Event.
7. Place the VTR into REMOTE. The event on the play list should turn blue, however, the VTR
will remain in STOP mode and will not shuttle to any TC location because the SOM field is
blank.
Automation will play event at the scheduled time.
If the SOM is not entered on the playlist the VTR will stay in a STOP status and play
when it receives the Play command from the Playlist. Therefore, it is important to
remember to manually back the tape up to account for preroll.
30-July-2013 | Page 198 of 336

Barcode Event
It is only when the SOM does exist on the Playlist (either from the database or manually
entered) that the automation will cue to the correct position on the tape (list preroll
value).
To control tape manually through the automation double click on the event that is
loaded into the VTR and a DEVICE CONTROL PANEL will open up.
NOTE: In order for the Device Control Panel to be accessed, you must double click on a VTR
event that has status in its status column. Clicking anywhere else will result in the opening of the
Playlist Control Panel which controls the ON-AIR Playlist!) This will allow standard VTR control,
including play, rewind, forward, and CUE which could be used to QC and CUE prior to air. If
control of the VTR is initiated with this panel make sure to hit the CUE button prior to airtime
(Only if there is an SOM entered). You may also access this Device Control Panel by right clicking
on the VTR event. Warning: The event will need to be re-barcoded if there is no SOM and
manual control is taken.
30-July-2013 | Page 199 of 336

Logging
Logging
Error Logs
Errors that occur during the use of ADC automation are displayed in the error window at the
bottom of the playlist. An error log is created for each 24-hour day and covers the period from
midnight to 23:59:59.
To Display an Error Log

1. From the File ribbon tab select the Open Text icon (
). The Open File dialog is displayed.
is used.
2. Navigate to the location of the error logs. Error logs are typically located in the Lists\Errors
directory or in the Lists\AsRuns directory.
30-July-2013 | Page 200 of 336

Logging
3. The directory of the Error logs is configured from the Properties ribbon tab and selecting the
Errors... icon (
).
4. Under Files of type: Select Errors (*.err).
5. Highlight the file you wish to read. Content summary is displayed in the right pane.
6. Click Open. The selected file is displayed in a Text Browser window.
30-July-2013 | Page 201 of 336

Logging
AsRun Logs
Events that playback during the use of ADC automation are displayed in the AsRun Log. An
AsRun Log is created for each 24-hour day and covers the specified period as configured from
the Properties ribbon tab and selecting the AsRun Logs... icon (
).
To Display AsRun Logs

1. From the File ribbon tab select the Open Text icon (
). The Open File dialog is displayed.
is used.
30-July-2013 | Page 202 of 336

Logging
2. Select the correct folder. AsRun logs are typically located in the Lists\Asruns directory. Each
transmission list may also be separated into different folders. (This may be different at you
facility if the AsRun logs are placed in a different location)
3. For Files of type: Select Text Files (*.txt).
4. Highlight the file you wish to read. Content summary is displayed in the right pane.
30-July-2013 | Page 203 of 336

Logging
5. Click Open. The selected file is displayed in a Text Browser window.
6. The Log can be checked for time played, missed events, skipped events, reconcile codes,
playout device, etc.
30-July-2013 | Page 204 of 336

WinCmms
WinCmms
About Traffic Translator
The Traffic Translator is a stand alone application that can be run from any of the automations
clients or from any computers desk top. It is a custom created application tailored to the unique
requirements of each customer and is designed so that both primary and secondary events can
be generated from the traffic log.
In a typical automation environment the Traffic Translator supports a flat file interchange
workflow between the Traffic and Automation systems. In this workflow the Traffic System
exports schedule files and they are translated into automation playlist files using the Traffic
Translator application. The translated lists are then loaded into the automaton system for on-air
playout.
Using the Translator Program

WinCmms is the traffic log translation program that will translate a log from traffic into a .LST
file. This .LST file will then be available for the operator to append the .LST into the transmission
list. It will explain how to build a new playlist.
1. Launch WinCmms shortcut on desktop.
2. On the Welcome screen, click Next
3. (If the log is on a floppy disk, insert the disk into the floppy drive)
4. Select the A:\ drive if not already selected.
5. If the traffic log is not a txt file, select All Files to view the contents of the floppy.
6. Select the desired list to translate, and then select Next.
7. Select the destination for the translated playlist file, and then select Next.
8. Confirm the Input info and the Output info is correct.
9. Select Translate. When the translation is complete, select Finish.
30-July-2013 | Page 205 of 336

WinCmms
WinCmms Setup
To Install WinCmms
Follow directions on install readme file to copy the wincmms.exe file the WinCMMS directory on
the local PC.
To Put a Shortcut on the Desktop

1. Using Microsoft Windows Explorer, locate the WinCMMS directory.
2. Click the wincmms.exe file.
3. On the File menu, click Create Shortcut.
4. Drag the shortcut icon onto the desktop.
Tips
To change any settings for the shortcut, such as its name, what key combination is used to
access it, use your right mouse button to click the shortcut, and then click Properties.
To delete a shortcut, drag it to the Recycle Bin. The original item will still exist on the disk
where it is stored.
To Change the Default Directories and Options

1. Use your right mouse button to click the WinCMMS shortcut on the desktop, and then click
Properties.
2. On the Properties window. Click on the Shortcut tab.
3. Add the following parameters, separated by a space, to the Target text box:
<input_directory\[input_file]> or <input_directory\[default_extension]>
<output_directory>
[-axy]
[<done_directory>]
Where:
<input_directory>: Points to the default input directory. Where the traffic logs are
located.
Could be accompanied by a [input_file] name. This is useful when calling the translator
from another application. The translator closes itself after the file is converted.
OR
Could be accompanied by a [default_extension].
30-July-2013 | Page 206 of 336

WinCmms
<output_directory>: Points to the default output directory. Where the output playlist
will be saved.
-a: Allows the translator to run in Automatic Mode. The Translator will run minimized
converting all the files located in the <input_directory>. After each log is translated is
moved to the <done_directory>. If there is no <done_directory> specified, will traffic log
will be moved to the <output_directory>. The Translator stays open until a new file(s) is
(are)downloaded to the <input_directory>.
-x: Allows the translator to run in Batch Mode. The Translator will convert all the files
located in the <input_directory>. It closes itself after the last file is converted. Not to be
used in conjunction with the a switch.
-y: Allows the translator to run without prompt. Will overwrite the output file, if exists.
Can be used in conjunction with the a or x switch.
Examples:
c:\wincmms\wincmms.exe a:\ e:\playlist
c:\wincmms\wincmms.exe e:\traffic\today.txt e:\playlist -y
c:\wincmms\wincmms.exe e:\traffic\*.scd e:\playlist -xy
c:\wincmms\wincmms.exe e:\traffic e:\playlist -ay e:\traffic\done
30-July-2013 | Page 207 of 336

Global Media Transfer (GMT)

About GMT
GMT or Global Media Transfer is Harris Broadcast Automations system for controlling the
movement of media/material. This process can be used to move material a few feet within a
facility or thousands of miles between facilities. GMT is a part of the On-Air automation system.
Each transmission list may ask GMT to find media that cannot be found in the devices assigned
to the list. GMT will then find and move the media to a destination device, usually a videodisk
server, assigned to the transmission list. The transmission list can then air this media. GMT can
also be used in conjunction with the Media Client to send and retrieve material from an archive
device.
Purchase Note: GMT is a for-purchase option to ADC systems. Contact your Harris Broadcast
Automation Sales representative for details.
Reference Note: For more information reference the ADC GMT Configuration and Operations
Guide document.
The main tasks of GMT are:
Find media/material needed by an on-air transmission list or find material requested by a

Media Client.
Copy that media to its intended destination. This may be a videodisk server serving a
transmission list or an archive device.
Monitor the movement of material.

With AsRun logging, log the movement of material.
Provide automatic media duplication on multiple videodisk servers for air protection.
GMT Transfer Modes

GMT supports four transfer modes or mechanisms for copying media: fibrechannel transfers,
baseband transfers, archive transfers and wide-area network FTP transfers.
Fibrechannel transfers Media may be copied among video servers linked by a fibrechannel
connection. Fibrechannel transfers are data transfers of compressed MPEG or JPEG files
and occur faster than real time. Fibrechannel transfers may occur between devices
controlled by multiple Device Servers.
Archive transfers Media may be copied to or from an archive device either by the normal
background GMT process, or manually through the Media Client application. Archive
transfers are data transfers of compressed MPEG or JPEG files and occur faster than real
time. Archive transfers may be single-hop or double-hop transfers. Single-hop transfers
30-July-2013 | Page 208 of 336

copy the media from the archive directly to the requesting playout video server. Doublehop transfers copy the media from the archive to an intermediate video server, and then
execute a fibrechannel transfer from the intermediate video server to the requesting
playout video server. Archive transfers may occur between devices controlled by multiple
Device Servers.
Baseband transfers Media may be copied from a baseband source device, such as a cart
machine, VTR or a video servers decoder port, to a video servers encoder port. Baseband
transfers are real-time transfers. Audio and video are automatically routed from the source
device to the destination device according to the A/V routing tables configured for the GMT
list. Baseband transfers may be single-hop or double-hop transfers. Single-hop
transfers copy the media from the source device directly to the requesting playout video
server. Double-hop transfers copy the media from the source device to an intermediate
video server, and then execute a fibrechannel transfer from the intermediate video server
to the requesting playout video server. Baseband transfers may only occur between devices
controlled by a single Device Server. Only the fibrechannel hop of double-hop baseband
transfers may occur between devices controlled by multiple Device Servers.
WAN FTP transfers Media may be copied among video servers using the video servers
native FTP transfer mechanism. This may be accomplished on a local-area or wide-area
network. FTP transfers are data transfers of compressed MPEG or JPEG files and may occur
faster than real time, depending on the bandwidth available on the wide-area network.
Only the local video server, designated as the site manager, need be controlled by a Device
Server.
GMT Components
GMT consists of three fundamental components: Requesters, Distributors and GMT lists.
Requesters are virtual media devices assigned to a Transmission list and associated with
destination devices (playout video servers). Media that is not available in the Requesters
destination device is requested from a Distributor (or Distributors) associated with source
devices. Requests are made when events enter the lookahead of a Transmission list and
cannot be registered with any of the physical media devices assigned to that list.
Distributors are virtual media devices assigned to a GMT list and associated with source
devices. These source devices may be video server ports, cart machines, VTRs, archives or
ProxyFTP devices. Distributors create and run events on the GMT list to accomplish the
transfer of media to the requesting destination device. A single distributor can only support
a single transfer mode, depending on the type of its associated source device, but may be
pointed to or linked with other Distributors supporting other transfer modes. By
chaining Distributors in this manner, search paths may be created to pass requests
through a number of Distributors of different types. The first Distributor whose source
device contains the requested media will execute a transfer - of that Distributors type - to
the Requesters destination device.
GMT Lists are modified Transmission lists used exclusively by GMT. Distributors assigned to
the GMT list will create events to execute transfers of one type or another. Non-real-time
transfers (fibrechannel, archive and WAN FTP) are executed by events registered and run by
30-July-2013 | Page 209 of 336

the Distributors. Baseband transfers are created by Distributors but run by the physical
media devices assigned to the GMT list.
(OPTION) Push Lists are simply Transmission Lists used for a specific purpose other than onair playout. Push Lists are used to push media from a source device to a destination
device ahead of time. Under normal circumstances, Requesters request missing media at
roughly the same rate as events enter the lookahead of the requesting Transmission List.
GMT is driven by the Transmission List and will fulfill requests for missing media as events
undergo the registration process.
A Push List allows GMT to move (push) media in advance of the Transmission List. The
traffic department may create a push list log consisting of spots needed for air tomorrow.
The log file may then be translated into a playlist file by the Harris Broadcast Traffic
Translator and loaded into the Push List.
A Simple GMT System

The illustration below shows a simple fibrechannel GMT system.
A Requester assigned to the Transmission List queries the destination device for availability
of media. If an ID on the Transmission List cannot be registered by the destination device
(because the ID does not exist in the destination device), the Requester passes a request to
the Distributor.
The Distributor is assigned to the GMT List and is in communication with a source device. If
the Distributor, after querying its source device, finds that the media is available, it will
create an event on the GMT List that will initiate a Fibrechannel transfer.
The Distributor will run the event on the GMT List and the media will be copied from the
source device to the destination device. Once the copy process has begun, the source
device will inform the system that the media is now available for registration on the
Transmission List and playout.
30-July-2013 | Page 210 of 336

30-July-2013 | Page 211 of 336

ADC AirFlex
ADC AirFlex
About ADC AirFlex
A common requirement across the majority of the markets that ADC serves is to be able to
break away from scheduled programming to an alternate source or material when required and
subsequently continue the original schedule. Perhaps the most common example is a breaking
news story, but there are other scenarios such as a live event running beyond its scheduled
period.
This enhancement implements the ADC AirFlex function through making use of ADCs
fundamental method of operation- a play list of sequential events loaded into a Transmission
List, with devices assigned to the Transmission List - to provide an automated JIP process using a
special Break-away panel.
This feature allows an operator to address the following Join-In-Progress scenarios:
Live news or other unscheduled events that require cutting away from normal
programming, for a known or unknown duration.
Reoccurring events that do not conform to a specific or regular time, or event boundary.
Live events such as sports, where delays, cancellations, and extensions must be
accommodated.
ADC AirFlex provides the operator a variety of methods to return to the original schedule, such
as:
Rejoining at the point from which the sequence was departed,
Joining at the point at which the schedule would be - had no departure been made
(referred to as Join in Progress or JIP), or
Manually selecting an appropriate point for the rejoining of the schedule.
ADC AirFlex addresses these needs in a manner that provides efficient use of resources, a
streamlined operator interface, and maximum flexibility. As with many aspects of ADC, it is not
intended or designed to support a specific scenario or workflow. Rather, it provides a general
set of flexible tools. These tools, when used with procedures appropriate to each stations
unique operating requirements, provide the ability to manage complex scenarios with minimal
staff and device resources.
IMPORTANT: ADC AirFlex is provided as a standard feature of ADC and does not require
purchase. However, prior to its use the correct number of Breakaway lists and Breakaway
objects must be set for your implementation. If this is not done, the AirFlex functionality will not
work. Contact Harris Broadcast Support to ensure AirFlex functionality is correctly enabled for
your system.
30-July-2013 | Page 212 of 336

ADC AirFlex
Note: If AirFlex is not enabled, the Breakaway panel will appear grayed out on the ribbon bar
and there will be no operational impact on your system.
Note: Because of the interdependencies of this feature, it not recommended to mix Client and
Device Server versions.
An Overview of Components
The following entries provide an overview of the main components of the ADC AirFlex feature.
For details on ADC AirFlex overview, operations, and setup see the ADC AirFlex Reference Guide.
Breakaway List
The ADC AirFlex function uses a breakaway list to manage the current schedule during the
breakaway process. Associated with a Transmission List, the breakaway list operates as a
background process for moving off the current scheduled programming while the breakaway
sequence is in progress and then moving back onto the current schedule when rejoined.
The Breakaway Control Panel

The ADC AirFlex Breakaway Panel is intended to be used in conjunction with other controls,
including the software list control panel, the device control panel, and the ADC FlexSync
duplication control panel.
For the operator, the Breakaway Panel is the most visible manifestation of ADC AirFlex and is
integrated into the existing user interface of the Air Client. For each Transmission List, it can be
invoked from the context menu in the same manner as the list control panel.
Break-away Panel Layout
Break-away: These buttons are used to select the manner in which ADC will break away
from the scheduled events. Selecting a breakaway type and a sequence or router shortcut to
which the breakaway will occur sets up a breakaway, with the timing of the breakaway
determined by the selected breakaway type.
Return: These buttons select the manner in which ADC returns to the original schedule after
the end of the breakaway. The return type selected determines where in the original
schedule the first event following the breakaway is taken. The return type can be selected at
any time after the breakaway is initiated by the operator, even before the actual breakaway
30-July-2013 | Page 213 of 336

ADC AirFlex
occurs. On the other hand, in a dynamic situation the choice of the return type might not be
made until immediately before the end of the breakaway.
Sequences: This is a list of predefined sequences of events, from which the breakaway can
be selected. Rather than having to manually insert the breakaway event by event, this
makes complex operations, including any combination of events, to be instantly available.
The sequences are ADC .LST playlist files and can be created and maintained using standard
processes. Breakaways can also be edited while executing in the same manner as any ADC
playlist.
Router Shortcuts: In some cases, an operator is called on to manually switch various live
sources directly on air in real time. The router shortcuts allow named sources to be instantly
available and can be used during a breakaway, instead of or in combination with sequences.
Router Shortcut Logging: This panel logs the time any routers shortcut is selected. This
provides the operator with a visible record of manual actions, in addition to events on the
list and the As Run.
30-July-2013 | Page 214 of 336

ADC FlexSyncTM
ADC FlexSyncTM
About the Air Client ADC FlexSyncTM
Option
ADC FlexSync is an enhancement to the ADC Air Client that provides a powerful, yet
operationally simple means of duplicating the events and actions of one Transmission List on
another Transmission List. While not an automatic process, ADC FlexSync provides tremendous
operational flexibility, allowing any combination of independent and duplicated operations. The
user is provided with a dedicated duplication control panel with status for both lists, including
the last time a duplication was performed, and if any edits have since been applied to either list.
At any time, the user can duplicate a lists events (with an option to apply time synchronization)
while allowing lists to operate independently and avoiding the inadvertent replication of
operational errors that may occur on either of the lists. ADC FlexSync also provides action-byaction manual control of either or both of the lists.
ADC FlexSync is not limited to any particular utilization, deployment, or workflow. Rather, it is
general purpose functionality that can be used to support multiple operational requirements.
Purchase Note: ADC FlexSync is a for-purchase option to Air Client. Contact your Harris
Broadcast Automation Sales representative for more information.
For details reference the ADC FlexSync Reference document.
Implementation
In an ADC system, Transmission Lists operate within a Device Server. These lists control devices
and provide the actual execution of the playout. Once an Air Client is connected to the Device
Server(s), the Transmission Lists are accessible via its user interface. When ADC FlexSync is
installed on an Air Client, a relationship between any two lists can be defined in which one is
designated as the Normal (source) list and the other as the Duplicate (destination) list. These List
Duplication Pairs are defined in advance and have no effect on operation until utilized.
30-July-2013 | Page 215 of 336

ADC FlexSyncTM
Deployment and Workflows

The ability to duplicate lists as needed provides a solution for numerous operational models and
scenarios. The following are some of the many different operations the ADC FlexSync option
can support.
Duplication of Lists Between ADC Systems: ADC FlexSync can provide List Duplication
between independent ADC systems. These systems may be located at the same or separate
sites and the Air Client on which ADC Flex Sync is installed can be located at any location
where it can maintain a network API connection to both systems.
Maintaining a Backup Device Server: In a simple Main \ Backup Device Server pair scenario,
ADC FlexSync can easily maintain a list on the backup. In this case, devices would not be
available on the backup Device Server, so the lists would not execute on the backup system,
unless the Missing Media Switch-Only were used. However, duplicating lists to reflect day
of air changes, as well as the progress of the schedule, provides significant operational
advantages if a switch to the backup is required- with no additional resource requirements.
N to 1 Site or System Backup: In a single aggregated backup system scenario providing

backup or disaster recovery for multiple Normal systems, ADC FlexSync can provide
arbitrary mapping between any two lists.
N + 1 Site or System Backup: With a single set of backup resources - both the Duplicate List
and its device resources - ADC FlexSync can be used to provide backup for multiple Normal
Lists on an as-needed basis. While this approach does not provide continuous redundancy, it
can be used to provide a significant measure of protection without excessive resource
requirements.
Peer-to-Peer Site or System Backup: Where multiple ADC systems exist, instead of providing
an additional ADC system and resources dedicated to backup, ADC FlexSync can be used to
expand the existing on-air systems to provide mutual redundancy.
N + 1 List Backup: In supporting List Duplication between multiple lists on the same Device
Server, ADC FlexSync can be used to provide both redundancy and operational flexibility.
Disaster Recovery: For disaster recovery site deployments ADC FlexSync allows simple and
rapid transfer of operation to an alternate location should circumstances require.
30-July-2013 | Page 216 of 336

LinkList
LinkList
About LinkList
Many broadcasters already are or soon will be faced with the need to originate multiple feeds
from a single location.
While some feeds might be similar, there may be a requirement to breakaway from the
primary feed and insert region-specific spots or to provide dual feeds of standard and high
definition material.
Air Clients LinkList option is an automated solution to this challenge. It provides operators with
an easy means of creating different playlists for a number of feeds --- each playlist slightly
different from the other.
LinkList allows playlists to be linked together and controlled from a single master playlist. Once
playlists are linked, changes made to the master playlist in content or event order are
mirrored by linked lists, ensuring that all associated events are synchronized.
Link List also supports multiple master lists within the Link List configuration. This allows Link List
to have a wider operational scope and is beneficial for multi-station groups that want to utilize
Link List to provide for targeted commercial insertion.
Purchase Note: ADC LinkList is a for-purchase option to Air Client. Contact your Harris Broadcast
Automation Sales representative for more information.
Reference Note: For information on the operation and configuration of this feature see the ADC
LinkList Reference document.
Note: List Redundancy and LinkList can coexist on the same ADC system, but not use the same
lists.
30-July-2013 | Page 217 of 336

Air Client Installation

Client Notes
Air Client / Media Client for Device Server v11 and Device Server v12 have been merged into
single Air Client and Media Client streams. Starting from Device Server release v12.16, Air
Client/Media Client v4.16 are compatible with both the v11.59 and v12.16 v12.20 of Device
Server software.
For more details, please contact Harris Broadcast Technical Support. Also reference the Media
Client Operations and Install Reference and the Air Client Operations and Install Reference.
About v11 Client Validation

Version 4.20 was the last release where the Air Client and Media Client applications were tested
with Device Server version 11. This means that the 4.21 clients were only validated with Device
Server version 12.21, Air Client 4.20.23, and Media Client 4.20.20 were tested with Device
Server version 11.61.4.
Rev-Lock Condition with version 12.21/4.21 release

Implementation of enhancement 76797 (Redesign of the List locking mechanism) in Device
Server v21.21 has resulted in a rev-lock condition. This requires all software be updated to
12.21/4.21 or higher release levels when upgrading or installing ADC system software.
Third-party applications with lock mechanism based on zero Done Count can maintain this
mechanism as it is preserved in Device Server logic.
Device Server v 12.21 supports list locking by zero done count (old mechanism, for 3rd
party apps) and by API commands ListLockList, ListUnlockList (new mechanism).
Air Client v 4.21 uses only new API commands and doesn't use zero done count.
For details see enhancement 76797 in Device Server v21.21.19 Release Notes.
Start up Switches
Thev12 switches are needed only on start up, for the first Device Server the client connects to.
After that, the operator can use MultiServer login to connect to any Device Server.
- /v12 or -v12 is optional in shortcut for the Air Client /Media Client connecting to the Device
Server v12. This is the first Device Server it connects to.
30-July-2013 | Page 218 of 336

MutiServer login Note: MultiServer login allows connection to Device Servers of different
versions from the same client at the same time. The operator must manually choose the type of
server to be connected and the name.
Network IP
Device Sever v12 uses IPv6. Ensure IPV6 is properly enabled on the Client PC. Its connection
information is obtained automatically
Upgrade Note
When upgrading from an ADC v11 to ADCv12 system or when implementing a new ADC v12
system, the proper Database scripts must be used to create the database (if it is a new ADC v12
system) or to expand the database fields (if upgrading from an existing ADC v11 system). Failure
to do this will result in the ADC database not working. Contact Harris Broadcast Automation
Support for details.
To Install Air Client on a Workstation

This section describes how to install the Air Client on a client workstation using the Installation
Wizard.
If installing a new version of Air Client over an existing version: Before installing, reboot the
computer. Do not run Air Client on this station after rebooting and before installing the new
version. If this is not done, the installation may not complete successfully, and may have to be
restarted.
1. Run the Installation Wizard (AirClientInstall.exe).
2. Read the Welcome dialog. When ready to continue press Next.
3. On the License dialog the Read and accept the license, and then press Next.
4. On the Setup Type dialog select the setup type for traffic AsRun and schedule formats:
5. On the Server Name and Destination dialog specify the following:
Options are:
Enterprise (Default): This is the most typical selection.
Sony
When ready to continue press Next.
6. On the Installation Confirmation dialog, click Install. The application is installed.
Installation Path: Accept the default or - if you like - press Browse to change the
directory into which the application program files will be installed.
Client Name: This is the name of the client workstation the application is being installed
on.
30-July-2013 | Page 219 of 336

Server Name: This is the name of the primary Device Server the application will first
connect to.
When ready to continue press Next.
7. On the Completion dialog, click Finish to complete the installation.
Managing the Desktop Shortcut for Air

Client
The Air Client shortcut icon is used to launch the Air Client application from an icon on the
desktop.
About Shortcut Parameters

Before launching Air Client, create a shortcut and specify parameters in the shortcut target, such
as the file path to the application, the client name, and the Device Server name.
Other parameters that can be specified include:
the backup Device Server name.
the maximum length of a materials name.
the maximum length of a materials title.
the platform the Device Server is running on.
Format: <Path> <Client Name> <Device Server name> <Backup Device Server name> <Max ID
Length> <Max Title Length> <DS Platform>
Example: The following is provided to illustrate the basic path and parameter structure. (Your
paths and file names may appear different.)
30-July-2013 | Page 220 of 336

Limitations:

To Manage the shortcut on the Desktop

1. Open My Computer on desktop.
2. Open Local Disk (C:).
3. Open Air Client folder.
4. Right mouse click and hold on the Air Client .exe file and drag to the desktop.
5. Select Create Shortcut(s) here.
6. Define the shortcut properties by right clicking on the icon and selecting Properties.
30-July-2013 | Page 221 of 336

7. Click the Shortcut tab. The Target: field should contain a path following this format:
[file path] [client name] [server name] [backup name] {material ID length} {material title
length} {platform}
Modify the entries as required:
NOTE: Remember to include a space between the entries.
IMPORTANT: All clients connecting to the same Database and Device Server's in a facility
should be configured the same: IDLEN=32 TITLELEN=32.
[file path]: The file path of the Air Client application is the path the shortcut follows to
launch Air Client. This is defined for you when you create a shortcut.
[client name]: Specify the name of the client, using no more than eight characters. Each
client must have a unique name on the network. For example: ACLIENT1.
The client name should be the same as the PCs name just without the hyphen. For
example: PC windows login = ACLIENT-1, session login for Client Application = ACLIENT1
[server name]: Specify the name of the server to connect to when launching. For
example: MAIN_DS.
[backup name]: Specify a backup server to connect to in the event the main server fails.
For example: BACKUP_DS
IMPORTANT Multi-Server Logon Note: With multiple server login the backup server
name is not needed on the shortcut command line.
{material ID length}: Use the idlen parameter to specify the maximum number of
characters (up to 32) the ID can contain. For example, Idlen=32.
{material title length}: Use the titlelen parameter to specify the maximum number of
characters (up to 32) for the material title. For example: Titlelen=32.
{platform}: If the server you are connecting to runs Microsoft Windows NT, enter /nt or
\nt.
Enter /nt to enable long device and playlist names.
Air Client's 'List Names' functionality requires absence of '/nt' in the command line
parameters on the applications desktop shortcut.
Without /NT = Air Client displays the List Names configured on the Air Client.
With /NT = Air Client displays the List Names configured on the Device Server.
v12 switches are needed only on start up for the first Device Server the client connects
to. After that, the operator can use MultiServer login to connect to any Device Server.
30-July-2013 | Page 222 of 336

/v12 or -v12 is optional in shortcut for the Air Client /Media Client connecting to the
Device Server v12. This is the first Device Server it connects to.
ODBC Connections and Networking

For information on configuring Harris Broadcast Client Computers for ODBC connectivity to SQL
Server 2012, see ADC_SQL_Server_2012_Installation_Guide.
For information on system networking, see ADC_Networking_Best_Practices.
30-July-2013 | Page 223 of 336

Configuring System Components

Configuring Multiple Device Server
Connections
Air Client can be configured to connect to up to eight device servers on the network. See Getting
Started: Managing Server Connections for setup details.
Note: Multiple server login (multiserver login) is only available to customers who have
purchased it. Clients supporting this feature will have a Servers option on the Air Client desktop.
Limitations:

Configuring List Options

displayed
30-July-2013 | Page 224 of 336

2. Choose the desired List, and then click OK. A playlist window is opened.
3. Right click on the playlist window and from the pop-up menu select Options. The Play
Options dialog is displayed.
4. Select the Counts tab. Use this tab to specify the lookahead value for a transmission list and
the display of done events in a playlist.
Configure the following parameters as required:
About Minimum Difference between Values: The minimum Look Ahead value is 11 and
the minimum difference between the Look Ahead and Done Count values must be more
than 1.
Look Ahead: Enter the number of events in the lookahead field to define a playlists
lookahead range. The lookahead is the number of events whose media Air Client will
verify the availability of in a playlist. Events within the lookahead range will display in
blue if they are primary events and are located on the specified device. Events out of
range display in black. If an event is within the lookahead range, but is missing media, it
will display in red. Setting the lookahead for the entire list uses more system resources.
30-July-2013 | Page 225 of 336

This value is configured as per the customers request. If a duration based look ahead is
configured (Done in NTConfig only) than this field is not used. *Typically between 50250 events. If GMT is used this value may be lower.
Done Count: Determine the number of done events that display in a playlist. The Done
count should not exceed the Lookahead value. This value is configured as per the
customers request. Default should be 4.
Note on List Lock: If a list is experiencing a List Lock, the List Lock is not cleared, and it has
been ensured that no other client or process is modifying the list, then the Done Count can be
set to a value of 2 or greater in this list's Options > Counts configuration tab.
5. Select the Times tab. Use this tab to specify parameters for start times for certain kinds of
events.
Timed List: Check to enable. When enabled, this parameter allows Hard Start events to
run at predetermined time in the Time field. This must be enabled when using Hard
Timed events.
Update On-Air Time: Check to enable. When Auto Ripple is turned on the actual start
time of an event will update the Time field so the AsRun log reflects the accurate time.
Auto Ripple allows this feature to work correctly.
Auto Ripple Times: Check to enable. When you change the duration of an event, the
projected start time for the events that follow are automatically changed based on the
durations for each event. Auto Ripple will ripple the times down from the On-Air event
down to the next Hard Start or to the end of the list.
Deleting or adding events to a playlist will cause the playlist start times to be
recalculated.
Auto rippling will stop at a hard start event.
Hard start events will interrupt any preceding events whose times overlap its time.
6. Select the Threading tab. Use this tab to control threading behavior.
30-July-2013 | Page 226 of 336

Thread After Break: Check to enable threading events immediately following a

secondary Break line. You will not have to manually thread events after the Break line if
this is selected. Breaks are only used when the automation is playing spots and not
program material.
Keep List Threaded: Check to enable keeping as many devices as possible threaded in
the lookahead. If an event is inserted into a playlist, the event is cued and subsequent
events are unthreaded, as necessary.
NOTE: When unchecked, events in the range specified in the Thread Time: field are cued.
Thread Time: (Default: 00:02:00:00) Keep List Thread time determines which events
within the specified time get threaded and cued. * This applies when Keep List Threaded
option is not selected.
Entering a value of two minutes in the Thread Time: field, for example, will cue events
that will play within two minutes of the current time.
7. Select the Tensioning tab. Use this tab to control tensioning.
30-July-2013 | Page 227 of 336

Release Tension When Cued: Check to enable. After a VTR event is cued, the tape is
tension released. The tape is tensioned when the event reaches the Standby On Time.
Tension After Up Counter: Check to enable keeping the following VTR event ready to
play when playing out of the Live event.
About Tension Events:
Tension events following an upcount event assume a fixed duration for the upcount
event, instead of an indefinite duration. All events within the Standby On time that
follow the upcount event are tensioned on. This is used for live broadcasts when the
duration is known.
Otherwise, the events are tension released and the next event must be tensioned
on manually by clicking the Ready button on the control panel.
8. Select the Skip Control tab. Use this tab to determine how certain events are skipped.
Skip Bad Events: Check to enable to skip missing events. The list will skip missing (red)
events in the list and, no matter what setting is specified for Switch to Black or Station
ID on Skip, it will NOT switch to another source during the transition.
If one primary event or two consecutive primary events are missing in the list, the
list skips them and continues running.
If there are 3 consecutive primary events missing in the list, the list will stop.
Station ID On Skip: When enabled, the pre-defined input (switcher configuration) is

shown ONLY when a GOOD event that is running is skipped using the hardware control
panel or the software control panel and that input will be switched only during the
preroll of the next event. This setting will override the Switch to Black option.
9. Select the Misc. tab. Use this tab to configure miscellaneous options which apply to playlist
behavior in a transmission list window.
30-July-2013 | Page 228 of 336

Switch To Black: Check to enable. Allows automation to automatically switch to the predefined input (switcher configuration) ONLY when the list stops.
If the customer is to use Station ID on Skip, do not select this option.
Play Hard Hits: Check to enable. This allows the operator to manually play a Hard Start
event at a time other than its pre-designated time.
If this is not set, the operator cannot play an event that has a hard start if the playlist
has stopped running.
Contact Start: Check to enable. To trigger an event on the Playlist with a General
Purpose Interface (GPI) contact, click the Contact Start button. Pressing a contact is
equivalent to clicking the Play button on the control panel.
NOTE: This parameter is usually not turned on unless customer is using GPIs to trigger
events on the Playlist.
Auto A-B Routing: Check to enable alternate primary events switcher routing between
the A and B input channels. When enabled, you can use the wipe, mix and mixed
transition effects on two consecutive primary events. Otherwise attempting to do so
would cause the transmission of black when the switch occurs.
NOTE: This parameter is typically disabled (unchecked).
Play ID Time Mismatches: Check to enable. When enabled and a Playlist is appended,
any events that mismatch the record in an LMS database environment will play as per
what the original traffic log dictated.
ID Title mismatch checks ID title pairs from the transmission list against the database
and cassette in a cart machine. Normally, the ID and titles on the transmission list match
the database and cassette and no errors are generated by the system when a list is
loaded.
NOTE: This feature is only supported for customers using the Sony LMS database
environment and requires the use of a tape preparation database product, such as
Media Client.
30-July-2013 | Page 229 of 336

10. Select the Security tab. Use this tab to configure security and list confirmations for any
modification of a Play List.
Link to Recycle Bin: Check to enable. When the Air Client software user deletes one or
several events from the Transmission list, if the Link to Recycle Bin option of the
Transmission list is checked, those events are written into the RECYCLE.lst file.
Confirm event edition (Revise): Enable the Confirmations for the edition done with
Revise (Revise, Insert Primary / Secondary in the corresponding List. Disables the
possibility to insert while in Revise mode.
When this option is enabled (checked), each time and operator toggles Revise-off for
any event (i.e. leaves edit mode), a confirmation message is displayed.
The operator can choose to:
Click Apply to apply the event modifications.
Click Find Next to locate the next event.
Click Cancel to abort the operation.
Confirm list modification (del/cut. Insert, update, move): Enable the Confirmations for
the edition done without Revise in the corresponding List. When this option is enabled
(checked), each time and operator modifies a list (i.e. inserts / cuts / deletes / modifies /
moves an event), a message similar to the following is displayed.
Click Apply to apply the event modifications.
Click Find Next to locate the next event.
Click Cancel to abort the operation.
Fast Find and Apply function: When enabled (checked), this option allows the
operator to find the occurrences of the concerned Primary event, and easily apply the
modification to them (2 key presses), and allows a very fast check of the modification
for each occurrence of the corresponding Primary event.
30-July-2013 | Page 230 of 336

If not enabled (unchecked), the Cancel/Close button is always pre-selected after the use
of Find Next Prim or Apply buttons.
Click Apply (or press the Return or Space key on the keyboard) to apply the event
modifications. (Find Next Primary button is pre-selected for next action.)
Click Find Next Prim to locate the next primary event. (Apply button is pre-selected
for next action.)
Click Cancel/Close to abort the operation.
Fast Find Active / Inactive Windows:
The Fast Find mechanism applies for the confirmation windows:

Modify Primary
Del/Cut Primary
Insert before Primary
Del/Cut Secondary of Primary
Insert Secondary under Primary
The Fast Find mechanism does not apply for the following confirmation windows.
For these windows the Cancel/Close button is pre-selected and the Find Next button
is grayed out.
Modify Secondary of Primary
Del/Cut events (bloc) to
Move events (bloc) to before Primary
Update Event against Database,
Update List against Database,
Ripple Time from event ,
Clear Done Events n to n,
Replace event with .
Delay from Air warning: Check to enable a delay from air warning of an event or list
modification. Once enabled, specify Delay Value and Polling Value.
If the event or list modification focused in the confirmation window is at less than a
configurable delay from Air (list in Play), a red warning mentions: In Forbidden
Area!.
This warning is dynamic: If the confirmation window is opened out of the Forbidden
Area, and still opened when entering in it, then the Warning appears. This
notification does not have to be frame accurate.
The verification of the delay from Air can be done each 5 seconds (to be sure to be
warned at 30 seconds from air the delay value must be configured to 35 seconds).
Delay Value: Active when Delay from Air warning is selected. Specify the delay period in
hh:mm:ss from Air to trigger the Warning. (Minimum: 1 second, Default: 00:05:00)
30-July-2013 | Page 231 of 336

Polling Value: Active when Delay from Air warning is selected. Specify the polling period
in seconds of the frequency checking if in Forbidden Area when a Confirmation
window is opened. (Minimum: 1 second, Default: 5)
Log List Edition: Enable (check) / Disable (uncheck) logging of any edition in the List.
This option works in conjunction with Operation Log functionality. To make this
parameter active on the corresponding List, enable Edition on the Properties >
Operation Log configuration window.
Log List Control: Enable (check) / Disable (uncheck) logging of any Control action in the
List.
This option works in conjunction with Operation Log functionality. To make this
parameter active on the corresponding List, enable List Control on the Properties >
Operation Log configuration window.
Albrecht VPS Options: The following options are only displayed when the VPS.bin file is
present in the Air Client installation directory.
Use Albrecht VPS Title Editor: Check to use a customized editor for the title of
events for the Albrecht VPS device. This editor provides selection of values, validates
inputs, and formats the title in the required fashion for this driver.
Allow non-title field edits: Check to allow non-title fields of events to be edited.
Leave unchecked to prevent changes being made to these fields.
Allow non-VPS field edits: Check to allow the user to edit fields of events other than
those for the Albrecht VPS device. Leave unchecked to prevent changes being made
to events for devices other than the Albrecht VPS.
VPS Note: A VPS.BIN file is required to enable this functionality. Those customers who
have purchased the Albrecht functionality, please contact Harris Broadcast Automation
Customer Support for the VPN.BIN file. Ensure the VPS.BIN file is placed in the Air Client
installation directory (i.e. the same directory as the aclnt32.exe file).
Configuring Window Column Settings

1. Open a playlist window (View, New, etc.), or a Database window.
2. Right click on the window and from the pop-up menu select Columns. The Column
setting dialog is displayed.
30-July-2013 | Page 232 of 336

3. Assign columns: Use arrow keys to move options from Available pane to Displayed pane.
Use the move keys to select (>, >>) and deselect (<, <<) entries.
>: Move a single entry from Available pane to Displayed pane

>>: Move all entries from Available pane to Displayed pane
<: Move a single entry from Displayed pane back to Available pane
<<: Move all entries from Displayed pane back to Available pane
4. To set or reset a column width:
Ensure the column is listed in the Displayed columns pane. Column width can only be
edited when a column is in this pane.
Select the entry in the Displayed columns pane, and then enter a new value in the
Width field. You can also use the spin arrows to increment or decrement the entry.
(Recommended: Accept the default settings.)
5. To order columns, select an entry in the Displayed columns pane, and then
Click the Up button to move the entry up in the list
Click the Down button to move the entry down in the list
6. (Option) To Edit Column Settings
Ensure the column is listed in the Available columns pane. Column settings can only be
edited when a column is in this pane.
Click Edit. The Column setting dialog for that column is displayed.
30-July-2013 | Page 233 of 336

Use the down arrow to select from a list of alternate parameter settings, and the click
OK. (The list of available parameters settings is different for each column.)
7. (Option) To Add a Column:
Click Add
Enter a name in the Column Name dialog and then press OK. The new column name
appears in the Available columns pane.
You can now:
Set column width. See step 5.
Specify column settings for the new column. See Step 7.
Rename the column. Click Rename and in the name dialog specify a different name.
This action is only available for a newly added column.
8. (Option) To Remove a Column
9.
Ensure the column is listed in the Available columns pane. Column entries can only be
removed when the column is in this pane.
Click Remove.
The system prompts for confirmation of the action. Click OK. The Column is removed.
(Option) To save and reuse the new column organization/entries as a template, see
Managing Column Templates for details.
30-July-2013 | Page 234 of 336

Managing Column Templates

Operators can create a customer-specifiable default columns template that can be recalled as
required, thus making configuration of the Air Client easier and quicker. For customers
upgrading multiple Air Clients this approach is especially useful as they are able to create a
template based on one list and optionally apply that template to all lists on all Air Clients.
To Save a Column Template

1. Configure the Windows Columns settings as required. (For details see Configuring Window
Column Settings.
2. Once window column organization/entries are configured on the dialog, the operator can
choose how to save and work with the settings as a template.
3. To save the current configuration as a template:
Click Export. The Export Column template screen is displayed.
Browse to the desired location, specify a file name, and then click OK. The file is saved to
4. To import a previously saved column configuration template:
Click Import. The Import Column template screen is displayed.
Browse to the location of the desired template file, select the file, and then click OK.
5. To reset all settings of the current list to default settings:
Click Reset to Factory Defaults.
A Confirmation message is displayed. Click OK to accept.
6. To apply the current configuration /specified template to all existing configurations for all
lists (i.e. overwrite all configurations):
30-July-2013 | Page 235 of 336

Click Apply to All.
To Apply a Column Template or Reset to Default Settings

1. Launch Air Client.
2. Select Properties->Environment-> Default List Columns.
3. Choose the parameters to use as required
Import Template- Apply template to all Transmission Lists: Browse to a previously

saved column configuration template file. Select a template and click OK. The
designated template is applied to all existing List configurations.
Factory Defaults- Apply template to all Transmission Lists: Click this option to reset all
settings of all transmission lists to default settings.
Configuring Window Font Settings

1. Open a playlist window (View, New, etc.), or a Database window.
2. Right click on the window and from the pop-up menu select Fonts. The Font setting
30-July-2013 | Page 236 of 336

3. Configure the following parameters as required: Font style, Size, and Color.
Configuring Event and Window Parameter

Colors
Use this procedure Air Client set color displayed for events, cells, and rows. It provides the
ability to:
Add more event color options that reflect the status of the primary event color differences
for - media / no metadata, metadata / no media, metadata / media but not QC'ed, media /
yesterday's metadata
Verify other elements needed for correct on-air playout (IE Captioning Files)
Color code primaries based on type (IE Commercial, Promo, Movie, etc)
The ability to assign colors supports operational situations where the user needs to be able to
quickly ascertain the type of content that a primary event represents. This capability can be
used to distinguish different types of program content (IE movie, sport, drama, news) or
different types of interstitial content (IE commercial, promo, PSA, political).
The primary reason of this more granular methodology to event identification is to:
Allow users to differentiate between paid advertisements, promotional content and political
content so that, inadvertently, paid commercial content is not removed from the schedule.
Allow the events that comprise the playlist to be more easily identified as transitions from
programming to interstitial elements will be more clearly visible.
Enhanced Color Codes

With Air Client v4.18 and higher this capability has been expanded to add more event color
options that reflect the status of the primary event color differences for - media / no metadata,
30-July-2013 | Page 237 of 336

metadata / no media, metadata / media but not QC'ed, media / yesterday's metadata, etc.. This
enhanced functionality requires using the Content Menu configuration functionality added to
Media Client v4.18 and higher, and implementation of a new script (ASDB_Add_Column.sql) for
the Automation Database.
Single Spot Support: Air Client v4.18 and higher expanded the color states that can be
displayed in Air Client for single spot events.
Multi-segment Support: Air Client v4.19 and higher expands this function to support multisegments. All segments in a multi-seg record will have the same content attribute as it is not
possible to set the content attribute for each segment individually.
These descriptors are visible on the playlist and serve as markers for the enhanced color
codes. The enhanced color codes override the existing color values as a program (event
with segments) that also carries the movie marker would have a different color from a
program with no category marker.
Note: Multi-Spot is not supported.
To specify Event Colors

Use the following procedure to configure event, cell, and row colors.
1. Open a playlist window (View, New, etc.).
2. Right click on the playlist window and from the pop-up menu select Colors. The Select
Colors setting dialog is displayed. This dialog allows a user to specify display colors for
specific content in a playlist.
3. Select the Event Colors tab to change the events colors.
From the Event Type list pane choose an event type
Change the following colors for the selected event type as required:
Foreground: Set foreground color
Background: Set background color
30-July-2013 | Page 238 of 336

Set Default: Set colors to default
When specifying an event foreground or background color, select a new color from the
color palette.
Select the down arrow ( ) to choose from a list of colors.
Select the ( ) button beside each dropdown arrow to select from a standard
color pallet selection. (Option: Click Define Custom Colors >> to display an
expanded standard Color palette.)
4. Select the Select Colors tab to change the default selection colors.
30-July-2013 | Page 239 of 336

From the Selection Type list pane choose a selection type.
Change the following colors for the selected event type as required:
Background: Set background color
Set Default: Set colors to default
When specifying a background color, select a new color from the color palette.
Select the down arrow ( ) to choose from a list of colors.
Select the ( ) button beside each dropdown arrow to select from a standard
color pallet selection. (Option: Click Define Custom Colors >> to display an
expanded standard Color palette.)
30-July-2013 | Page 240 of 336

Managing Color Templates

Operators can create a customer-specifiable default color template that can be recalled as
required, thus making configuration of the Air Client easier and quicker. For customers
upgrading multiple Air Clients this approach is especially useful as they are able to create a
template based on one list and optionally apply that template to all lists on all Air Clients.
To Save a Color Template

1. Configure the Windows Parameter Colors settings as required. (For details see Configuring
Window Parameter Colors.
2. Once window parameter colors (Event Colors tab and Select Colors tab) are configured on
the Select Colors dialog, the operator can choose how to save and work with the settings as
a template.
30-July-2013 | Page 241 of 336

3. To save the current configuration as a template:
Click Export. The Export Column template screen is displayed.
Browse to the desired location, specify a file name, and then click OK. The file is saved to
4. To import a previously saved column configuration template:
Click Import. The Import Color template screen is displayed.
Browse to the location of the desired template file, select the file, and then click OK.
5. To set all settings of the current list to factory default settings:
Click Factory Defaults.
6. To reset all settings of the current list to default settings:
30-July-2013 | Page 242 of 336

Click Reset to Defaults.
7. To save the new color organization as the Default template for use with the current
configuration and as a template for all lists not configured yet:
Click Use as Default.
The system warns the action will overwrite the existing template. Click OK to accept.
To Manage Colors and Apply Across all Transmission Lists

1. Launch Air Client.
2. Select Properties->Environment-> Default Event Colors.
Edit Default Color Setting: Click to launch the Default Grid Colors settings dialog. Use
this dialog to set event and cell colors. For details see To specify Event Colors.
Apply Default to All: When selected the application discards all custom settings are
reapplies default settings to all lists.
30-July-2013 | Page 243 of 336

Configuring System Properties

Environment Properties
Use this procedure to configure the following environment properties: List Options, System
Directory Paths, List Directory Paths, Device Status Colors, Device Storage Colors, and Cell
Colors.
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Environment icon (
Environment Options dialog.
). This opens the
2. Select the List Directories tab. Use this tab to specify directory paths for: Playlist, Compile
List, and Sectional List.
Click the down arrows to select an entry from dropdown lists, OR Click the browse
button () to search for available paths.
On a typical installation, the file paths are set as follows:
Play List: E:\PLAYLIST
Compile List: E:\COMPLIST
Sectional List: E:\SECLIST
3. Select the System Directories tab. Use this tab to specify system directory paths for:
Database, Text Files, Traffic Log, and Mismatched Files.
30-July-2013 | Page 244 of 336

Click the down arrows to select an entry from dropdown lists, OR Click the browse
button () to search for appropriate file paths.
On a typical installation, the file paths are set as follows:
Database: D:\
Text Files: E:\ASRUN\
Traffic Log: E:\TRAFFIC\
Mismatched Files: E:\MISMATCH\
File Server Path: E:\SERVER\
4. Select the List Options tab. Use this tab to configure how a playlist processes field
information when an ID is entered or a list is loaded or validated. This is where Automatic
Event Validation can be set up.
30-July-2013 | Page 245 of 336

Configure / select the following options as required:
Adjust Durations When SOM Changes. This option adjusts the duration of an event
according to changes made to an events SOM. If the SOM is increased, the duration is
decreased by an equal amount, for example. Or, if the SOM is decreased, the duration is
increased by an equal amount. This ensures that the event will not play beyond its EOM
time.
IMPORTANT: For this parameter to work correctly, ensure Device Server Clocking
parameter: Round DF is set to off: (Configuration Tool-> Configured Devices-> File menu
in Configured Devices-> Clock-> Set Source-PC: PC Clock; Round DF: OFF.)
Update Events with Valid SOMs. This option changes all events SOMs according to
their records in the database when they are entered into a playlist. It will overwrite any
events specified SOMs that differ from their database records. Optionally, events
without specified SOMs can be assigned SOMs according to their records in the
database by clicking Verify List Against DB on the Events ribbon tab. To verify one
event, or a range of events, select the event and click Verify Event Against DB on the
Events ribbon tab.
Check IDs Against Valid ID List. When checked, an ID entered into a playlist not located
in the database will be checked against the Valid IDs list. Otherwise, an error dialog box
opens when an ID is entered but not found in the Valid ID list if the Notify When ID Not
Found option is enabled.
Use List Durations. When this option is enabled (checked), Air Client uses the durations
of events in the playlist, not the database. When this option is disabled (unchecked),
durations specified in the database are used.
Normally when a list is loaded, appended, or inserted, each events ID is checked against
the database and if it is found, the event metadata is updated. However, with Use List
Durations enabled, any non-null durations present in the playlist are retained; they are
30-July-2013 | Page 246 of 336

not updated from the database as some of these events could intentionally have
durations that (may) differ from the database duration of their ID.
Note: The Verify copy against DB option and the Use List Durations options are
mutually exclusive. (i.e. They cannot both be enabled; its either on or the other.)
Normally when a list is loaded, appended, or inserted, if Use List Durations is enabled,
each events ID is checked against the database and if it is found, the event metadata is
updated. In this case Verify Copy Against Database will be disabled so any
copied/pasted event will keep the List Duration.
Title Mismatch. Title mismatch occurs if the value of an events title field does not
match the events record in the database. If Title Mismatch option is enabled, a title
mismatch file will be created anytime list is loaded or appended to Transmission List and
title mismatch occurs. A title mismatch file is a list of IDs whose titles in the playlist
differ from those in the database.
Duration Mismatch. When checked, the system will create a Duration Mismatch file
listing events that have a duration that does not match the IDs duration in the database
within the specified number of frames as specified in the Max. Frame Difference field.
The Max. Frame Difference field is displayed when the Duration Mismatch option is
checked.
Allow Secondary Event Hiding. This allows the user to use the option of Secondary
Event Hiding in the right click Playlist Options menu.
Use GMT Pull List. The GMT Pull List option allows to list in the Pull List only the clips
missing in the devices assigned to the List and not in a GMT source device usable for this
List.
Maximum Frame Difference. (This option is displayed when Duration Mismatch is

checked.) If the difference between an events Dur time and its records Dur time
exceeds the frame value specified in the Max. frame difference: field, the event will be
logged in the mismatch file.
Clear Reconciliation Keys on Edit. When this option is checked, editing events will
remove the reconciliation key, if any, from those that have been edited to change the
ID.
Clear Reconciliation Keys on Copy. When this option is checked, copying events will
remove the reconciliation key, if any, from those that have been copied.
Clear Fields When ID Not Found. Select this option to clear the title and SOM fields
when an ID is entered but not found in either the database. The duration will default to
30 seconds. This prevents events from containing the wrong SOMs and DURs when an
events ID is edited and is not found in the database. Otherwise, when an ID is changed
and does not match an ID in the database, the fields do not clear.
Notify When Database Fails. When an ID cannot be verified in the database because of
a database failure, use this option so Air Client will notify you.
Notify When ID Not Found. When checked, a dialog box will alert you when an event ID
entered into a playlist is not found in the database or the Valid IDs list.
30-July-2013 | Page 247 of 336

Use List Titles. This option uses the titles of events from a traffic list instead of the
database when loaded into a playlist. If this option is not checked, titles listed in the
database are used.
Warn On Edit of Playing Event. If this option is checked, editing an event that is playing
results in a dialog box notifying you that the event is playing.
Retain Segment Numbers. When a single spot event is inserted in a playlist with a
specified segment number, the segment number is removed. To disable this, select this
option to retain the segment number.
Auto Focus Event Centered. During on air play back the user can jump back to the on air
event if the list is scrolled down further on the playlist. It will also allow the on air event
to be centered in the list with the done events above in the window.
Verify copy against DB. When this option is enabled (checked), an event that is copied
and pasted to another location in the playlist or into another playlist will be verified for
accuracy against the database. If they differ, the event metadata is updated to match
the database.
Normally when a list is loaded, appended, or inserted, each events ID is checked against
the database and if it is found, the event metadata is updated.
Note: The Verify copy against DB option and the Use List Durations options are
mutually exclusive. (i.e. They cannot both be enabled; its either on or the other.)
Normally when a list is loaded, appended, or inserted, if Verify Copy Against Database is
enabled, each events ID is checked against the database and if it is found, the event
metadata is updated. In this case Use List Durations will be disabled so any
copied/pasted event will automatically validate its metadata against the Database.
Clear Reconciliation Keys on Cut. When this option is checked, cutting events will
remove the reconciliation key, if any, from those that have been cut.
Verify Single Event against DB: When a single event is added to a playlist, it will be
verified for accuracy against the database.
When Verify Single Event Against DB is enabled and a Verify Event Against DB is
performed, only the highlighted Event is verified against the Database, and nothing is
done to any other instances of that Event on the List.
When Verify Single Event Against DB is not enabled and a Verify Event Against DB is
performed, the Air Client verifies all instances of that Event on the List against the
Database.
Audible Time To Next: Enable (check) this option to allow Air Client to emit the Audible
Cues through the sound card of the Air Client computer. This configuration saved to /
load from the Air Clients .ini file.
With this option enabled an operator can specify event type Q (Audible Time to Next) in
the playlist Type column. Audible Time to Next provides an audible countdown starting
30 seconds from a commercial break into the next live event. To minimize affect on
existing functionality N (Time to Next) is automatically set and hidden from an
operator when letter Q is entered.
30-July-2013 | Page 248 of 336

5. Select the Status Colors tab.
Select a device status (e.g. Normal, OnAir, Error).
Select a color from the dropdown list or that selection.
6. Select the Storage Options tab.
30-July-2013 | Page 249 of 336

Display Free Disk Space: Check to enable the display of available free space.
Allow Delete IDs from Storage Window: Check to enable delete of IDs.
Enhanced title search: Enable (check) /Disable (uncheck) the enhanced title search
option.
When Disabled (unchecked) the title is verified in the database using the original
search process. (Default)
When Enabled (checked) searching by title uses the enhanced process to improve
search speed.
CAUTION: In certain cases depending on the state of the database, there may be issues
in locating multi-file multi-segment titles.
IMPORTANT: The Enhanced Title Search is designed specifically for systems where video
servers assigned to transmission lists contain many IDs that are not in the Automation
Database. (An example of this is where the Production Server shares the same storage
SAN as the Transmission server. The Production server may have 80% of the IDs in the
SAN, but these IDs are not in the ADC Database. In this case, checking the Enhanced Title
Search will improve search speeds significantly.)
To modify Storage Colors:
Select a Storage status (e.g. Normal, InUse, Title Mismatch).
Select a color from the dropdown list for that selection.
30-July-2013 | Page 250 of 336

7. Select the Cell Colors tab.
To modify Cell Colors:
Select a Cell status (e.g. Current Column, Selected Row, Default Background)
Select a color from the dropdown list for that selection..
8. Select the Mix/Wipe tab. This tab contains configuration options for mix and wipe support
for master control switchers. Events that include a mix or wipe transition are required to
roll several frames early to allow the events to overlap.
30-July-2013 | Page 251 of 336

NOTE: A Wipe effect requires a Wipe number. Each brand of Master Control Switcher may
have it own set of Wipes. Each event can have its own wipe number. These are displayed and
edited in Effect Number # field in the playlist editors of the windows client. When the event is
played the Wipe number in the event is passed to the switcher when the Wipe transition is
started. The Wipe number is solely dependent on the Master Control Switcher being used
and is not interpreted by the automation as anything but a number.
Configure the following options as required:
Enable Mix/Wipe Support.

Play Mixes/Wipes Early: (Default: disabled) Check to enable the system to roll
overlapping events early. It causes the list to pull back any events with the effect type of
Mix, Wipe, or Mixed Transition.
NOTE: Using this option will cause a playlist to end earlier than previously defined
because events will overlap. It is the client operators responsibility to reconcile this
issue.
Effect durations in frames: Set the frame values for slow, medium, and fast effect
durations. Effect durations are the amount of overlap time between the end of one spot
and the beginning of the next spot.
Slow: Valid numbers are 0 to 999 frames. Default is 60 frames.
Medium: Valid numbers are 0 to 999 frames. Default is 30 frames.
Fast: Valid numbers are 0 to 999 frames. Default is 15 frames.
IMPORTANT: These parameters must match the effects durations configured in your
master control switcher. Failure to do so will result in mistimed effects.
9. Select the Secondary Events tab. This tab provides the ability to delete secondary events
together with their associated primary event.
30-July-2013 | Page 252 of 336

Configure the following options as required:
Enable (check) / Disable (uncheck) the secondary events to delete when a primary event
is deleted. When all check-boxes are selected (checked), all secondary events associated
with a primary are deleted together with the associated primary.
For Example: BREAK is disabled and others are enabled all secondary events except
BREAK secondary event are deleted when associated primary is deleted from list.
For descriptions of all listed Secondary Events see, Appendix B: Secondary Events.
10. Select Default Event Colors tab.
30-July-2013 | Page 253 of 336

Edit Default Color Setting: Click to launch the Default Grid Colors settings dialog. Use
this dialog to set event and cell colors. For details see Configuring Event and Window
Parameter Colors.
Apply Default to All: When selected the application discards all custom settings are
reapplies default settings to all lists.
11. Select Default List Columns tab.
Choose the parameters to use as required:
Import Template- Apply template to all Transmission Lists: Browse to a previously

saved column configuration template file. Select a template and click OK. The
designated template is applied to all existing List configurations.
Factory Defaults- Apply template to all Transmission Lists: Click this option to reset all
settings of all transmission lists to default settings.
AsRun log Properties

An AsRun log file stores event and status information, such as errors and reconciliation keys as a
transmission list window runs a playlist. Use this procedure to configure the AsRun log.
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the AsRun logs... icon (
displayed.
). The Asruns dialog is
30-July-2013 | Page 254 of 336

2. Click a transmission list for which you want to create and configure AsRun log reporting.
If there are no transmission lists available, click Add to add a Playlist file. The Choose list
dialog is displayed listing all available lists.
NOTE: The Choose Server dialog box appears if your Air Client workstation supports multiple
server login.
3. On the Choose List dialog select a list and then click OK. The AsRun setup dialog is displayed.
30-July-2013 | Page 255 of 336

4. Configure the following parameters as required. Check to enable the required Logging
Option parameters from the list of available options.
Enable AsRun. To enable AsRun logging for a transmission list, click the Enable AsRun
checkbox.
Enable Printing: Check to enable. Allows you to print event and status information for
each event as it finishes play.
Unique List Number. This option allows the list number at the start of the AsRun log file
name to be configured.
This field allows entry of up to a 3 digit list number.
The current 2 digit list number ("01" to "99") suffice for systems with up to 6 x Device
Servers.
For larger installation of over 6 x Device Severs, a 3 digit list number ("100 to 999") can
be entered.
To ensure reverse system compatibility, the list number that appears in the dialog box
defaults to the list number for that AsRun log.
This number is saved in the INI-file.
Text File. Use this option to save an AsRun log as ASCII text file format.
Binary File. Use this option to generate an external reconciliation file. The format of this
binary file is determined by a Harris Broadcast-generated .DLL file. The two types of .DLL
files are the Sony and the Enterprise, both named AsRun.dll or AsRun32.dll.
Use AsRun Date. An events scheduled start time is logged in an AsRun log file saved in
binary file format instead of the system time.
No Header. No header information is displayed in an AsRun log file saved in text file
format
30-July-2013 | Page 256 of 336

Include Secondary Events: This option allows the inclusion of secondary events in the
SONY Binary AsRun file. If this option is enabled, make sure your traffic system is
prepared to read secondary events. This might require contacting your traffic system
vendor.
Include Reconcile Key. This option includes all events reconciliation keys in an AsRun
log created in text file format only. Reconciliation keys are added to an event generated
by the traffic department and identify a specific ID run at a specific time.
This option controls the presence or not of reconcile key for the text AsRun file.
NOTE: For binary file the recon key is always included.
Update Database: Select to allow secondary recorded Ids to be saved to the database
with the timecode and segment information.
For Air Client AutoRecord.
When a SECONDARY RECORD event is finished recording, all subsequent replay

events on the list are automatically filled in with the recorded duration and SOM. If
any other lists on the same Automation Server contain the same replay events, they
will be filled in also.
Enable As Run/Update Database must be set up for your Secondary Record files to
be stored permanently in the Media Client Database. This is only necessary if you
need to permanently store your Secondary Record files for future replay beyond
the current log. You should only use this option if the previous scenarios apply to
your station. This must only be configured on one Air Client.
Log Tally: If this option is activated on the Air Client, and for the AsRun log configuration
of a given transmission list, the AsRun log text file indicates on a specific line each
change in the OnAir/OnLine status (Tally information associated with a specific
transmission list).
If the Log Tally parameter is enabled, the Tally status at the creation of the daily log
file, and its later changes, are logged in the AsRun log file.
If the Log Tally parameter is disabled, the Tally status at the creation of the daily log
file, and its later changes, are not logged.
If there no Tally is configured for a given List, the Log Tally parameter in the
corresponding AsRun log is not active.
If a Tally is configured for a given List, the Log Tally parameter in the corresponding
AsRun log configuration window is active.
5. Configure the following Other parameters:
Start of Day: Enter a time value in the Start of Day: field to specify when the AsRun log
feature should start a new log. This is used when a playlist is ran continuously.
Short Clip: Enter a time value to specify how much time a spot may be played short
without generating an error in the AsRun log. This is used primarily with Enterprise
AsRun log reconciliation.
Printer Port: Specify a printer port on the Printer Port: button in the Other Options area.
30-July-2013 | Page 257 of 336

Need page Feed: Check to enable advance to a new sheet of paper after printing a full
page of as run events. Only enable this if the printer does not support automatic page
feeds, such as when sending the AsRun logs to a laser printer.
AsRun Directory: Click the Browse button (...) to specify which directory to store AsRun
logs. The default is the root directory of the Air Client application. AsRun logs are named
the same, no matter which server they are written by. Use this feature to specify
separate directories for each server so AsRun log files are not overwritten when using
multiple servers. Use the Browse button () to locate a directory.
Custom Header File: Manually enter a file path name, or use list arrow to select from a
list of available files. To browse for a file click . . An Open dialog is displayed allowing
the operator to browse for and select the desired file.
Days To Keep: Specify the number of days to keep AsRun logs before they are deleted.
6. To Change As Run Format(v), click Change As Run Format(v). The AsRun Log Format
Configuration dialog is displayed.
Use > and < buttons to move column entries.
Select an entry in the Available column and then click > to move the entry to the As
Run Column. The column will be displayed in the AsRun file.
Select an entry in the As Run column and then click > to move the entry to the
Available Column. The column is removed and will not be displayed in the AsRun
file.
Use up and Down buttons to arrange the sequence of columns
30-July-2013 | Page 258 of 336

Specify a column and then specify its length, width and gutter size.
Click Preview to preview the log format as it is being specified.
(Option) Click Default to specify default settings.
When finished click OK
7. (Option) To Edit an existing AsRun list:
Select a list from the Asruns dialogs Configured Lists pane, and then click Edit.
The AsRun setup dialog is displayed populated with the selected lists settings.
Make any required changes, and then click OK. Returns to the AsRuns dialog.
8. (Option) To Remove a existing AsRun list, select a list from the AsRuns dialogs Configured
Lists pane, and then click Remove.
Setting Hardware Control Panel Properties

Use this procedure to configure parameters for the Operator Control Panel used with Air Client.
Once these parameters have been set, they should not need to be changed.
Please contact your Tech Support Representative for assistance before changing any of the
settings.
To Configure the Operator Control Panel (OCP)

The Operator Control Panel (OCP) is configured through the ADC Air Client software.
Air Client supports up to two Operator Control panels and allows you to configure the
functionality of control and list buttons.
Up to 10 banks of 6 list buttons can be configured. The Bank selection buttons allows an
operator to select each bank of list buttons.
List buttons are used to open a transmission list quickly during Air Client operation. List
buttons are arranged in banks of 6 button assignments each (Bank 1, Bank 2, Bank
3,Bank 10). Pressing a different Bank button on the panel switches the top row of 6
LED buttons on the panel to that bank of 6 assigned List buttons.
A button from the bank can be assigned to a single list or to several lists.
Once assigned, when button is pressed for that bank, control is shifted to that list.
When ADC shifts control to that list, the panel will stay in sync and also shift control
to the same list.
Control buttons allow the operator to perform control actions on the currently active
List or Lists.
The labels are editable in the User Interface.
30-July-2013 | Page 259 of 336

If a button's label is blank (no spaces or other characters) the button's backlight is
extinguished.
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Hardware Control Panel icon (
Hardware Control Panel selection dialog is displayed.
). The
2. Select which COM port the control panel is connect to, and then click on Edit. The Hardware
Control Panel configuration dialog is displayed.
3. Select the OCP tab.

4. From the Panel Type dropdown select OCP.
5. From the I/O Port dropdown select the desired Port. The following port options are
available:
No Port
COM 1
COM 2
30-July-2013 | Page 260 of 336

COM 3
COM 4
6. (Recommended) Click Set Defaults. This ensures a standard base against which to configure
panel functionality.
An I/O Port must be selected before the Defaults can be set.
In a multi Device Server environment, the Choose Server dialog is displayed. Select the
server the device is connected to and then press OK.
7. To Configure the List Group. List groups are used to open a transmission list quickly during
Air Client operation.
In the Lists pane, double left click on a specific numbered button (left panel) which
corresponds to a physical button on the OCP top row of 6 buttons. (Notice the buttons
are already in groups of six.). The List Assignment dialog appears.
The Device Server(s) provides information of the Lists that are available.
30-July-2013 | Page 261 of 336

Select which Transmission List will open when the button is pressed on the OCP. Use the
move keys to select (>, >>) and deselect (<, <<) entries.
>: Move a single entry from Available pane to Assigned pane
>>: Move all entries from Available pane to Assigned pane
<: Move a single entry from Assigned pane back to Available pane
<<: Move all entries from Assigned pane back to Available pane
NOTE: Gang play can be implemented by selecting multiple lists on a single list button.
When finished, click OK.
8. (Option) To Rename a List group:
Right click on a List entry in the left pane, and then from the popup menu select
Rename. The List group rename dialog appears.
Rename the entry and then click OK.
9. To Set a Button Action for OCP Buttons 7 24. Action buttons are used to carry out
numerous On Air actions during Air Client operation.
In the Buttons pane, double left click on a specific Buttons Action (e.g. Hold) which
corresponds to a physical button on the OCP (buttons 7 24).
30-July-2013 | Page 262 of 336

From the Actions dropdown select an action from the list, and then click OK.
Assignable actions: The following is a description of each action you can assign to the
action buttons on the hardware control panel:
-1: Subtracts one second to the duration of the playing event.
+1: Adds one second to the duration of the playing event.
Cut Next: Deletes the event following the playing event.

NOTE: Events deleted with this action are not recoverable from the clipboard.
Freeze: Freezes the current frame of the video of a playing event.
Hold: Holds the current events duration, allowing the event to continue to play
beyond its specified duration.
Let Roll: Rolls an event without switching.
Play: Plays the playlist.
PrgRun: Prepares a playlist for play by threading the devices in a playlist.
Protect: Switches between air and protect devices.
Ready: Ready the media for the Play command.
Recue: Recues the playing event.
RollNow: Identical to the Roll button on the software control panel. Roll bypasses
normal preroll values and plays the next event as fast as the equipment will allow. If
the current event is playing normally, the Roll button skips it and plays the next
event using normal preroll values unless configured to use instant preroll values. If
the current event is frozen, this button will play the next event. If the current event
is being held, clicking this button plays the event.
Second: The Second action allows you to roll a secondary audio/video event without
specifying a starting offset for the event. This allows you to start a primary event
and roll the secondary event at any time by pressing the Second button. To identify
30-July-2013 | Page 263 of 336

which secondary audio/video event is affected by this action, you must remove any
data in the TOD field of the event.
When the Second button is pressed, the next secondary audio/video event with a
blank TOD is rolled. If the Second button is pressed again, the next such event, if
available, rolls. The Second button will not roll any other type of secondary event
and will not roll to any secondary audio/video event if its TOD field is not blank.
Also, a secondary audio/video event rolls the next secondary audio/video event
with TOD field information if the secondary audio/video event does not have a
Rejoin qualifier. This allows you to run a list of secondary audio/video events
attached to the current primary event. If the Rejoin qualifier is attached to an event,
then it will not roll any other secondary audio/video events.
NOTE: You cannot roll consecutive secondary audio/video events with the same ID
for devices that play program material. Some devices, such as still stores and audio
carts, use the event ID to match to the event ID name of the device. If this is the case,
the ID can be the same for consecutive secondaries.
Skip: Skips the playing event and proceeds to the next event.

SyncSkip command concept is that the next event with a designated sequential Seg
# becomes equal to the remaining part of the current event. Since each of these
events represent the entire program, the SOM of the next event is shifted to the
EOM point of the current event and the DUR of the next event is made equal to the
remaining DUR of the current event.
Ten Rel: Tension releases the VTR for the next VTR event.
Unthread: Unthreads lists assigned to a list button and stops on-air playout.
10. (Optional) To Rename a Button Action:
Right click on a listed action entry and then from the popup menu select Rename. The
Action button rename dialog appears.
Rename the entry and then click OK.
11. When all buttons are properly configured click on OK the Hardware Control Panel
configuration dialog. The dialog closes.
12. Click on OK in the panel select t On the Completion dialog, click Finish to complete the
installation ab. The Hardware Control Panel selection dialog closes.
30-July-2013 | Page 264 of 336

Cabling
The OCP uses a straight through DB9 RS-232 connection. To complete connection with Common
Hardware Platform equipment ensure the cable terminates are female (i.e. one end of the cable
with need a male to female adapter.)
For more information regarding cabling requirements and pinouts reference document, ADC
Cabling Standards.
Setting Software Control Panel Properties

Use this procedure to configure the software control panel within the Air Client application.
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Software Control Panel icon (
Software Control Panels Configuration dialog is displayed.
). The
2. Click Edit. The Edit Available Lists dialog is displayed.
30-July-2013 | Page 265 of 336

3. To Add a List.
Click Add. The Add List dialog is displayed.
Specify a List Index Number. Click down arrow to select from a dropdown list of
available entries.
Enter a List Name
When finished click OK. Returns to the Edit Available Lists dialog.
4. To Edit a List.
Select a list in the List pane and then click Edit. The Edit List dialog is displayed
populated with the settings for the selected list.
30-July-2013 | Page 266 of 336

Make any necessary changes and then click OK. Returns to the Edit Available Lists
dialog.
5. To Remove a List, select a list in the List pane and then click Remove. The list is removed.
When finished editing click OK on the Edit Available Lists dialog. Returns to the Software
Control Panels Configuration dialog.
6. To enable buttons for a list:
Select a list in the Available List pane
Under Control Panel in the Enable Buttons pane, check the buttons you want enabled
for the list. To disable, uncheck an entry. [Default: all entries enabled (checked)]
7. To set background color for a button:
Select an enabled entry in the Enable Buttons pane.
Ensure the Use Skin Color option is disabled (unchecked).
In the Background Color pane click Change Color. The Color setting dialog is displayed
Select the desired color and then click OK. Returns to the Software Control Panels
Configuration dialog.
8. When finished click Apply, and then click OK.
Valid IDs
Use this procedure to create a list of IDs that are not in the database that are commonly used
for air. This, in general, would include switch only events (i.e. Network, Newsroom, Studio, Black
etc.)
30-July-2013 | Page 267 of 336

1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Valid IDs icon (
displayed.
). The Valid IDs dialog is
2. To Add an ID.
Click Add. The add ID box is displayed.
Enter and ID and then click OK.
3. To Edit an ID.
Select an ID from the IDs list pane and then click Edit. The edit ID box is displayed
populated with the ID of the selected ID.
Make any necessary changes and then click OK.
4. To Remove and ID select an ID from the IDs list pane and then click Remove. The ID is
removed.
30-July-2013 | Page 268 of 336

List Names
Use this procedure to configure (add, remove, or customize) names of transmission lists that will
appear in View List [under Resources]. The default is to display only a number for the separate
transmission lists at your facility (i.e. play list 1, play list 2) and secondary lists such as Record
Lists, Media Lists, and Compile Lists.
IMPORTANT: Air Client's 'List Names' functionality requires absence of '/nt' in command line
parameters on the applications desktop shortcut.
Without /NT = Air Client displays the List Names configured on the Air Client.
With /NT = Air Client displays the List Names configured on the Device Server.
For more information see, Create a Desktop Shortcut for Air Client.
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the List Names icon (
displayed.
). The List Names dialog is
2. To Add a Configured List:
Click Add The Choose List dialog is displayed.
30-July-2013 | Page 269 of 336

Select a list from the Available Lists pane and then click OK. The List Name box is
displayed.
Enter a name for the list and then click OK. The list is added to the Configured Lists
pane.
3. To Edit a Configured List:
Select a list from the Configured Lists pane and then click Edit. The List Name box is
displayed populated with the name of the selected list.
Make any necessary changes and then click OK. The list name is changed on the
Configured Lists pane.
4. To Remove a Configured list select an ID from the Configured List pane and then click
Remove. The list is removed.
Auto List Save

To enable Auto List Save add the applicable lists using this configuration option.
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Auto List Save icon (
). The Auto List Save
30-July-2013 | Page 270 of 336

2. To Add an Enabled List:
Click Add The Choose List dialog is displayed.
Select a list from the Available Lists pane and then click OK. The Save Options dialog
displayed.
30-July-2013 | Page 271 of 336

Save Lookahead: (Default: enabled) Check to enable save of the list lookahead only.
RECOMMENDATION: NEVER USE THIS, always choose SAVE FULL to prevent on-air
problems later.
Save Full: Check to enable save of the full list
Save Frequency: (Default: 10) Specify the number of changes required before a list
save is initiated. This is the value of how many events go by NOT how many edits
are performed.
Save Directory: Specify the save directory for the saved list. (Click to browse for
location.
RECOMMENDATION: It is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that subfolders be created within
the normal default Playlist folders for each Transmission Lists Recovery List to be
stored. This way, Operators, if they want to Load from this file, can find it more
easily.
Click OK. The list is added to the Enabled Lists pane.
3. To Edit a Configured List:
Select a list from the Configured Lists pane and then click Edit. The List Save Options
dialog is displayed populated with the settings for the selected list.
30-July-2013 | Page 272 of 336

Make any necessary changes and then click OK. The list save parameters are updated.
4. To Remove an Enabled list select a list from the Enabled List pane and then click Remove.
The list is removed.
Auto Bin Save

Use this procedure to configure the save of bin storage map of a cart machine based on user
specified intervals.
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Auto Bin Save icon (
). The Auto Bin Save
30-July-2013 | Page 273 of 336

Enable Auto Bin Saving: Check to enable save.
Hold Time: Specify the hold time in seconds. (Default: 30)
Save Directory: Specify the save directory for the Auto Bin. (Click to browse for
location.
Error Reporting Properties

You can configure the way errors are reported in the error window. Use this procedure to
configure how/where error messages are displayed and whether they will sound out when they
occur.
1. Choose a transmission list from the server from the Choose Server dialog box and click OK.
NOTE: Error log files are named the same, regardless of which server originated the file. If
you are using multiple servers, you need to specify different directories for each server so
that the error logs do not overwrite each other.
2. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Errors icon (
). The Error Configuration
3. Configure Log and Display:
Log Errors to Disk: When enabled (checked), all errors will be written to a file in a
directory specified by the Error Log Directory: field.
Pop Up User Notifications: Check to enable. When running certain types of cart
machines in manual mode, you may be prompted for manual interaction.
30-July-2013 | Page 274 of 336

Sound Errors: Check to enable. Plays an alert sound, or exclamation, when errors occur.
It repeats until the error is acknowledged using F4. The exclamation sound plays every
one second, so a sound with a duration greater than one second will be clipped.
About Map .WAV sounds: Use the Windows Sounds control panel to map .WAV files to
specific occurrences in Air Client.
4. Configure List Errors:
Open Lists: When selected, shows list errors only when a transmission list is open.
All Lists: When selected, displays all list errors even if no transmission lists are open.
5. Configure Device Errors:
Owned Devices: When selected, shows device errors only when the transmission list
that controls the device is open.
All Devices: When selected, displays all device errors even if the transmission list that
controls the device is not open.
6. Configure Timezone: (Default: none) Specify the timezone for the list and error. Click the
down arrow to select from a list of available timezones.
7. Configure System Errors:
Notify: When enabled (checked), system errors display alert dialog boxes. System errors
include the loss of reference video or timecode on the server.
8. Configure Error Log Directory: Click the Browse button (...) to specify the directory the error
logs will be written to.
9. Configure Font and Colors for the message displayed at the bottom of the window of the Air
Client software when an error message is active and inactive.
In the Active group, the user defines how the error message is displayed when it is
just generated.
When the Bold option is checked, the error message uses a bold font.
When the Blink is checked, the error message blinks, the colors of the foreground
and background invert. This makes the error message
Example: New Generated Error Message

When the error message is generated, it is displayed as it was previously configured
in the Active group of the Error Configuration dialog box; typically as bolded
text.
(For this example the display colors were modified to enhance readability. Your
display will appear different.)
In the Inactive group, the user defines how the error message is displayed when it is
acknowledged.
When the Bold option is checked, the error message uses a bold font.
Example: Acknowledged Error Message
30-July-2013 | Page 275 of 336

When an Air Client software user clicks on F4 button or presses the key F4 to
acknowledge the error message, it is displayed as it was previously configured in the
Inactive group of the Error Configuration dialog box; typically as unbolded
regular text.
(For this example the display colors were modified to enhance readability. Your
display will appear different.)
About Errors in Multi-Login Mode

In multi-login mode, it is possible to configure different directories for the errors coming from
each Device Server.
Desktop Display Properties

Use this procedure to adjust the desktop background color and wallpaper within the Air Client
program.
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Desktop... icon (
). The Desktop Properties
30-July-2013 | Page 276 of 336

2. In the Background area of the Desktop Properties dialog box, click the Color: button and
choose a new background color from the palette.
3. (Optional) Use the Windows standard Wallpaper area to apply wallpaper to the background.
Select from the list of available wallpapers or Browse to locate.
Select to Tile or Center the wallpaper.
4. When finished click Apply, then OK.
Saving the Desktop

To save a Window configuration From the Properties ribbon tab select the Save Desktop icon
). Using this option ensures window configuration appears exactly as saved every time Air
(
Client is launched.
LinkList
LinkList allows playlists to be linked together and controlled from a single master playlist. Once
playlists are linked, changes made to the master playlist in content or event order are
mirrored by linked lists, ensuring that all associated events are synchronized.
When the functionality has been purchased, you can custom configure Linked Lists.
For details on the Linked List feature see section: LinkList presented earlier in this document.
Reference Note: For information on the operation and configuration of this feature see the ADC
LinkList Reference document.
More Info
When the functionality has been purchased, you can custom configure a More Info column
using an ODBC database. Using the More Info feature is a two-step process. The customer uses
station-defined procedures to configure the functionality on this display.
1. Add the eld(s) to be displayed in the More Info Window to a table in the automation
database, which is done using the SQL Server Management Studio, a server based
application. However, to add fields, administrator access to the PC on which the Microsoft
SQL Server software is installed is required.
2. Create the corresponding eld(s) in the More Info Window.
Information on displaying the More Info Window is presented earlier in this document.
30-July-2013 | Page 277 of 336

Reference Note: MoreInfo is an option to Air Client and Media Client. For details on installing
and configuring this feature, please reference the ADC MoreInfo Feature Reference. For more
information contact your Harris Broadcast Automation Sales representative.
Hide Secondary Event Keys

In the List, there is a distinct display filtering setting for the Secondary events of the
OnAir/OnLine Primary event (NOTE: This does not apply for preview played events.), and for the
Secondary events of the other Primary events (not playing).
The display filtering setting for the Secondary events of non-playing Primary events can be
configured for Playlist also.
The activation of these 2 secondary events display filterings is configurable per List (in multilogin mode also).
About Managing Secondary Event Hiding

For both cases, it is possible to configure the Secondary events to hide:
Per Sec criteria (sAV, sGPI, ****, ), new sAXP events to manage
Per ID criteria (Extended Ids managed),
And per Type criteria (P, T, S, A, R,).
It is possible to combine these criteria. For instance:
Hide any Comment with blank type, but show any Comment with R or P type.
Hide any sAV (whatever the ID and Type is).
Hide any sAV with ID LOGO, and show all other sAV.
Show any sKEY or sTRANSKEY .
Manual hiding/showing of secondary events is still available for hidden secondary events, per
event (icon in event number column), or for the whole list.
IMPORTANT: When secondary events are hidden, if an event or block of events are highlighted
and then deleted, the hidden events within the selection are also deleted.
Configuration of the Hide Secondary Event keys

Use this procedure to define the Hide Secondary Event keys that will be used in the Lists /
Playlist properties to define the secondary event to hide.
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Hide Secondary Event Keys icon (
Secondary Event Keys dialog is displayed.
). The Hide
30-July-2013 | Page 278 of 336

2. To Add a Key:
Click Add. The Hide Secondary Event Key setup dialog is displayed.
Specify the following parameters:
Key: Use spin arrows to set key number
Key name: Enter a name for the key
Sec (Event Type): Three fields.

Field 1: A combo box similar to the one of Secondary event edition tool, listing all
the supported secondary event types, allows user to choose the Secondary event
type condition.
Field 2: A combo box allows setting the field if the condition is complemented
(Complement is displayed in the field) or not (the field is blank).
Field 3: A combo box allows setting the field if the condition is enabled (Enabled is
displayed in the field) or disabled (Disabled displayed in the field).
Type (Event Control): Three fields.
30-July-2013 | Page 279 of 336

Field 1: This field is directly editable to write the event type (P, T, S, PT, A, R,
blank,). If the field is blank and the condition is enabled, this is a valid criteria.
Field 2: A combo box allows to set if the condition is complemented (Complement
is displayed in the field) or not (the field is blank).
Field 3: A combo box allows setting the field the condition is enabled (Enabled is
ID: Three fields.

Field 1: This field is directly editable to write the secondary event ID. Extended are
managed.
If the field is blank and the condition is enabled, this is a valid criteria.
Field 2: A combo box allows setting the field if the condition is complemented
(Complement is displayed in the field) or not (the field is blank).
Field 3: A combo box allows setting the field if the condition is enabled (Enabled is
When finished click OK. The Key is added to the list pane.
3. To Edit a Key:
Select a key from the list pane and then click Edit. The Hide Secondary Event Key setup
dialog is displayed and populated for the selected key.
Make changes are required then click OK.

NOTE: If a key used in the Hiding Secondary configuration of a List or the Playlist is
modified, there will be no specific indication of this in the Hiding Secondary configuration
GUI of this List or the Playlist.
4. To Remove a Key, select a key from the list pane and then click Remove.
NOTE: If a key used in the Hiding Secondary configuration of a List or the Playlist is deleted,
this key will be displayed in a specific color in the Hiding Secondary configuration GUI of this
List or the Playlist.
30-July-2013 | Page 280 of 336

Toolbar Builder
The Toolbar Builder allows an Air Client software user to define shortcuts for tool bar group
operations on the Quick Access Ribbon tab: Standard, List Tools, Global Tools.
A configurable Toolbar allows an operator to call functions by a simple click on a button.
A specific configuration allows building the different Toolbar Groups, by associating a

function with a bitmap for each button
Access to the Toolbar Builder resource, which is used to administrate the toolbars
available for the users, is granted to the administrator login only. Therefore, the Toolbar
Builder command from the Properties Group on the Properties Ribbon tab is enabled or
grayed depending of the current login of the user.
To configure the Quick Access Ribbon Toolbar on the desktop

1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Toolbar Builder icon (
). The Toolbar Builder
The Toolbar Builder dialog box displays the toolbars that have already been created and
allows to define and modify the content of a selected toolbar.
30-July-2013 | Page 281 of 336

Dialog components:
The Toolbar group displays the list of the toolbars what have already been created.
The Add button allows to create a new toolbar (this is the first step in the toolbar
creation). It opens the following dialog box to enter the toolbar name that will be used
to identify the toolbar. If the user enters the name of a toolbar that is already existing,
an error message is displayed.
The Delete button is used to delete the selected toolbar. The user is prompted to
confirm before deleting the toolbar.
The Rename button is used to rename the selected toolbar and it opens the Toolbar
name dialog box. If the user enters the name of a toolbar that is already existing, an
error message are displayed and the rename action is cancelled.
The Move up and Move down buttons modify the order of the toolbars in the list. The
name of the toolbars are displayed in the Ribbon toolbars according to this order.
The Edit button is used to opens the Shortcuts Setting dialog box that is used to
define the toolbar shortcuts.
2. To Add a toolbar:
Click Add. The Toolbar name box is displayed.
Enter name for the toolbar in the name box and then click OK. The new toolbar is added
to the toolbar group.
Note: If required, the application allows a blank name for a toolbar group.
Edit the toolbar parameters
3. To Edit a toolbar:
Select a toolbar from the Toolbar group pane and then click Edit. The Shortcuts Settings
The Shortcuts Setting dialog box displays the shortcuts associated with a toolbar, and
allows to add, edit, remove and organize these shortcuts into the toolbar.
30-July-2013 | Page 282 of 336

Show Button Names Check to enable or uncheck to disable the display of button names.
System Configuration rights to change View: Check to enable or uncheck to disable.

When checked, this toolbar is grayed in the ribbon toolbars for non-administrator logins,
so only the administrator logins are granted to add or remove that toolbar into the Air
Client GUI.
Toolbar Buttons: This list displays the images chosen to represent the toolbar shortcuts
and the order to display them in the toolbar.
To add buttons click Add. A browse window opens for locating a bitmap file that will
be represented a toolbar shortcut.
To delete buttons, select a button and then click Delete. The user is prompted to
confirm before deleting the image.
To modify the order of buttons on the toolbar, select a button from the Toolbar
Buttons pane and then click Move Left (to move the entry left on the toolbar),
Move Right (to move the entry right on the toolbar).
Button Properties: This group displays information about the selected shortcut. To
select a shortcut, the user selects the bitmap, in the Toolbar buttons that will be
represented by it.
Select a button graphic in the Toolbar Buttons pane. The user can choose or modify
the associated function by selecting one in the list of functions and by clicking on
Select button. The bitmap is displayed.
Function: The function name is transcribed in Function edit. Highlight a function in

the Available functions pane and then click < to select.
30-July-2013 | Page 283 of 336

Name: Specify the name of the button.
Hint: Specify a tooltip popup for the function. The user can modify the hint to be
displayed for that shortcut in the Hint edit. By default, Hint is equal to the function
name.
4. To position a toolbar in the list and for display select a toolbar from the Toolbar group pane
and then click Move Up (to move the entry up in the list), Move Down (to move the entry
down in the list). The position in the list determines the display sequence (right to left) of
the toolbars on the main screen.
5. To Rename a toolbar:
Select a toolbar from the Toolbar group pane and then click Rename. The Toolbar name
box is displayed.
Enter new name in the name box and then click OK.
6. To Delete a toolbar, select a toolbar from the Toolbar group pane and then click Delete.
7. When finished click OK
Configuring Time Zone Offsets

Use this procedure to configure a unique time zone offset for each play list that is offset from
the house clock. This means it is possible to define Time Zones with offsets compared to the
Time Code reference used by the Device Servers, and to set a Time Zone to a given List.
The Time Zone set to a List will be displayed in the title bar of it List window, and of its Zoom
window.
The time zone offset is added to the time value of each event in the List.
To setup TimeZone Offsets

1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Time Zone icon (
displayed.
). The Timezones dialog is
30-July-2013 | Page 284 of 336

2. To add a Timezone and Offset.
Click Zone List tab
Click Add. A Time Zone dialog is displayed.
In the Time Zone dialog specify a name for the timezone and an offset (+ or
hh:mm:ss:ff) down to frame level.
When finished Click OK
(Option) Use Edit button to edit a currently defined Timezone and Offset.
(Option) Use Remove button to remove a currently defined Timezone and Offset
NOTE: A pop-up warning appears when an operator attempts to Edit or Remove an
existing time zone offset. The warning will say This change will alter the event times of
all associated lists. Do you want to continue? OK or Cancel.
Changing the offset time will dynamically modify the event times of all associated
playlists.
Example dialog with added values:
30-July-2013 | Page 285 of 336

3. To Set Event Movement.
Click Event Movement tab
Select the desired Event movement behavior
Always ask if offset should be applied (Default)
Always apply offsets on move
Never apply offsets on move
4. To set a Timezone to a playlist.
Click Playlists tab
30-July-2013 | Page 286 of 336

Click Add. A Time Zone dialog is displayed.
The system warns This change will alter event times in the playlist. Do you want to
Continue. Click OK.
In the timezone dialog specify the following:
Device Server: Specify a Device Server. Use the dropdown arrow to view a list of
available Device Servers.
List: Specify a list. Use the dropdown arrow to view a list of available playlists.
Time Zone: A name for the timezone. Specify a Timezone. Use the dropdown arrow
to view a list of currently defined timezones.
Click OK
The Time Zone set to a List is displayed in the title bar of its List window, and its
Zoom window.
The time zone offset is added to the time value of each event in the List.
30-July-2013 | Page 287 of 336

(Option) Use the Edit button to edit a currently defined Timezone.
(Option) Use the Remove button to remove a currently defined Timezone.
5. When finished click OK
Operation Log
Use this procedure to create a log to track operation activity within the Air Client application.
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Operation Log icon (
). The Operation Log
2. Enable operation log: Check to enable logging

3. Action Categories: Use arrow keys to select the action categories to be logged. Move
options from Action Categories pane to Action Categories logged pane. Use the move
keys to select (>, >>) and deselect (<, <<) entries.
>: Move a single entry from Action Categories pane to Action Categories logged pane
>>: Move all entries from Action Categories pane to Action Categories logged pane
<: Move a single entry from Action Categories logged pane back to Action Categories
pane
<<: Move all entries from Action Categories logged pane back to Action Categories
pane
30-July-2013 | Page 288 of 336

4. Other Options:
Start of Day: Specify the start of day hh:mm:ss
Operation log Directory: Specify the directory. Click the Browse button () to locate.
Days to Keep: Specify the number of days to keep the log before deleting.
5. Time: Select the time to use: Station or Device Server.

Set Tally
Use this procedure to configure Air client to use the Tally information of a given List to display
an On Air / On Line status and color for the playing event(s) of the corresponding
transmission list(s) and zoom window(s) status column.
When a Tally is configured for a given List,
If it is seen as On Air according to the Tally configuration, then the On Air color and ON
AIR status are used in the List and its Zoom window,
If it is seen as On Line according to the Tally configuration, the On Line color and ON
LINE status are used in the List and its Zoom window.
SeaLevel Drivers to Support ADC Tally Function

To support ADC tally functions the GPI Card installed in the Air Client (our standard Device
Server GPI card = SeaLevel 8011 card) requires installation of the SeaLevel drivers:
http://www.sealevel.com/store/i-o/digital-i-o/pci/8011-pci-8-form-c-relay-output-8-isolatedinput-digital-interface.html
SeaLevel is a 3rd party company that produces our GPI/RS422 cards.
To Set a Tally
1. From the Properties ribbon tab select the Set Tally icon (
). The Set tally dialog is
displayed. A Scroll bar appears on the left of the list if all the Tally configured cannot be
displayed at the same time in the GUI.
NOTE: If user is not logged in with System Configuration permission, the corresponding
configuration window is opened with the Add, Remove, Edit, OK and Apply buttons grayed,
and only the Cancel and Help buttons active.
30-July-2013 | Page 289 of 336

2. To Add a Tally:
Click Add. The Add Tally Configuration dialog is displayed. Use this dialog to set which
input of which GPI board is corresponding to which List of which Device Server (multilogin management).
Specify the parameters listed for the tally:
Device Server: Allows to choose between the Device Server name of the Available
Device Servers list in Multi-Login, or for the current Device Server Name if not in
Multi-Login.
Initial value (when Add used) : None (displayed <Server Name>)
List n*: Allows to set the concerned List number of the Device Server selected. The
Lists of the Configured Device Server which have already a Tally configured on this
Air Client are not displayed or accessible in the combo box.
Values in combo box: 1 to 16, and 0. 0 value means None and is displayed blank.
Initial value (when Add used): 0.
GPI board number & Input number: Allow to set which Input of which GPI board
receives the Tally signal of the List configured with Device Server & List parameters.
It is active immediately.
GPI board no. allows to select one the GPI boards installed on the station (detected
by the driver).
Initial value (when Add used) : 0.
30-July-2013 | Page 290 of 336

Input number: Set the concerned GPI input number of the GPI board selected.
Values from 1 to 8, and 0. 0 value means None and is displayed blank.
The min and max values displayed in the combo box (except 0 value) could be
retrieved automatically from the dll interfacing the Air Client with the GPI board (if
this solution is used).
OnAir/OnLine Status&Color: Values: YES or NO.

If set to YES, the On Air / On Line status and related configured colors in the
corresponding List and Zoom Window are activated.
If set to NO, the On Air/On Line status and related configured colors in the
corresponding List and Zoom Window not activated (Standard PLAY status and
color).
Initial value (when Add used) : NO
On Air value: Values: 0 or 1.

Allows to determine which GPI logical value (0 or 1) is corresponding to the OnAir
status of the selected List.
Initial value (when Add used) : 0
Current value: This is not a parameter. It shows the value currently applied to the
configured GPI input. The field is blanked until a Server/List and GPI board/GP Input
are configured.
When finished click OK. Closes the Tally Configuration window, and applies the settings
to the Tally table of the Set Tally window.
NOTE: A line added, and not configured is not added to the Tally table.
3. To Edit a configured Tally:
Select an entry on the Tally configured pane and then click Edit. The Configuration
dialog is displayed and populated with the parameters for the selected tally.
It is possible to select one Tally line only in the Tally table.
Use this dialog to set which input of which GPI board is corresponding to which List
of which Device Server (multi-login management).
Edit the parameters listed for the tally:
30-July-2013 | Page 291 of 336

Device Server: Allows to choose between the Device Server name of the Available
Device Servers list in Multi-Login, or for the current Device Server Name if not in
Multi-Login.
Initial value (when Add used) : None (displayed <Server Name>)
List n*: Allows to set the concerned List number of the Device Server selected. The
Lists of the Configured Device Server which have already a Tally configured on this
Air Client are not displayed or accessible in the combo box.
Initial value (when Add used): 0.
GPI board number & Input number: Allow to set which Input of which GPI board
receives the Tally signal of the List configured with Device Server & List parameters.
It is active immediately.
GPI board no. allows to select one the GPI boards installed on the station (detected
by the driver).
Input number: Set the concerned GPI input number of the GPI board selected.
Values from 1 to 8, and 0. 0 value means None and is displayed blank.
The min and max values displayed in the combo box (except 0 value) could be
retrieved automatically from the dll interfacing the Air Client with the GPI board (if
this solution is used).
OnAir/OnLine Status&Color: Values: YES or NO.

If set to YES, the On Air / On Line status and related configured colors in the
corresponding List and Zoom Window are activated.
If set to NO, the On Air/On Line status and related configured colors in the
corresponding List and Zoom Window not activated (Standard PLAY status and
color).
Initial value (when Add used) : NO
On Air value: Values: 0 or 1.

Allows to determine which GPI logical value (0 or 1) is corresponding to the OnAir
status of the selected List.
Initial value (when Add used) : 0
Current value: This is not a parameter. It shows the value currently applied to the
configured GPI input. The field is blanked until a Server/List and GPI board/GP Input
are configured.
When finished click OK. Closes the Tally Configuration window, and applies the settings
to the Tally table of the Set Tally window.
4. To Remove a tally.
Select an entry on the Tally configured pane and then click Remove.
30-July-2013 | Page 292 of 336

A warning dialog appears requesting confirmation.
Select OK to remove the selected Tally from the table.
Select Cancel to keep the selected Tally and not remove it from the table.
5. When finished click Apply and then click OK.
MI Additional Fields
As broadcast operational methodologies shift additional metadata related to DTV operations is
required. This includes, but is not limited to, AFD, PSIP data, format, bitrates, etc. This data is
becoming increasing critical as it dictates how and sometime where content can play.
The ADC database and playlists structure has been extended so that this class of metadata can
be preserved and displayed. And more importantly that it can be passed to other devices so
that the data can be acted upon for the correct playout of content.
New Metadata fields

This information is present in the updated database schema.
Note: These fields are available for display in the More Info Window.
AFD: Active Format Description is a standard set of codes that can be sent in the MPEG
video stream or in the baseband SDI video signal that carries information about their aspect
ratio and active picture characteristics.
Rating: Currently assigned program rating for the show.
Closed caption: specifies if closed captioning is enabled or disabled.
Show name: Name of the show.

Show description: Brief description of the show.
Dialnorm: This is the meta-data parameter that controls decoder gain within the audio
compression system.
BarData: This parameter is implemented as an option in MoreInfo Builder. Bar data defines
the extent of the image within the coded frame.
To add new MI Fields

1. From the Properties ribbon tab select MI Additional Fields (
Configuration dialog is displayed.
). The Additional Fields
30-July-2013 | Page 293 of 336

2. Click Add
3. In the More Info Field dialog use the dropdown lists to select the following:
The Database in which the Table and Field reside. (e.g. ASDB)
The Table in which the Field resides. (e.g. ASEXT)
The Field. (e.g. BarData) A field with the specified name must exist in the Database.
4. (Optional) To edit a field:
Select a field in one of the panes.
Click Edit.
In the More Info Field dialog modify the Database, Table, and Field parameters as
required, and then click OK.
5. (Optional) To remove a field, select a field in one of the panes and click Remove.
6. From the Configured fields pane select a field or fields that have been added, and then click
> to move the selection to the Used fields pane.
>: Move selected field(s) to the Used fields pane.
>>: Move all fields to the Used fields pane.
<: Move selected field(s) to the Configured fields pane.
<<: Move all fields to the Configured fields pane.
30-July-2013 | Page 294 of 336

Appendix A
Appendix A
Event Type Field Values
There are several event types you can use to indicate how an event is played. For example, if
you just want an event to play without switching or threading, you would choose Play (P) as the
primary event type. The event type letter can be typed into the event type column of a play list
or transmission list.
The primary event types are:
Play (P). An event will play without switching or threading.
Switch (S). An event will switch without threading or playing.
Thread (T). An event will thread without switching or playing.
A = Auto. An event will switch, play and thread. Auto is the default setting for most primary
events. Alternatively, a PT (play and thread) can be used to play and thread, but not switch. The
A will be required for certain event types to ensure the event executes correctly.
R = Record. A record event initiates recording on a device at the time specified in the events
time field. See Recording
O = Timed. Denotes that the event is a hard start event which automatically threads and plays at
the time specified in the events Time field. This event type will need to be added to an A event
type to execute correctly (AO).
U = Up-counting. Use an up-count event for an event of unknown duration, such as a sporting
event or any other live broadcast. During playout, the events duration will count down to
00:00:00.00 and then will count back up. This repeats until terminated by either pressing Play or
Skip on the control panel or a contact start is reached. The next event will play normally. Up
counters only work on events played from Switch Only devices. This event type will need to be
added to an A event type to execute correctly (AU).
AUO = Up-counting with hardstart. Is used when an up-count event is required to run at a
predesignated hard start or absolute time. Once this event type plays it acts as an up-count
event as described above.
Manual Start (M). Use a manual start event to provide the equivalent of a break event during
the transmission of a play list. When playing, a list will stop when it reaches a manual start
event. Click Play on the control panel.
AUM = Manual Start with Up-count. This event type combination is a manual start as described
above but with an up-count event type added to allow the event to be run as an up-count event
once it starts playing.
30-July-2013 | Page 295 of 336

Appendix A
X = Exception. This is a customized primary event in configurations that have a primary program
channel and regional feeds to play different commercials to different regions. Exception events
are different on a regional feed from those played on the primary program channel. X is only
used on a compile tape.
N = Time to Next. Enter a letter N in the type field (next to A or AU) to provide a countdown to
the events start time. This is used primarily on live events so an operator can give an accurate
countback from a break back into a live event, such as a newscast.
Q = Audible Time to Next. Enter a letter Q in the type field (next to A or AU) to provide an
audible countdown starting 30 seconds from a commercial break into the next live event. To
minimize affect on existing functionality N (Time to Next) is automatically set and hidden from
an operator when letter Q is entered.
Note: The Q event type option requires the Audible Time To Next option be enabled (checked)
on the Environment->List Options tab.
necessary to close and re-open the list windows in the client for the feature to work. (Re-loading
the lists is not necessary.)
For example, if the duration of the break is 3 minutes, then...
At 30 seconds Air Client announces: 30 seconds to go.
At 20 seconds, Air Client announces: 20 seconds, standby.
At 10 seconds, Air Client starts counting down each second: 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Other example conditions:
If the commercial break is 30 seconds long, then the countdown starts immediately with
"30 seconds to go".
If the commercial break is less than 30 seconds long, but greater than 20 seconds, then
the coundown starts at 20 seconds with "20 seconds, standby".
If the commercial break is less than 20 seconds long, but greater than 10 seconds, then
the countdown starts at 10 seconds, with the 10,9,8 .......
AUN = Time to Next with Up-count. This combination will allow a countdown to the live (upcount) event it is attached to.
AUQ = Audible Time to Next with Up-count. This combination will allow an audible countdown
to the live (up-count) event it is attached to.
D = Deadroll. A deadroll event hard starts at a specific time while the list plays. The deadroll
event plays, but does not switch, for its duration and then stops. Be advised this event type
requires that the letter D be added to an AO for it to play correctly. The operator will need to
30-July-2013 | Page 296 of 336

Appendix A
manually switch to this event type for it to be switched On Air. If the deadroll event is switched
On Air then the first event following the deadroll will need to be a hard start event type to get
the automation back on time and in full automation.
Audio/Video Breakaway (AV, AI, AVJ, AIJ). A primary event or a secondary audio/video event
can be run and cause the switcher to perform an audio/video breakaway. AV is an event type
that performs a video breakaway. AI performs audio breakaways. To rejoin the secondary
audio/video breakaway to the primary audio/video input when it finishes playing, edit the event
type to AVJ or AIJ. A breakaway event can occur at the beginning, within and the end of its
associated primary event. When used at the beginning or end, the primary event type is set to
A; the secondary event type is set to AV or AI. If the duration of the secondary event is less than
the primary event, add a J to supply the audio and video from the primary event. When used
within a primary event, the secondary event type is set to AVJ or AIJ.
NOTE: Only one breakaway can be assigned to a primary event to avoid an overlap in time. You
cannot breakaway audio and then breakaway video until the video is rejoined. Also, you cannot
breakaway video and then breakaway audio until the audio is rejoined.
30-July-2013 | Page 297 of 336

Appendix B
Appendix B
Secondary Events
Secondary events are associated with the primary event above it in the play list. Multiple
secondary events can be assigned to a primary event and are played concurrently. A secondary
events time is used as an offset in relation to the primary events time. You can edit the
configuration parameters of some secondary events. When inserting an editable secondary
event, a dialog box allows you to configure its attributes and settings.
Editable secondary events include:
GPI Contact, Back Timed GPI, Keyer On/Off, Transition Key, Audio Over On/Off, Transition Audio
Over, External and Data Event with Data.
To access an editable secondary event already in a play

To open the associated dialog box of an editable secondary event already in a play list,
1. Click on the events number.
2. From the ribbon tabs select Events > Edit Secondary.
Secondary Switching Parameter (sSP)

The secondary switching parameter contains values depending on the event type. For primary
and secondary Audio/Video events, the value is the audio modes, mono and stereo. By default,
the audio mode is stereo. The value is initially set in a media prep product, such as Media Client,
for the Audio Format database field. It can be modified in Air Client by clicking an event and
entering S or M in the sSP field in Revise mode (ALT + R).
30-July-2013 | Page 298 of 336

Appendix B
For secondary key and secondary audio over events, the value ranges from 1 to 9. The
number corresponds to a keyer or mixer channel number on the master control switcher.
If the Audio Mode selection for an existing ADC DB record is modified by the Media Client
Operator, then this update is sent to the event if it exists within an active playlist.
Secondary Audio/Video (sAV)

The secondary Audio/Video Audio Over event is used to add another A/V audio source over the
primary audio/video source. The A/V audio over source may replace the primary A/V audio
source or be mixed with it.
A secondary Audio/Video Audio Over event plays material, in addition to the primary
event on air, for use in effects such as keys, audio overs and mixes.
When inserting a new secondary audio/video event in a play list, play (P) and
thread (T), but not auto (A), are entered into the Type field. Switching is not used
for this event. The event can be used to produce the audio/video over for a
key/audio over input to a master control switcher or as an audio/video
breakaway.
To switch the switcher

An A/V event may be run to switch the switcher. To do this, enter an A, instead of
a P or T, in the Type field. The secondary event will begin with an audio-follow video
transition.
Back Timed Secondary Audio/Video (bAV)

The Back Timed A/V (backtimed secondary audio/video) event is the same as a Secondary
Audio/Video, except the secondarys on-air time is the amount of time before the primary event
will begin. (i.e. The offset is measured backwards in time from the start of the associated
primary event.)
In the event Type field, these events are inserted with types P and T (but not A). No switching is
done on these events, unless this is changed. These events can be used as a key/audio over
inputs to a master control switcher. It is possible to associate a switching event with a back
timed event. To do this, change the Type field to A. This event starts with an audio-follow-video
transition.
NOTE: Backtimed events cannot be run after up-counting events.
30-July-2013 | Page 299 of 336

Appendix B
GPI Contact (sGPI)

A GPI contact closure secondary event controls the contact closure on a GPI card. The Device
Server must have the optional GPI card.
For each event, an on time (offset) and duration value must be entered.
An offset indicates how long after the start of the primary event the contact closure should
occur.
The duration value sets the duration of the pulse or length of closure of the contact.
The offset is entered in the events on-air field and duration in the DUR field. The GPI closure
may be longer than the associated primary event.
Note: The GPI Contact will play with the corresponding Primary Event at the same time,
regardless of value of Time. The event will display as played at the primary event time,
although the actual GPI contact will close at the exact time.
GPI Contact dialog

In following parameter configuration dialog is on the Air Client:
Back Timed GPI (bGPI)

A Backtimed GPI is similar to a standard GPI event, except that the offset is measured backwards
in time from the start of the associated primary event. For example, a backtimed GPI event with
an offset of 5 seconds fires the GPI contact 5 seconds before the start of the associated primary
event.
30-July-2013 | Page 300 of 336

Appendix B
A backtimed GPI event cannot be attached to an event following a primary upcount event. In
this case, the system would not be able to calculate when to begin the GPI event.
Back Timed GPI dialog

Keyer On/Off (sKEY)

A Keyer On/Off event allows events to have an offset from the beginning of the event to be
specified. Define a secondary Keyer event in which a hole is cut in the associated primary
events video output and is filled with the output of the Keyer source.
The task performed by the key depends on the capabilities of the device you are using. This
function will only be performed if the primary events A/V Switching data is configured to use a
Master Control Switcher.
Key Event dialog

In this window, the following parameters can be set:
30-July-2013 | Page 301 of 336

Appendix B
Modifier. This parameter specifies how the key source is outlined. The options are normal,
shadow, drop shadow and border.
Source. The key fills source. When self is selected, the fill input both cuts and fills the hole.
When external is selected, the key input cuts the hole and fill input fills it in. When chroma is
selected, the key is determined by the colors of the background video.
Matte. When selected, fill input is replaced by a matte source. The matte source color is
determined by the mixer controls.
Key Hold. When selected, this option will keep the keyer on through subsequent primary
transitions.
On Time. This will determine the start time of the keyer event. This option determines how long
after the start of the primary event the key is overlaid. The value must be greater than 1.5
seconds or the key will arrive late.
NOTE: This secondary event behaves identically to the Transition Audio Over and Transition
Keyer secondary events when the value for the On Time field is blank or 00:00:00.00.
Duration. Determines the length of time the key is overlaid. Do not specify a keyer event to turn
off during the next events preroll, as mixers are not equipped to carry out both actions
concurrently. In order to have the key last as long as the primary event, make the duration field
blank.
The duration of the keyer event can either be blank, or specified as equal or greater than to:
the duration of the primary minus the secondary's (normal) offset
the duration of the primary plus the secondary's back timed offset
the duration of the secondary's end-timed offset
30-July-2013 | Page 302 of 336

Appendix B
The keyer can be removed by the End Key Hold function.
Speed and Effect. The speed option determines the speed of the transition effect. You may also
set which type of effect will run between events by using the icons located above the time
fields. Effect options are cut, mix, wipe, fade fade, cut fade and fade cut.
Key. Specifies which key source to use. Do not specify a keyer event to turn off during the next
events preroll, as mixers are not equipped to carry out both actions concurrently. Also, it is not
possible to have two transitions overlapping in time; however, you can associate two keys with
the same event as long as you set their on time and duration so they do not overlap.
A/V Keyer On/Off

The secondary Audio/Video Keyer event is used to add an A/V Keyer source over the primary
audio/video source. The A/V Keyer source may replace the primary audio/video source or be
mixed with it.
Transition Keyer (sTKY)

A transition keyer secondary event is similar to Keyer On/Off, except that the keyer is brought
up at the start of its associated primary event with the same transition type as that of the
primary. This type of secondary event has a configuration dialog box similar to Keyer On/Off;
however, for the transition key, the value of the offset cannot be set. It is possible to define a
transition key event so it lasts as long as the primary event. To do this, make the duration field
blank. If the key hold option is on, the key is held over the transition in the same way as an
ordinary secondary keyer event.
Transition Keyer dialog

30-July-2013 | Page 303 of 336

Appendix B
To define a transition key event to last as long as the primary event make the duration
field blank. If the key hold option is on, the key is held over the transition in the same way as
an ordinary secondary keyer event.
Audio Over On/Off (sAOV)

The Audio Over secondary event is used to add another audio source over the primary
audio/video source. The audio over source may replace the primary audio source or be mixed
with it.
To have the secondary audio event end at the same time as its primary event, make the
duration field blank.
Audio Over dialog

30-July-2013 | Page 304 of 336

Appendix B
Audio Over. The number of the audio input line on the mixer.
Ratio. The ratio of over audio source to primary source audio, ranging from 0 (all primary
sources) to 99 (all audio over source).
Speed and Effect. The Speed option determines the speed of the transition effect. You may also
set which type of effect will run between events by using the icons located next to the time
fields. Transition effect options are cut, mix, wipe, fade fade, cut fade and fade cut.
On Time. This determines the start position of the event and how long after the start of the
primary event the audio is overlaid. The value must be greater than 1.5 seconds or the event
arrives late; however, you may use the Transition Audio Over to restart the audio when the
primary event beings.
NOTE: This secondary event behaves identically to the Transition Audio Over and Transition
Keyer secondary events when the value for the On Time field is blank or 00:00:00.00.
Duration. Determines the length of time the event is overlaid. The event is only performed if
the primary events A/V Data is configured to use a Master Control Switcher.
Transition Audio Over (sTAO)

The secondary Transition Audio Over allows you to specify a secondary audio event to coincide
with the primary event in the same manner as a transition keyer event, as described in Keyer
On/Off.
This event has a set of options that are identical to the audio over on/off secondary event,
except that the ontime option is missing (the ontime for a transition audio over event is set to
0).
To have the secondary audio event end at the same time as its primary event, make the
duration field blank.
30-July-2013 | Page 305 of 336

Appendix B
Transition Audio Over dialog

Break
A break may be inserted at a point on the list where you would like the list to stop running.
Events will play out normally up to this event.
The first event after the Break event cues up as usual, but does not play and the program
switches to black. To restart a list after a break, click Play on the control panel. This list may also
begin if a GPI contact input is used or if preroll is initiated on a hard start event that is next on
the list.
Comment (****)
Use this secondary event to enter notes into the play list. Comments are ignored during
transmission. Any text may be inserted into the title field of a comment.
Compile ID (cmID)
This type of event is used to label a compilation list with an ID. The tape ID of the compile tape
should be entered into the ID field.
30-July-2013 | Page 306 of 336

Appendix B
Data Event (sDAT)

This type of secondary event is associated with a device but does not generate any video output.
Instead, the action specified by the event is performed at the time the event would be put on
air, had the event been associated with a video device.
For video disk servers, a data event is used to control and automate the deletion of spots from
the server. The use of this event with video disk servers requires an accurate scheduler or traffic
program. If the events are not used carefully, spots may be accidentally deleted in the video disk
server. Secondary data events are Secondary Events used to command serial devices requiring a
simple command that does not need to run a countdown on the time of an event.
This type of secondary event attaches to a primary event that plays at the time the command is
sent to the device to execute the data event command. The primary event can be any primary
event for any device.
The command is sent to the device whose device ID matches the event ID. As an example,
the commands for the video disk server are entered in the secondary events title.
The command, Delete From Disk, is entered as DEL:XXXXXXXX:YY. Xs represent the spot ID
and Ys represent the optional port value.
The command, Get From Archive, is entered as GFA:XXXXXXXX:YY.

The command, Delete From Archive, is entered as DFA:XXXXXXXX:YY.
NOTE: This secondary event may work differently based on the device being used.
Barter Spot (sBAR)

Barter spot events are associated with a primary event and are logged to the AsRun log when
the primary event runs to completion and is logged. Barter spot events are treated as comments
by the automation system and are not played.
Barter spot is used for reconciliation with traffic systems. A barter spot is a source of
audio/video that is part of another audio/video source. It is not played as separate audio/video,
but is treated as a comment that is passed to the AsRun log and to the reconciliation process.
This event is attached to the primary event. When the primary event finishes running it is logged
to the AsRun log.
30-July-2013 | Page 307 of 336

Appendix B
These events appear in the text AsRun log as Barter in the status field. In the enterprise traffic
log for example, they appear as BTR in the program type field. The appearance of the spots in
the logs does not positively indicate the spots have run. If the primary event runs, the spots are
logged; however, the spots may not have actually been on the primary material.
Record Switcher (sRSW)

Record switcher is a secondary event that performs extra switching for inputs. During a
recording, this switches to the secondary events source.
The name of the source to switch to is entered in the title field. This name must also be in the
source name table for the switcher that is supplying the video to the record device.
The event is only performed if the primary events device has the A/V data parameters
configured to specify the switcher number that has the matching name in its source name table.
Switcher Crosspoint (sXP)

This is a secondary event that performs extra switching for outputs. While an event plays, this
function switches to the secondary events source:destination. This type of secondary event
allows the control of multiple crosspoints during one primary event.
The name of the new source:destination is entered in the title field. Use the format SRC,DEST
where SRC is the name of the source and DEST, the destination. You may enter a maximum of
16 characters for the title and the name you enter must also be defined in the switchers device
parameter field for Source Name and/or Destination Name for the switcher that is controlling
the output for the primary event.
This type of event requires that the primary device have the specified switcher device
configured for its switching information. If the secondary event does not specify the source (title
=, DEST), the input crosspoint must be specified in the primary events device for the secondary
event to default the destination.
Switcher Audio Crosspoint (AUD-XPT)

This is a secondary event similar to a switcher crosspoint event - that performs extra switching
for audio outputs. While an event plays, this function switches to the secondary events audio
30-July-2013 | Page 308 of 336

Appendix B
source:destination. This type of secondary event allows the control of multiple audio crosspoints
during one primary event.
When selected for logging, the logging is done at zero crossing of the primary event.
When Switcher Audio Crosspoint is selected in the configuration, and the Control Audio
Mode option is selected in the configuration:
The Secondary Switching Parameter (sSP) field is neglected.
A new secondary event Switcher Audio Crosspoint is used for the audio routing
(shuffling).
If a Switcher Audio Crosspoint secondary event is not attached to the primary, default
values are applied for routing as per the configuration.
Format of Title field:
x1 x2 x3 x4
x1 to x4 are input values for output 1 to 4
X1 to x4 = 1 to 4.
If any of the input (x1 to x4) is not valid, it is replaced by its default (Configuration)
value.
If 2 or more Switcher Audio Crosspoint secondary events are found (resulting from an
editing mistake), only the first one is taken into consideration.
NOTE: Audio routing is done on the device specified in the ID field, if valid. If ID field is not valid
then audio routing is done on the primary event to which the secondary Switcher Audio
Crosspoint is attached.
When the next event is preset, its corresponding cross point is normalized to the default as
specified in the configuration, provided the next event audio crosspoint is not the same as the
current event.
Secondary Record (sREC)

This type of secondary event allows for the automatic recording and segmenting of live program
material for immediate playback to air. Unlike most record events, this event is used in a list that
combines record and playback activities. A secondary record event is attached to each primary
event that is being recorded.
30-July-2013 | Page 309 of 336

Appendix B
Break Sync (sSYN)

Break sync contains an estimated time of day a pod will run, a deviation time and a time for a
window of opportunity for the operator to react to the event.
This event is normally be used on a list that contains only pods/breaks of commercials. The pods
are:
Separated by either an upcount event or by this Break sync event.
Triggered to run by an external contact closure (GPI) or by clicking Play on the control
panel.
In normal operation, a contact closure/play button is detected and the next pod on the list is
played. The break sync event is marked DONE immediately. The pod plays out until either an
upcount event, break sync event or the end of the list is encountered.
If the next pod has not played by the time of day specified on its break sync event, plus its
deviation, the automation sends out a user notification to all automation clients. The event
then waits for the opportunity time for a client to respond to the notification.
If no response is received at the end of this time, the automation marks each event in the
pod and the break sync event as being missed. It stops marking events as missed when it
encounters an upcounting event or break sync event.
If the list was running an upcount event, that event is skipped and the next upcount event
runs. During the time the automation is waiting when the break sync occurs, the user
notification is sent to all clients. One or more clients are enabled to detect the user
notification.
The enabled clients display a dialog box prompting the operator to click OK to Delete Pod
and Keep Pod. The dialog box is displayed only during the waiting time and will
automatically close if the operator does not respond. This is the equivalent to clicking OK to
Delete Pod since the list on the server will time out and mark the pod missed.
If the operator clicks Keep Pod, a message is sent back to the server causing the
server to mark the break sync event as done, but leaves the pod intact waiting for
the contact closure/play button. There is no other user notification for this pod.
If the contact closure/play button does not occur, the time of day for the break sync
event for the next pod may occur. To eliminate a potential problem, the next break
sync event is used to mark the previous pod missed. This occurs automatically at the
time of day of the next break sync event minus its deviation time. When this occurs,
all events before this event are marked missed.
If the automation had been running an upcount event, then this upcounter and the
next up-counter before this break sync event are terminated before this event runs.
30-July-2013 | Page 310 of 336

Appendix B
Secondary System (sSYS)

This event allows the traffic system to schedule device (resource) assignment during the
execution of a transmission list. Like all secondary events, this type of event is attached to a
primary event.
When this event type is run, it is able to move un-assigned device heads to the list that is
running this event or release device heads in order to make them available to another list. It is
up to the traffic department to schedule the assignment and release of heads so that two lists
will not conflict in their usage of these heads. This event is programmed by filling in the time, ID
and title fields of the event with control information. The time field controls the time when the
event will run offset from the primary event.
Event IDs
The following event IDs act as commands to the list:
Assign. Will assign the device and head(s) specified in the title field to the transmission list the
event is located in. The title format is: DEVICENAME,X,Y
Where DEVICENAME is the device name (5 characters) that is assigned to the device, X is the
head number assigned to the list and ,Y is the number of other heads to be assigned.
Release. Will remove the device and head(s) specified in the event title field from the
transmission list the event is located in and return it back to the system as an unowned device
head. The title format is identical to the above described.
Protect. Performs a protect assignment on the device and head(s) to the device specified in the
type field.
The title format is: PROTECTNAME, DEVICENAME,X,Y

Where PROTECTNAME is the name of the device that is to be protected. DEVICENAME is
the device name (5 characters) that is assigned to the device, X is the head number assigned
to the list, and Y is the number of other heads to be assigned. You must first have assigned
the primary device heads to the list before assigning the protect heads. A space character
may be substituted for the comma in any of the title field commands.
Backtimed System (bSYS)

This secondary event works in the same manner as secondary system except that this event
type runs prior to the primary event by the time specified in the Time field.
30-July-2013 | Page 311 of 336

Appendix B
System Event
This secondary event allows the traffic system to schedule device (resource) assignments during
the execution of a transmission list. Like all secondary events, this type of event is attached to a
primary event. When this event type is run, it is able to move unowned device heads to the list
running this event or release device heads in order to make them available to another list. It is
up to the traffic department to schedule the assignment and release of heads so that two lists
will not conflict in their usage of these heads.
External (vDT)
Use an External secondary event to send commands or other information to a device through a
device server. This event acts as a secondary A/V event with the capability of sending commands
or other information to a specific device on the device server.
To Insert an External secondary even

When you insert this secondary event, a dialog box opens that prompts you for the data you
want to send to a device. Normally, the dialog box is a text editor window, but if there is a
special .dll file for the device, this may vary.
1. Enter the data you want to send to a device on the network in the text editor.
2. After clicking OK, Air Client inserts a line in the play list or transmission window and enters
into Revise mode.
30-July-2013 | Page 312 of 336

Appendix B
3. Enter the device ID name in the Id field. vDT is inserted in the Sec field.
4. Exit Revise Mode. To exit Revise mode, press <ALT+R> or from the Events ribbon tab select
the Cancel icon (
).
Data Event with Data (sDAT)

Use this event to send commands and other information to a specific device on the device
server.
To Insert a Data Event with Data

When inserting this secondary event, use the text editor, to enter the commands. The
commands are sent to the device whose device ID matches the event ID.
1. Enter the data you want to send in the text editor.

2. After clicking OK, Air Client inserts a line in the play list or transmission window and enters
into Revise mode. sDT is inserted in the Sec field.
3. Exit Revise Mode. To exit Revise mode, press <ALT+R> or from the Events ribbon tab select
the Cancel icon (
).
The time in the time field is the offset from the preroll of the associated primary event.
The commands are sent to the device at the offset time.
30-July-2013 | Page 313 of 336

Appendix C
Appendix C
Device Error Messages
This section lists many of the Errors that can be generated by the ADC Device Server. Please
note that the Time of Day the error occurred, the list name, as well as the Device Name precede
errors. The quickest method to find your error in this document is to do a Find using only the
text of the specific error message less the Time of Day, list name and if displayed, Device Name.
AIR COPY REMOVED FROM EVENT - The primary copy of the media was removed or ejected,
and the backup (Protect) copy became the primary copy. The media was not on-air.
ANNOTATION CAUSED SHORT PROGRAM
ARM OFF LINE: <Error Code> - One or more cassette handler component not indexed.
ANNOTATION MEDIA WAS EJECTED - The secondary record event was deleted. No record.
ARM NOT INDEXED - The arm of the TCS90 cart. Machine is not properly indexed (not
initialized or problem).
AUDIO DATA ERROR LEVEL NO GOOD - ID: <ID> <Time Code> - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR
protocol returned back an Audio Data error. The SOM of the error code will indicate where
on the tape the error occurred.
AUDIO READ AFTER WRITE NO GOOD - ID: <ID> <Time Code> - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR
protocol returned back an Audio Raw Verify error. The SOM of the error code will indicate
where on the tape the error occurred.
Audio-over number switched ON/OFF Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on Audio

Over.
Audio-over number switched ON/OFF Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on Audio

Over.
AXIS OFF LINE - The arm cannot move in the axis (not initialized or problem).
BAD BARCODE READ ON BIN: <Bin Number> - The barcode reader in the cart machine has
detected a label on the tape, but cannot properly read it.
BARCODE READ LOST - An unknown error occurred in a cart machine when trying to read
the barcode label on a tape.
BARCODE READER ERROR - An error occurred with the barcode reader.

BIN: <Bin Number> IN USE BY VTR <Error Code> - BIN assigned to multiple tape.
30-July-2013 | Page 314 of 336

Appendix C
CACHING FAILURE-CHECK EVENT:<ID> List <Error Code> - Impossible to make a cache

request. The ID of the media seems bad.
CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - C<ErrorCode> COMMAND FORMAT ERROR - Bad format

of the command sent to the cart machine.
CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - C<ErrorCode> ILLEGAL COMMAND ID - Unknown

command ID.
CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - C<ErrorCode> MARC BUFFER FULL - Cart machine buffer
is full. Impossible to run the command.
CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - C<ErrorCode> MARC BUSY - The cart machine is busy, the
command will not run.
CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - C<ErrorCode> MARC BUSY - The cart machine is busy.
CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - INVALID PARAMETER - Cart command contained invalid
parameters.
CART COMMAND MALFUNCTION - INVALID PARAMETER <ErrorCode> - Bad command

parameters sent to the cart machine.


CART ERROR ON BARCODE READER COMMAND - Problem with a barcode reader command.
CART ERROR ON ROBOT COMMAND - Problem with a robot command.
CART ERROR ON MISCELLANEOUS COMMAND - Message for every kind of errors

(MISCELLANEOUS).
CART ERROR ON VTR COMMAND - Problem with a VTR command.
CART JARRED - Attempted a movement command while the emergence stop switch is
activated.
CART MALFUNCTION - <IDC_Format_OdeticCart> - General problem in the odetics carts.
CART OTHER MALFUNCTION - M<ErrorCode> NO TIMECODE - There is no timecode
reference in the cart machine.
CART OTHER MALFUNCTION - M<ErrorCode> TIMECODE ERROR - Timecode error with the
cart machine.
CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - BAD BARCODE READ ON BIN: <ErrorCode> - The barcode
reader in the cart machine has detected a label on the tape, but cannot properly read it.
CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> Abnormal End - The command wan abnormally
finished.
CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> Abnormal End - The command was abnormally
finished.
30-July-2013 | Page 315 of 336

Appendix C
CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> DEVICE OFF LINE - Device connected but
offline.
CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> DEVICE RETURNED NAK, MINOR ERROR - The
robot responded with a NAK, instead of an ACK.
CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> DOOR IS OPEN - The door of the robot is open.
CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> EJECT TIMEOUT - Eject command didn't run on
time in a robot.
CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> EJECT TIMEOUT - Eject command didn't run on
time in a robot.
CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> UNINITIALIZED - Robot not initialized.
CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> CAN NOT CANCEL - Impossible to cancel the VTR
command.
CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> COMMAND CANCEL - Cancel of a VTR command.
CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> UNINITIALIZED - Robot not initialized.

CART ROBOT MALFUNCTION - R<ErrorCode> Unknown Robot Error - The robot returned an
unknown problem.
CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> COMMAND CANCEL - Cancel of a VTR command.

CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> COMMAND CANCEL - VTR command was
cancelled.
CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> COMMUNICATION ERROR - Communication error

between the VTR and the Device server.

from a VTR in the cart machine.


CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> DEVICE OFF LINE - Device connected but offline.
CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> DEVICE OFF LINE - VTR connected but offline.
CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> DEVICE OFF LINE - VTR from a VTR in the cart
machine is off line.
30-July-2013 | Page 316 of 336

Appendix C
CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> DEVICE WENT INTO LOCAL - The remote control
from the VTR in the cart machine is not able.
CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> HARDWARE ERROR - Hardware error for a VTR in
the cart machine.
CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> HARDWARE ERROR - Hardware error for the cart
machine.
CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> MARC BUSY - The cart machine is busy, the VTR
command is not running.
CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> MARC SOFTWARE ERROR - VTR Cart machine
software problem.
CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> MARC SOFTWARE ERROR - VTR Cart machine
software problem.
CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> NO RESPONSE - No answer from a VTR in the cart
machine.
CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> NO VTR - There is no VTR connected.

CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> REC INHIBIT - Recording impossible with a VTR in
the cart machine.
CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> SERVO TROUBLE - Servo problem.
CASSETTE STUCK IN ELEVATOR - POSSIBLE VTR PROBLEM - The door on the cart machine is
open.
CHC SLIDER NOT RETRACTED - Attempted a load port command before previous stall
condition cleared.
COMMAND TIMED OUT, RECEIVED NO REPLY - Command got no reply.
COMMUNICATIONS LOST WITH DEVICE - The communication between the device server and
the video server is lost.
COMMUNICATIONS LOST WITH DEVICE <Error Code> - A device stopped communicating

over the RS422 connection.
COMMUNICATIONS RESTORED WITH DEVICE - The communication between the device

server and the video server is restored.
COMPILE MEDIA NOT IN POSITION TO PLAY - Rollover between compile reels failed.
CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> TAPE TROUBLE - Problem with a tape in a VTR.
CART VTR MALFUNCTION - V<ErrorCode> UNDEFINED COMMAND - Undefined command
sent to a VTR in the cart machine.
COMMUNICATIONS LOST WITH CART - A Cart Machine stopped communicating over the
RS422 connection.
Device Error <Device Name> - INTERNAL ERROR - RESULT BUFFER OVERRUN - The buffer of
the video server is full. The command won't be run.
30-July-2013 | Page 317 of 336

Appendix C
Device Error <Device Name> SWITCHPRESET - VID CROSSPOINT: <VideoInput> <-> AUD
CROSSPOINT: <AudioInput> - From SwitchPreset.
DEVICE - DIAGNOSTIC CODE:<Error Code> ID: <ID> - Error code return for a media in the
video disk.
DEVICE - DIAGNOSTIC CODE:<Error Code> ID: <ID> - Specific error from the odetics cart. The
errors have to be checked in the protocol of the device.
DEVICE - DIAGNOSTIC CODE:<Error Code> ID: <ID> - Used by video disk , do not use in
diagnostic. The errors have to been checked in the protocol of the device.
DEVICE DELETED SPOT: <ID> - Spot deleted from the device. Impossible to play it.
DEVICE ERROR - PORT NOT VALID - Problem with a port of the video disk.
DEVICE ERROR - REPORTED FROM DEVICE: <Error Code> - Error code return for the video
disk.
DEVICE ERROR - REPORTED FROM DEVICE: <ErrorCode> - Used by video disk , do not use in
diagnostic. The errors have to been checked in the protocol of the device.
DEVICE NAME NOT VALID - The major device specified by the system resource event could
not be found.
DEVICE NOT CUED IN TIME, HOLDING TIME:<ID> List <Error Code> - Media not cued in time
in the video disk.
DEVICE NOT CUED IN TIME, HOLDING TIME:<ID> List <Error Code> - Media not cued in time.
DEVICE PLAY/RECORD STATUS LATE: <ID> - Problem with the time delay of the device.
DEVICE NOT IN EDIT ON - After a command to go into edit on mode, the device indicates
that it is not in edit on mode.
DEVICE RECORDED SPOT: <ID> - Spot recorded in the device. Can be played.
DEVICE RETURNED ACK - Received unexpected ack.
DEVICE RETURNED NAK, MINOR ERROR <Error Code> - A device returned either a NAK
through the protocol or a problem with communications existed.
DEVICE RETURNED UNEXPECTED NAK, MINOR ERROR <Error Code> - Received unexpected
nak.
DEVICE SENT CUE CMD: <ID> - ID in copy queue is not in spot collection.
DEVICE SERVER TIMECODE LOST - Reference Timecode missing. Shifting from timecode to
reference video for clocking input
DEVICE TIMEOUT -RETRYING COMMAND: <Error Code> - A timeout occurred when waiting
for the response of a device.
DEVICE SENT PROTECT CMD: <ID> - Record media, spot marked for cache.
DEVICE SERVER LOST BACKGROUND: <Error Code> - Event pointer nil when unregistered.
DEVICE SERVER REFERENCE VIDEO LOST - Reference Video missing. Shifting to PC Clock for
clocking input. (Timecode also missing)
30-July-2013 | Page 318 of 336

Appendix C
DEVICE WENT INTO LOCAL - The device is no longer under automation control.
Communications exist, but the device will not respond to commands.
DIAGNOSTIC STATUS ERROR <Error Code> - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR protocol returned
the diagnostic status bit set in the extended status. The minor error code has the actual
error code as defined by the Sony VTR Protocol.
DISK ERROR - AUDIO OVERLOAD - Problem with the configuration of the audio in the video
server.
DISK ERROR - COMMAND NOT SUPPORTED - The video file server received a command not
yet implemented.
DISK ERROR - COMMAND WHILE BUSY - The video server had an error while is busy.
DISK ERROR - CUE NOT DONE - The media was not cued on the right timecode.
DISK ERROR - DISK IS FULL, RECORD FAILED - The video disk server is full. No recording.
DISK ERROR - ID ALREADY EXISTS: <ID> - ID already exist in the video server. Message for a
record.
DISK ERROR - ID DELETE PROTECTED: <ID> - ID protected, do not delete from the video
server.
DISK ERROR - ID NOT FOUND: <ID> - The media in the video server is not in the device
storage.
DISK ERROR - ID STILL PLAYING: <ID> - Impossible to stop the media during a play.
DISK ERROR - ILLEGAL VALUE - Bad value sent to the video server in a command.
DISK ERROR - NO VIDEO INPUT - No video input in the video disk.
DISK ERROR - ID STILL RECORDING: <ID> - Impossible to stop the media during a record.
DISK ERROR - ID TRANSFERRED: <ID> - Impossible to play an ID from the video server it was
already transferred.
DISK ERROR - INVALID ID: <ID> - The format of the ID is not correct.
DISK ERROR - INVALID PORT - Configuration conflict with port.
DISK ERROR - NO AUDIO INPUT - There's no input audio flow in the video server.
DISK ERROR - NO REFERENCE INPUT - The video file server has had the reference video
removed.
DISK ERROR - NO VIDEO PORT OPEN - There's no port configured for the playout.
DISK ERROR - NOT IN CUED STATE - The state of the media in the device server is not already
cued.
DISK ERROR - PORT NOT ACTIVE - The port of the video server is not active. The command
won't be run.
DISK ERROR - PORT NOT IDLE - The port of the video server is not well reinitialized.
30-July-2013 | Page 319 of 336

Appendix C
DISK ERROR - PORT PLAYING OR ACTIVE - The port is already used for a command.
Impossible to use it for a new one.
DISK ERROR - SYSTEM ERROR - General problem in the video server.
DISK NAK - COMMUNICATIONS CHECKSUM ERROR - Time out between the device server
and the video server. Problem with the checksum of the video server answer.
DISK NAK - COMMUNICATIONS FRAMING ERROR - Time out between the device server and
the video server. Problem with the format of the video server answer.
DISK NAK - COMMUNICATIONS OVER FLOW - Time out between the device server and the
video server. Problem with the format of the video server answer.
DISK NAK - COMMUNICATIONS PARITY ERROR - Time out between the device server and the
video server. Problem with the parity bit of the video server answer.
DISK NAK - COMMUNICATIONS TIME OUT - Time out between the device server and the
video server. No response from the video server.
DISK NAK - COMMUNICATIONS UNDEFINED ERROR - Undefined error from the video server.
ELEVATOR OFF LINE - The robotic elevator is in an offline state.
DISK ERROR - VIDEO PORT DOWN - The playout port is down.

DISK ERROR - WRONG PORT TYPE - Wrong port assignment in the video server.
DISK ERROR-CUE OR OPERATION FAILED: <ID> - Impossible to cue an event in the video
server. This message is used for another command.
DOOR OPEN TIMEOUT - The door stayed open too long.

DUPLICATE TAPE: <ID> In BIN: <Bin Number> - There at least two identical ID in the bins of
the cart Machine.
ELEVATOR REPLY TIMEOUT - The elevator of the cart machine didn't move on time.
EMERGENCY STOP ACTIVE - Manual intervention has removed the device from service.
ERROR - DEVICE ACCESS ERROR - Access denied in the device.
ERROR - DEVICE OUT OF MEMORY - The memory of the device is full.
ERROR - DISK CACHE RECORDER FAILED ID: <ID> - Problem with the recording during the
cache.
ERROR - DISK FAILED PLAY ID: <ID> - Problem to play a media from the video server.
ERROR - DISK FAILED RECORD ID: <ID> - Problem to record a media to the video server.
ERROR - LOST DISK REPLY(S) - Problem with the disk of the video server.
ERROR - RESENT LAST COMMAND - A command have not been executed and lost from the
memory of the video server.
ERROR - UNKNOWN RESPONSE - The answer from the video server is wrong.
30-July-2013 | Page 320 of 336

Appendix C
EVENT NOT PLAYED - INVALID OFFSET ON SECONDARY - A secondary GPI event that was to
be run twice on the same primary event had an overlapping start time on the subsequent
GPI event.
EVENT NOT PLAYED - MEDIA MISSING - NOT FOUND - The event was unable to play because
the ID was not found in any device
EVENT NOT PLAYED - MEDIA NOT THREADED - The event was unable to play because the
media was not threaded into a device.
EVENT NOT PLAYED - NOT CUED IN TIME - The event was unable to play because it was
unable to cue.
EVENT NOT PLAYED - SKIP ISSUED - The event began to play, but the operator intervened by
invoking the skip command.
EVENT NOT PLAYED - SECONDARY MEDIA MISSING - GMT Error. A GMT transfer failed
because the secondary events were not valid, such as in a baseband transfer.
EVENT SKIPPED - ABNORMAL END - An event encountered an end of media condition such
as end of tape or end of recorded clip. The media stopped playing and the next event was
run. (If a Protect copy exists this message is not generated)
EVENT UNABLE TO CUE - NO SOM - The Start of Message in the event is invalid for the
material. Cannot cue the material to the specified location
EVENT UNABLE TO RECORD, REC INHIBIT ON - The device has recording disabled. Typically, a
VTR with the rec inhibit tab set
FETCH OR INSERT TO EMPTY OR FULL LOCATION - Try to insert in full bin or try to take a
tape from an empty bin.
GMT Media Transfer Failed, Time = - A failure was reported back to the list for a media
transfer by a requester. The media was not transferred.
GMT-Abort event due to archive or Disk time out - Abort event due to the archive manager
or the video file server timeout.
GMT-Baseband device I/O failure - A problem occurred during the baseband transfer.
GMT-Event aborted during running state - The running GMT event aborted during
execution.
GMT-Event ID not found in source device - Event ID not found in the source device.
GMT-Found Buffer full during Global Delete - A buffer overflow error occurred during a
global delete.
GMT-Found unknown/unimplemented disk command - Found unknown / unimplemented

VDCP command during transfer.
GMT-ID already existed in destination device - The media already exists in the device storage
of the destination device.
GMT-List event cut or Ran Short - An event on the GMT list was cut.
30-July-2013 | Page 321 of 336

Appendix C
GMT-Listed ID not found in Distributor collection - The media wasn't found by the
distributor.
GMT-Missing Disk Handle while needed - There is no disk handle parameter available for the
activity.
GMT-No Fiber Distributor to do the MOV after BB transfer - No fibre distributor available to
do the move after the baseband transfer has occurred.
GMT-No Fiber Distributor to do the MOV after CFA - There is no fibre distributor to do a
copy after the move from archive has occurred.
GMT-No Global delete targets configured - No global delete targets are configured in the
distributor.
GMT-Request success - The request succeeded.

GMT-Requestor lost communication with Distributor - The requester lost communications
with the distributor
GMT-Transfer Success - Distributor transfer media in Fiber/Archive/WAN routing mode is

successful.
GMT-VACP ERR COMM FAIL - VACP response from archive manager. Problem of
communication.
GMT-VACP ERR ID EXISTS - VACP response from archive manager. The ID is already existing.
GMT-VACP ERR ID NOT FOUND - VACP response from archive manager. The ID was not in a
device storage. The archive manager cannot find the specified ID.
GMT-VACP ERR INIT - VACP response from archive manager. Problem at the initialization.
GMT-VACP ERR INSUFF MEMORY - VACP response from archive manager. Problem of
memory.
GMT-VACP ERR INSUFF SVCS - Insufficient services.
GMT-VACP ERR MACRO FAIL - The Archive manager reports (CFA/CTA) macro command is
failed.
GMT-VACP ERR OP COMPLETED - Inverse of Incomplete Operation.
GMT-VACP ERR OPERATION ABORTED - VACP response from archive manager. The
command was aborted because of an unspecified error.
GMT-VACP ERR PARM INVALID - VACP response from archive manager. Bad parameters in
the command.
GMT-VACP ERR PARTITION SMALL - The partition is too small to hold the material.
GMT-VACP ERR PORT_BUSY - VACP response from archive manager. The port is busy.
Impossible to run the command.
GMT-VACP ERR RW FAILURE - VACP response from archive manager. Problem on read write
mode.
GMT-VACP ERR SETUSERID - VACP Client is using wrong user ID to do the login.
30-July-2013 | Page 322 of 336

Appendix C
GMT-VACP ERR TAPE UNAVAIL - VACP response from archive manager. No available tape to
perform the operation.
GMT-VACP ERR TIMEOUT - VACP response from archive manager. Time out on a command.
GMT-VACP ERR UNKNOWN Command Received - VACP response from archive manager. The
command is not a valid one.
GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_CHECKSUM - VACP response from archive manager. The checksum

indicates an error in transmission.
GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_FRAMING - VACP response from archive manager. A framing error was
detected in the message.
GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_ID_CONFLICT - VACP response from archive manager. The ID being

sent to the archive already exists.
GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_ILLEGAL_VALUE - VACP response from archive manager. The response

is a NAK, as a result of an illegal value being sent.
GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_OVERRUN - VACP response from archive manager. An over run

condition was detected in the message.
GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_PARITY - VACP response from archive manager. A parity error was
detected in the message.
GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_UNDEFINED - VACP response from archive manager. The response is a

NAK, of undefined error type.
GMT-VACP NAK_ERR_UNSUPPORTED - VACP response from archive manager. The command

is not supported by the archive manager.
GMT-VACP SUCCESS - VACP response from archive manager. Clip moved successfully.
GMT-VDCP Archive disk handle not configured - VDCP archive disk handle not configured.
GMT-VDCP_SUCCESS - VDCP response from archive manager. The command ran with
success.
HARD ERROR - A Sony Protocol VTR returned back the Hard Error bit enabled indicating
some physical problem with the VTR or Tape.
HARDWARE TROUBLE BUZZER ALARM - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR protocol returned the
buzzer bit set in the extended status.
HEAD STILL IN PLAY - The system resource event attempted to assign a device that was in
play. The assignment did not take place.
HUB OFF LINE - Attempted a load port command with no load port installed. Attempted a
transfer command with no transfer mechanism installed.
ID DOES NOT MATCH, MACRO LSB <Error Code> - ID doesn't match.

INCORRECT SIZE AT LOCATION - Insert command attempted to an incorrect size location.
INTERNAL ERROR - BAD COMMAND GENERATED - The format of the command is wrong.
30-July-2013 | Page 323 of 336

Appendix C
INVALID EVENT COMMAND - The system resource event was not valid and could not be
decoded by the list.
INVALID HEAD NUMBER - The minor device head specified by the system resource event
was not a valid head number.
Keyer number switched ON/OFF Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on Keyer.
LOAD PORT FULL - CANNOT UNLOAD VTR - Load port is full in the procart.
Keyer number switched ON/OFF Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on Keyer.

List will stop on next event - Manual intervention occurred, List will stop on next event, id
field is empty.
LOAD PORT INDEX, OPEN, CLOSED ARM IN FRONT ?? - Load port problem, it can be a bad
reinitialization, or the load port is open or the arm is blocked just in front.
LOAD PORT NOT INDEXED - Bad load port initialization.
LOAD PORT STALL NOT CLEARED - Tape were not put out of the load port.
MACRO BUSY ERROR - A Sony Cart machine returned back a status of Macro Busy on a
macro command. This error condition should never occur in a Sony Cart Machine.
MACRO DISTURBED - A Sony Cart machine returned back via the protocol that a Marco
Command was either terminated or disturbed.
MACRO NOT FOUND, MACRO LSB <Error Code> - Couldn't find macro.
MAIN ROBOT - General robot problem.
MAIN ROBOT, CLAW 1 - Problem with the gripper 1 of the robot.
MAIN ROBOT, CLAW 2 - Problem with the gripper 2 of the robot.
MAIN ROBOT, X AXIS - Problem with the X Axis arm robot.
MAIN ROBOT, Y AXIS - Problem with the Y Axis arm robot.
Manual Intervention of System - Indicates Manual Intervention on the switcher.
MASTER MEDIA FAILURE - DURING PREROLL - A failure of the primary media occurred during
pre-roll of the media. No switching to a protect copy could occur at this time.
MASTER MEDIA FAILURE - PROTECT COPY NOT PLAYING - A failure of the primary media
occurred but the backup media was unable to be switched into the on-air video stream.
MASTER MEDIA FAILURE - PROTECT COPY SWITCHED - A failure of the primary media caused
the backup media (Protect) to be switched into the on-air video stream.
MECHANICAL INTERFERENCE - Mechanical interference.

MEDIA DEVICE NOT PROPERLY INITIALIZED - The media wasn't initialized properly.
MEDIA UNABLE TO CUE - ID: <ID> - Device is unable to cue.
MODE SET TO DISABLE MOVEMENT WHEN DOOR OPEN - In the Procart cart machine you
can enable or not a sound indicating that the door in the Procart cart machine is open and
that you have to close it.
30-July-2013 | Page 324 of 336

Appendix C
MOVE WITH LIGHT CURTAIN ACTIVE - While moving the robotics, an interruption of the light
curtain was detected.
MULTIPLE GRIPPER ERRORS
NAK RETURNED FROM SWITCHER - The switcher responded with a NAK, instead of an ACK.
NO CASSETTE IN GRIPPER - Procart cart machine. No tape in the gripper.
NO VTR AT LOCATION - There is no VTR installed at the physical location.
MULTIPLE GRIPPER ERRORS, ARM <Error Code> PLACED OUT OF SERVICE - Gripper is out of
service.
NO ANNOTATION EVENTS TO RECORD - The secondary record event was not inserted. No
record.
NO MORE BINS TO STORE MEDIA - The bins in the cart machine are all full. There is no more
room for tapes in the cart machine.
ON AIR EVENT PACKED - LIST WILL STOP - The on-air event was playing, and the packing of
the list forced the deletion of the event.
ON AIR EVENT WAS CUT - The on-air event was playing, and it was deleted from the playlist
OUTPORT IS FULL - PLEASE EMPTY IT - The I/O port of the cart machine is full. It must be
emptied so that the current ejection process continues.
PGM crosspoint number Audio switched Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on Audio
crosspoint number.
PGM crosspoint number Audio switched Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on Audio
crosspoint number.
PGM crosspoint number Video switched Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on video
crosspoint number.
PGM crosspoint number Video switched Manually - Manual Intervention occurred on video
crosspoint number.
PLAY ISSUED - MEDIA IN LOCAL - The device received the play command, but the returned
status indicates that it did not go into play mode.
PLAYOUT TIMES OVERLAP - Events overlapped in the transmission list.
ON AIR EVENT WAS EJECTED - Media was ejected during playout

ON AIR EVENT WAS RECUED - The event began to play, but the operator intervened by
invoking the recue command.
PRESETEFFECT BEGIN VID CROSSPOINT: <VideoInput> <-> AUD CROSSPOINT: <AudioInput> Beginning of PresetEffect.
PRESETEFFECT END VID CROSSPOINT: <VideoInput> <-> AUD CROSSPOINT: <AudioInput> End of PresetEffect.
PROGRAM/INTERFACE ERROR - SYSTEM ALARM - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR protocol
returned the system alarm bit set in the extended status.
30-July-2013 | Page 325 of 336

Appendix C
PROTECT COPY NOT USABLE REMOVED - The protect copy of the media was removed or
ejected, but the primary copy was not. The media was not on-air.
PROTECT MEDIA NOT PLAYED - NOT CUED - The secondary event was unable to play
because the media was not cued in time.
PROTECT NAME NOT VALID - The major device to be used as a protect device, specified by
the system resource event could not be found.
PUT TAPE FROM VTR: <Error Code> INTO BIN: <Bin Number> - Problem with an unthread
tape for a VTR to a bin in the odetics cart.
PUT TAPE: <ID> FROM BIN: <Bin Number> INTO VTR: <Error Code> - Problem with a
threading tape in a VTR of an odetics cart.
RECORD ENDED PREMATURELY - The event for a record operation terminated abnormally.
RECORD EVENT WAS CUT - The record event was recording, and it was deleted from the
record list.
RECORD NOT STARTED - Event failed to start.
REMOVE TAPES FROM VTRS, INSERT VIA I/O PORT - Somebody put tapes manually into a
VTR instead of the load port.
RESEAT CASSETTE IN BIN: <Bin Number> AND INIT ROBOT - Put the tape in its bin and
reinitialize the robot.
Return to Automated Control of System - Indicates the switcher is back to the list control.
SERIAL CONTROL WENT INTO AUTOMATION - The device is now under automation control.
This is the reverse of AUTO_ENABLE_OFF.
SERIAL CONTROL WENT INTO LOCAL - The device is no longer under automation control.
Communications exist, but the device will not respond to commands.
SETKEYON END VID CROSSPOINT: <VideoInput> <-> AUD CROSSPOINT: <AudioInput> - End
of DoSetKeyOn.
SETMIXON END VID CROSSPOINT: <VideoInput> <-> AUD CROSSPOINT: <AudioInput> - End
of DoSetMixOn.
STANDBYON ISSUED - MEDIA IN LOCAL - The device received the standby command, but the
returned status indicates that it did not go into standby mode
SWITCHER COMMAND QUEUE FULL <Error Number> - From PutQueue, when queue is full.
REFERENCE VIDEO MISSING - The VTR has lost the reference video signal.
REMOVE TAPE FROM VTR, INSERT VIA I/O PORT - Somebody put a tape manually into a VTR
instead of the load port.
ROBOT WARNING number V<ErrorCode> VTR number <ID> - Problem with a VTR from the
MARC cart machine.
SWITCHER DID NOT RESPOND TO REQUEST - The switcher is no longer communicating.

SYSTEM ERROR: NO DATAGRAM NCBS - DOS Server network error, obsolete error
30-July-2013 | Page 326 of 336

Appendix C
TAKE WAS SENT VID CROSSPOINT: <VideoInput> <-> AUD CROSSPOINT: <AudioInput> - From
Background, just after sending take.
TAPE TROUBLE - A Sony Protocol VTR returned back the Tape Trouble bit enabled indicating
some problem with the tape.
TARGETING OR DOOR OPEN - Procart cart machine. The door is either open or the tape
could be put in the VTR.
THREAD FAILURE - DOOR OPEN OR SYSTEM DOWN - <Error Code> - The threading of a tape
into the cart VTR has failed. The elevator may have become jammed or the VTR jammed.
TRANSITION - INPUT CROSSPOINT: <CrosspointInput> <-> OUTPUT CROSSPOINT:

<CrosspointOutput> - From transition or/and control panel.
TRANSPORT MECHANISM MUST BE EMPTIED MANUALLY - Gripper has to be emptied

manually.
TROUBLE IN DEVICE SERVO - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR protocol returned the servo
alarm bit set in the extended status.
TROUBLE WITH OUTPORT - PLEASE CHECK - On those cart machines that have an I/O port,
attempting to put a tape into the I/O port failed because of a hardware problem with the
I/O port.
UNABLE TO ASSIGN HEAD - Using the system resource assignment event, the device that
was to be assigned to the list could not be assigned.
UNABLE TO RELEASE HEAD - Using the system resource assignment event, the device that
was to be released from the list could not be released.
UNKNOWN MARC ERROR - Unknown MARC cart machine problem.
UNKNOWN THREAD ERROR - <Error Code> - A Sony Cart returned an unknown Macro
completion code when the threading of a tape into a VTR failed.
USERBITS NOT VALID, DEVICE NOT SET TO EJECT - A VTR was set to keep the tape even if an
eject was issued, but the userbit associated with the tape was not valid.
VENUS NOT LOCKED TO TIMECODE - Venus doesn't get any timecode.
UNKNOWN RESPONSE FROM CART <Error Code> - Undefined problem from the LMS cart
machine.
VIDEO DATA ERROR LEVEL NO GOOD - ID: <ID> <Time Code> - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR
protocol returned back an Video Data error. The SOM of the error code will indicate where
on the tape the error occurred.
VIDEO READ AFTER WRITE NO GOOD - ID: <ID> <Time Code> - In a Digital Sony deck the VTR
protocol returned back an Video Raw Verify error. The SOM of the error code will indicate
where on the tape the error occurred.
VTR COMMAND TIMEOUT - The VTR command wasn't made on time.

VTR EJECT FAILURE - CHECK FOR JAM - <Error Code> - The VTR did not eject the tape when
requested.
30-July-2013 | Page 327 of 336

Appendix C
VTR ERROR number<Bin Number> - Problem with a tape between the VTR and the bin of the
cart.
VTR PROBLEM - CHECK FOR JAM - <Error Code> - A VTR in a cart machine had a failure and is
off-line.
VTR STATUS : <Bin Number> - <Bin Number> - Status of the VTR returned to the device
server.
WARNING-SPOT SHORTER THAN SCHEDULED: <ID> - The spot in the video server is too short
to play well the next event.
30-July-2013 | Page 328 of 336

Appendix D
Appendix D
System Timing
The purpose of this section is to provide a step-by-step guide to system timing to ensure frame
accurate operation of the ADC system.
If a customer says that his Video Server is playing out several frames late and needs to adjust
the "number of frames to send play early" parameter, the cause is likely to be the frame
inaccuracy of the source VTR or the latency of the router. The following process will ensure the
frame accuracy of the source VTR, the router and the Video Server.
Requirements
For all tests, a record capable VTR not under automation control is required. This VTR should be
fed with time-of-day timecode from the same source as the Device Server. The VTR should be
set to external timecode generation. This ensures that any recording made with this VTR will
have time-of-day timecode embedded in the recording.
The video input to the record VTR should be an output of the router. Temporarily configure the
A/V routing tables so that the switch-only device (see below) and the playback VTR are both
switched to the same destination on the router - the input to the record VTR.
Verify the source VTR and router's accuracy

Steps 1 and 2 may be done simultaneously.
1. Set the list pre-roll for 5 seconds. This ensures that the VTR is frame accurate. All Media
Lists and GMT Lists that use VTRs or cart machines as sources should have their pre-roll set
to 5 seconds to allow VTRs to get up to speed.
2. Prepare a test playlist similar to the one below (Fig. 1). The essential elements are a VTR
event sandwiched between two switch-only events. The VTRs timecode window
superimposed output must be sent to the router input for this VTR. The SOM of the tape
should be to the nearest 10 seconds, as should the hard start time. In an NTSC drop frame
environment, avoid a start time at zero seconds, zero frames.
3. Start the recording VTR. Roll the test playlist and allow the three events to play out.
Validating Frame Accuracy

Once the recording has completed, two things may be checked.
1. First, check that the VTR was playing frame-accurately. Rewind the recording to any section
of the VTR event. The seconds and frames in the timecode window on the monitor should
30-July-2013 | Page 329 of 336

Appendix D
be the same as the seconds and frames displayed on the VTR which has performed the
recording.
If they are not, then adjust the playback VTR's Edit Compensation: "Sync Adjust" parameter.
2. Next, the frame accuracy of the router may be checked. The first frame of video from the
VTR event should end in x0:00 and the last frame should be x9:24 (for PAL) or x9:29 (for
NTSC). If these values are incorrect, the latency of the router needs to be adjusted. For
example, if the first frame is x0:02 and the last frame is x0:01 the router is switching two
frames late.
Latency > Switcher Latency: Adjust the router's latency to 2 frames and repeat the test.
30-July-2013 | Page 330 of 336

Appendix D
Verify the Video Servers' accuracy

Now that the source VTR and router have been verified to be frame accurate, the Video Server's
record and playout ports can be checked. Using either GMT or the Media Client, the playback
VTR used in the first step should be configured as the source device. A list pre-roll of 5 seconds
should again be used to ensure that the source device behaves consistently. Ideally, the same
10-second clip should be used along with the superimposed output of the source VTR as before.
Autocopy (using the Media Client) or allow GMT to record the clip to the Video Server being
tested.
Once the clip has been recorded, a playlist similar to the list created earlier should be prepared,
but with the playback VTR replaced with the playback Video Server port. Make a recording of
the three playout events as before.
Again, the playback of the recorded sequence will determine two things the frame accuracy of
the recording and of the playback.
That the seconds and frames of the timecode of both the timecode window and VTR timecode
display are synchronized does not necessarily mean that all is well. This could mean that the
recording is a frame late and the playback is a frame early. Shuttle to the start of the Video
Server clip.
Is the first frame the correct frame with a timecode of x0:00? Shuttle to the end of the Video
Server clip. Is the last frame x9:24 (for PAL) or x9:29 (for NTSC)? If the answer to both is yes
then the system is correctly timed. If the answer to either is no or the seconds and frames are
not synchronized, then a timing adjustment needs to be made.
Ensure that the recording will be frame accurate by playing back the clip from the Video Server
with no events before or after it. In addition, switch the Video Server output to the recording
VTR before this event is run to ensure that no crosspoint switching is occurring. This does not
need to be a hard start event but does need to be recorded on the VTR.
Is the first frame x0:00 and the last x0:24 or x0:29? If not, the recording is not frame accurate
and the "number of frames to send record early" parameter should be adjusted accordingly on
the Video Server's record port.
Once this timing is correct, the test with two switch-only events either side of the Video Server
event may be repeated.
Any error in this test will therefore be in the playback. This may be remedied by adjusting the
number of Frames to Send Play Early" parameter on the playout port of the Video Server.
30-July-2013 | Page 331 of 336

Appendix D
30-July-2013 | Page 332 of 336

Appendix E
Appendix E
Tips and Good Habits
Following these guidelines will help ensure more trouble-free operation in your daily use in your
day-to-day use of the system.
The TWO Golden Rules

It is imperative that good habits be established from the start with your new automation
system. The two most important of these Good Habit tips are explained below.
FIX BEFORE YOU APPEND
Make sure you ALWAYS fix any errors on the playlist BEFORE the list file is appended. The
workflow needs to be adjusted (if it isnt already) to accommodate someone taking 10 20
minutes (eventually it will be this fast!, or even faster) to open, check, fix and SAVE the
playlist file, the night before, right before the append step.
Why is this so important? There are critical errors that may appear on a playlist that may
stop the list or (in very rare cases) cause for list corruption so these checked for/corrected
BEFORE a list is appended. When a list is appended, the list file is added to the active RAM
of the device server. If the Traffic system, or translator somehow had a glitch or other
problem when creating the playlist file, the file may contain corruption. If this corruption is
added to the active transmission list your playlist may hang or stop, or even worse, your
device server may crash taking all your active transmission lists off the air, and stopping your
Record Lists as well.
When a new list comes in from Traffic, it should ALWAYS be opened in the Playlist Editor
(File/Open Playlist) FIRST and should be checked for any common housekeeping type errors,
then SAVED. Recurring errors should not happen very often. Going forward it is important
that Master Control work with Traffic and with Harris Broadcast to get these repeat
offender type recurring errors to stop appearing on the logs. Remember, once Traffic has
something in their formats correctly, and the Translator is tweaked accordingly, repeat
errors will end up a thing of the past, and a rarity. And, at this point the editing/fixing of
tomorrows playlist will go from taking over an hour to fix, to taking only a mere 5-15
minutes to check, fix and save.
A pre-fixed list is also important so that if you have a problem and need to reload the
transmission list, then your changes will have been saved.
Active transmission list editing should be reserved for last-minute write in log changes or
other routine day-of-air adjustments. A race against the clock type model for fixing
playlist errors should be avoided as this will significantly increase the likelihood of causing
30-July-2013 | Page 333 of 336

Appendix E
list corruption, and not to mention risk incorrect content airing and increase the chances of
critical problems being missed outright and air being compromised as a result.
**ANY LAST-MINUTE or write-in type changes that need to be done on the active list should
always be done at a point where the list is not transitioning through spots. In other words,
avoid REVISE mode on an active list while transitioning (in a break, etc) when possible.
Avoid Recycling Numbers/Stay On Top Of Purging Content

Avoid recycling numbers, or stay on top of purging the database records and content associated
with recycled numbers. It is recommended that the reuse of numbers is avoided if at all
possible. If this is not possible (Traffic limitation) then there are a few steps below that should
be taken to avoid major on-air problems
Get in the habit of always incorporating the intended air date in the title field of all recurring
shows; example Judge Judy as Judge Judy FR8/24 and use this logic for
episodic/topical promos as well MON 11p topical as MON 8/27 Topical
The second, equally important step is to have a few people stay on top of purging this old
content at least once or twice a week. If old content is not purged from the system then the
feed for the next episode of the same number will stay red and will not record. If content is
not purged completely (from both database and server) then old content may accidentally
re-air, or new content may attempt to air with the timecode values and durations from last
weeks show.
30-July-2013 | Page 334 of 336

Appendix F
Appendix F
About AFD Codes
The following information is provided for background reference. AFD codes are valid in
baseband SDI and DVB/ATSC transport streams.
SP is shoot and protect. It protects the centre 14:9 region in a 4:3 original. These are ADF
codes 13 to 16.
TA is Top Aligned and is AFD code 2 and 3. These are not recommended for ASI transport
streams used in the American ATSC standard. (This is the US equivalent of Freeview)
Code
Description
ETSI: reserved; ATSC: undefined
reserved
ETSI: 16:9 active picture (top aligned); ATSC: "not recommended"
ETSI: 14:9 active picture (top aligned); ATSC: "not recommended"
ETSI: box > 16:9 (center): wider than 16:9 active picture. The aspect ratio of the
source area is not given, and the size of the top/bottom bars is not indicated.
ATSC: bar data (indicating the extent of top, bottom, left, and right bars) should be
transmitted when using this code.
57
reserved
Full Frame image, same as the frame (4:3 or 16:9).
4:3 Image: Full Frame in 4:3 frame, Pillarbox in 16:9 frame.
10
16:9 Image: Letterbox in 4:3 frame, Full Frame in 16:9 frame.
11
14:9 Pillarbox/Letterbox image.
12
unused
13
4:3 with shoot and protect 14:9 centre. The term "shoot and protect" is not
explained in the standard, but means that the areas above and below the central
14:9 region of the 4:3 active picture can be trimmed without losing important
detail.
14
16:9 with shoot and protect 14:9 centre. Here, the areas to the right and left of the
central 14:9 region of the 16:9 active picture can be trimmed without losing
important detail.
30-July-2013 | Page 335 of 336

Appendix F
Code
Description
15
16:9 with shoot and protect 4:3 centre. Here, the areas to the right and left of the
central 4:3 region of the 16:9 active picture can be trimmed without losing
important detail.
30-July-2013 | Page 336 of 336

ADC Air Client

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

ADC Air Client

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Operations Reference

ADC Air Client v4.21.18

Delivering the Moment

Support Contact Information

ADC Air Client v4.21.18

2013 Harris Broadcast

Proprietary and Confidential

30-July-2013 | Page 3 of 336

ADC Air Client v4.21.18

Transmission List Window ...................................................................................................................... 39

Getting Started .................................................................................................... 45

2013 Harris Broadcast

Proprietary and Confidential

30-July-2013 | Page 4 of 336

ADC Air Client v4.21.18

To force reinitialize the OCP............................................................................................................... 60

On-Air Playback Operations ................................................................................. 63

2013 Harris Broadcast

Proprietary and Confidential

30-July-2013 | Page 5 of 336

ADC Air Client v4.21.18

Toggle Look Ahead.................................................................................................................................. 85

Proprietary and Confidential

30-July-2013 | Page 6 of 336

ADC Air Client v4.21.18

About the SyncSkip command ......................................................................................................... 112

Playlist Editing Operations ................................................................................. 118

2013 Harris Broadcast

Proprietary and Confidential

30-July-2013 | Page 7 of 336

ADC Air Client v4.21.18

To Drag-and-Drop a Single Event ..................................................................................................... 147

Managing Resource Windows ............................................................................ 159

2013 Harris Broadcast

Proprietary and Confidential

30-July-2013 | Page 8 of 336

ADC Air Client v4.21.18

To Display the More Info Window ................................................................................................... 174

Managing Compile Lists ..................................................................................... 176

Error Management ............................................................................................ 181

Emergency Operations....................................................................................... 184

Automated Recording ........................................................................................ 188

2013 Harris Broadcast

Proprietary and Confidential

30-July-2013 | Page 9 of 336

ADC Air Client v4.21.18

Key Elements .................................................................................................................................... 188

Barcode Event .................................................................................................... 194

Logging .............................................................................................................. 200

WinCmms .......................................................................................................... 205

2013 Harris Broadcast

Proprietary and Confidential

30-July-2013 | Page 10 of 336

ADC Air Client v4.21.18

WinCmms Setup ................................................................................................................................... 206

Global Media Transfer (GMT) ............................................................................ 208

ADC AirFlex ........................................................................................................ 212

ADC FlexSyncTM .................................................................................................. 215

LinkList ............................................................................................................... 217

Air Client Installation ......................................................................................... 218

2013 Harris Broadcast

Proprietary and Confidential

30-July-2013 | Page 11 of 336

ADC Air Client v4.21.18